Alfa Laval Lopx 705

I
.,
LOPX 705
Separation Syste
Cap-up
,
\ /
@ / \
, '
"----,,@
MM11
VOL3
"\
Ca p-u p
MACHINERY
PART I FINISHED DWG
PURIFIER
(FINAL DWG .& INSTRUCTION MANUAL)
1 Safety
2 System -Descr:i:ption
3 Operati=ng Instruct~ions
5 Alarms and Fault FiAding
6 System Reference
7 lrnstallatio:n Instructions
8 Separato'r Manu·al (incl. fault finding)

Spare Parts Catalogue
9 Component Descripttons (incl. fault finding)
·· :,--_- -. ~-"' .,-- . · : ·(· · · .: .: ;·Aifa Laval Marine & Power -- .. : - · - ·-· · · · _... ··
Printed · May 1996 Product No. 1765119-0'1
Book No. .181711:7-02
Alta Laval ,res.erve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Amy c0mments regarding possible errors and omissions or
·suggestior:fs ·for, improvement of tt:lis publication wot:Jid ·be
gri:J.tefully C\ppreciated.
Copies of thi.s publication can be ordered from your local Alta
Laval comP>any. ·
Published by: Alta Laval SE)paration AB
Marine & Power Oil Treatment Division
S- 147 80 Tumba
Swederil
© CoP>y~ight Alta Laval Separation AB 1996.
1
~~
Alta Laval
Separation System
Safety
J Printed
Book No.
I Nov 1998
1810158-02 V4
: · Alta Laval Marine & Power

A.lfa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
;Jrior notice.
A.ny comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be
gratefully appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local
Alta Laval company.
Published by: Alta Laval Marine & Power AB
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
©Copyright Alta Laval Marine & Power AB 1998.
Contents
1 Safety Instructions 1
1.1 Warning Signs 1
1.2 Specific Factors 3
1810158-02
1810158-02
1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Warning Signs

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three
grades of warning signs used when there is a
risk to personnel.
DANGER
Type of hazard
This type of safety instruction

indicates a situation which, if not
avoided, could result in fatal injury,
or fatal damage to health.
WARNING
Type of hazard

avoided, could result in disabling
injury, or disabling damage to health.
CAUTION
Type of hazard

avoided, could result in light injury,
or light damage to health.
1810158-02 1
1 Safety Instructions Safety
The warning sign used when there is a risk to

equipment.
NOTE

avoided, could result in damage to
equipment.
The warning sign is also used when there is a

need to stress important information.
NOTE
This sign is used to stress important

information, e.g. how to read this
system manual.
2 1810158-02
Safety 1 Safety Instructions
1.2 Specific Factors

The centrifugal separator includes parts that
rotate at high speed, generate ·high centrifugal
forces, and take a long time to stop rotating.
Materials are carefully chosen and parts are

designed with extremely fine manufacturing
tolerances. Rotating parts are carefully bal-
anced to reduce vibration and wear and tear
and to withstand stress and fatigue.
The separation system is designed and

supplied for a specific function (type of liquid,
rotational speed, temperature, density, etc.)
and must be used for this function only, and
strictly within Alfa Laval"s specifications.
Incorrect operation or maintenance is likely to

result in an imbalance due to build up of
sediment, reduction of material strength, etc.
that could lead to serious injury or damage.
These compulsory safety instructions apply:

• Use the separator only for the purpose and
parameter range specified by Alfa Laval.
• Strictly follow the instructions for
installation, operation and maintenance.
• Ensure that personnel are fully trained and
competent in operation, maintenance and
emergency procedures.
• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts
and the special tools supplied.
NOTE
If safety instructions and installation

instructions in this manual are not
strictly followed, Alfa Laval can not
be held responsible for any
malfunction or injuries resulting.
1810158-02 3
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
m'/h
kPa Ill
Using the separation system outside
limits specified by Alfa Laval could
cause breakdown.
If power cables have been altered,

always check the rotation direction. If
the separator rotates in reverse vital
rotating parts could unscrew.
Excessive vibration may cause

breakdown.
Do not enter the room after an

emergency stop while the separator is
still rotating.
Do not start the separator after an

emergency stop without first
remedying the cause of the
emergency.
After an emergency stop the

separator bowl must be manually
cleaned 1Jefor~ starting up again.
If theA 7-10 (FOPX) alarm is not

.remedied there is a risk for
breakdown.
If the A7-11 (LOPX) alarm is not
remedied there is a risk for
breakdown due to insufficient sludge
conditioning.
1810158-02
4
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
If the interval between sludge

discharges is too long, there is a risk
of heavy side breakdown.
Operation in stand-by mode for a

prolonged period of time may cause
heavy side breakdown. (FOPX)
Failure to follow the above

instructions may lead to heavy side
breakdown.
If the separator is not assembled and

connected properly it may lead to
disintegration.
Never discharge a vibrating separator.

Vibration will increase if only part of
solidified sludge is discharged.
Running a separator build for 50 Hz

at higher frequency will result in
overspeed and may cause
disintegration.
1810158-02 5
DANGER
Entrapment hazard
Do not begin maintenance work

while the machine is still rotating.
Do not switch on without all covers

and guards in place.
Fire Hazard
Excess of maximum idling time may

cause fire, if a destillate with low
flashpoint is used.
6 1810158-02
WARNING
Noise hazard
Excessive noise can cause damage to

hearing if no ear protection is used.
Disintegration·
hazard
Never reset an alarm without first

finding and remedying the cause.
Each new bunker requires

reconsideration of the discharge time
setting.
Operating water shortage may result

in sludge discharge failure and cause
sludge accumulation and heavy
imbalance.
Experience has shown that if

intervals between sludge discharges
are too long, a compact and hard
sludge cake can accumulate. On
discharge, this cake may break up
and be discharged unevenly causing
imbalance in the bowl. If imbalance
· is excessive, there is risk for serious
mechanical damage and injury to
personnel.
1810158-02 7
WARNING
Disintegration
hazard
Failure to clean the separator bowl,

including operating system, at
required intervals or after alarms and
stop of bowl may cause imbalance
with risk of injury to personnel.
Entrapment hazard
Do not switch on without all cover

8 1810158-02
CAUTION
Burn hazard
Process pipes, lubrication oil and

various machine surfaces can be hot
and cause bums.
Slip hazard
Oil leakage may make the floor

slippery and cause injuries.
6
NOTE
Be sure to study all relevant

documentation supplied and become
familiar with the function and
operation of the system and each
particular unit.
If safety instructions, installation

specifications and additional
insta11ation information in this manual
are not strictly followed, Alfa Laval
can not be held responsible for any
1810158-02 9
1810158-02
10
2
b~
Alta laval
LOPX Separation System
System Description
Printed Aug 1997

Book No. 181 0234-02 V3
· Alfa Laval Marine & Power

Alfa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alta Laval Separation AB
Marine & Power Division
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
· ©Copyright Alta Laval Separation AB 1997.
Contents
1 Scope 1
2 System Overview 3
2.1 System Layout 4

2.2 Oil Flow 6
3 The ALCAP LOPX Process 1

3.1 The ALCAP Principle 7
3.2 Low Water Content 8

3.3 High water content 10
3.4 Displacement Water
Adjustments 12
3.4.1 Decreasing the Amount of
Displacement Water 12
3.4.2 Increasing the Amount of
Displacement Water 12
3.5 Definition of Terms 14
1810234-02
1 Scope
This system description is valid for the

following separation systems:
LOPX 705
LOPX 707
LOPX 709
LOPX 710
LOPX 713
LOPX 714
The LOPX separation systems are designed

for cleaning of lubricating oil for diesel
engines in marine and power applications.
1810234-02
1
1 Scope LOPX System Description
2 1810234-02
2 System Overview
In the LOPX process, heated lubricating oil is

fed through the separator to clean the oil from
solid particles and water.
An LOPX system comprises:

• An LOPX separator.
• Ancillary equipment including a control
unit and a water transducer.
• Optional equipment such as an oil feed
pump and an oil heating system.
The LOPX separator operates as a clarifier.

Cleaned oil leaves the separator through the
oil outlet while free water and separated
sludge accumulate at the periphery of the
separator bowl.
The control unit supervises the entire

operation of the separation system and
perfom1s monitoring, control and alarm
functions.
At nom1al conditions, characterized by low or

no water content and normal sludge content,
sludge discharges are initiated by the control
unit at preset intervals. Sludge and water are
then discharged through sludge ports at the
periphery of the bowl.
Water is used in the separation process, and

specific amounts of processing water are
added at different times.
The control unit adapts the process to changed

conditions such as changes in the water
content of the lube oil.
1810234-02
3
2 System Overview LOPX System Description
2.1 System Layout

The basic LOPX system layout is illustrated
by the following symbol diagram.
c
D 14
[I I[
8 10
4 0 !
i
I D {} ~
A ~
----------------------------~
B i~
The LOPX system
The inlet and outlet arrows indicate the

following:
A Unprocessed oil inlet C Water inlet
B Cleaned and recirculated oil outlet D Sludge outlet
Item Symbol Designation Function

Displacement pump Feeds unprocessed oil to the separator.
1 Q
2
ru Heater
Temperature,transmitter
Heats unprocessed oil to separation temperature.
Measures the oil temperature.

3
®
4 1810234-02
LOPX System Description 2 System Overview
Pneumatically controlled Leads the unprocessed oil to the separator or back
~
change over valve to the tank (recirculation).
4
Separator Cleans the oil by removing water and solid

5
2S particles.
Water transducer Measures the changes of water content in the

6 @ separated oil.
Flow indicator Displays the oil flow rate.

7
0
High pressufe switch Senses high pressure in the oil outlet.
8
®
Low pressure switch Senses low pressure in the oil outlet.
9
®
Pressure gauge Displays the pressure in the oil outlet.
10
0
Manually controlled Regulates the clean oil back pressure.
11
~ regulating valve
Non-return valve Stops reverse oil flow.

12 ~
Solenoid valve block, water Distributes separator opening and closing water,
13
B conditioning water, and displacement water.
Control unit Supervises the separator system.

14
II II
1810234-02 5
2 System Overview LOPX System Description
2.2 Oil FI0\1\1
The unprocessed oil is fed through a strainer

by a positive displacement pump, operating at
constant flow.
After the heater the change over valve directs

the oil to the separator. The separated oil
passes the manually operated back-pressure
regulating valve back to the lubricating oil
tank.
The oil can also be directed back to the oil

tank, bypassing the separator. This is the case
when the oil temperature is outside the preset
range, during separator start and stop
procedures, and during alarm conditions.
1810234-02
6
3 The ALCAP LOPX Process
The terms used in this process description are

explained in section "3.5 Definition of
Terms" on page 14.
3.1 The ALCAP Principle

During the separation process sludge and
water accumulate at the periphery of the
separator bowl.
Normally, sludge and water are discharged at

preset time intervals.
Should the build up of separated water and

sludge increase, water may approach the disc
stack. In that case traces of water start to
escape with the cleaned oil. This small _
increase of water content is immediately
detected by the water transducer, installed in
the oil outlet.
The signal from the water transducer is

continuously transmitted to the control unit,
where a reference value is stored.
The control unit continually compares the

transducer signal with the reference value.
Should a deviation from the reference value
occur, a sludge discharge is initiated to keep
the system at optimum separation efficiency.
1810234-02
7
3 The ALCAP LOPX Process LOPX System Description
3.2 Low Water Content

Normally the lube oil contains little or no
water. In this case sludge discharges will be
timer initiated.
D E
Transducer signal, normal conditions
s Transducer signal E Displacement of oil

t Time F Addition of conditioning water
A Trigger range G Addition of displacement water
B Trigger value
C Reference time 1 Storing of reference value
D Preset time between discharge sequences 2 Sludge discharge
The water transducer signal reflects the
normal condition where the oil contains no
water. The preset time between sludge
discharges is set in the control unit as a timer
function.
8 1810234-02
LOPX System Description 3 The ALCAP LOPX Process
Process Cycle
1. Conditioning water is added to the
separator bowL The conditioning water
softens the sludge in order to accomplish a
good discharge.
2. A new reference value is stored by the
control unit.
3. When the preset time between sludge
discharges has elapsed, displacement
water is added to the separator bowl. The
displacement water eliminates the risk of
oil loss at the following sludge discharge.
Initially, water is continuously admitted.
4. After that, a number of short pulses add a
minor amount of water. The interface
between oil and water moves toward but
never into the disc stack. This means that
there is no risk of water contaminated oil
leaving the separator.
5. The sludge discharge is initiated after a
predetermined number of water pulses.
The actual number of pulses is calculated
by the control unit, and is adapted to
changing conditions.
6. After the sludge discharge a new process

cycle starts with the adding of
conditioning water. A new reference value
is then stored.
1810234-02
9
3.3 High water content

When the water content is high, the transducer
signal will reach the trigger value after the
minimum time between discharge sequences
but before the maximum time.
I
i
I
I
D
1--------------------
I~
~
L---------------------~--------------------------------------------~
II
Process cycle, high water content
s Transducer signal D Preset time between discharge sequences

t Time F Addition of conditioning water
A Trigger range
B Trigger value 1 Storing of reference value
C Reference time 2 Sludge discharge
Process Cycle
1. After the sludge discharge a new cycle
starts with the adding of conditioning
water.
2. A new reference value is stored.
10 1810234-02
3. Separated water will fill out the sludge

space of the bowl before the preset time
between discharge sequences has elapsed.
4. Water escaping with the cleaned oil is
immediately detected by the water
transducer, and a sludge discharge is
initiated. No displacement water is added
in this case.
Alarm
Should five consecutive sludge discharges be

initiated by the transducer signal, the alarm for
high water content is activated.
This alarm indicates that a water leakage has

occurred somewhere in the lube oil system.
Resuming the Normal Process
When the water content in the lube oil is

reduced, the preset time will elapse without a
transducer initiated discharge.
The control unit then starts to add an

appropriate amount of displacement water.
The amount is adapted to the decreasing water
content in the unprocessed oil.
After a few process cycles the system resumes

its normal operating mode.
1810234-02 11
3.4 Displaceme'nt Water

Adjustments
The ALCAP LOPX proces~ is automatically
adjusting the amount of displacement water to
suit changing conditions, such as changed
water content in the oil or scaling in the water
line.
3.4.1 Decreasing the Amount of

Displacement vVater
If the water content of the unprocessed oil is
low, displacement water is added prior to the
sludge discharge.
Should a sludge discharge be initiated by the

transducer signal during addition of
displacement water, too much water has been
added. Less displacement water will then be
used at the next sludge discharge cycle.
·3.4.2 Increasing the Amount of

Displacement Water
Every fourth sludge discharge the amount of
displacement water is checked to ensure that
an accurate amount of water is added.
A minor amount of extra \'l'ater is then added

with the displacement water.
An increased transducer signal confirms that

the amount of displacement water was
sufficient.
Should the transducer not respond to the

additional water, the amount of displacement
\Vater is increased at the next sludge discharge
cycle.
12 181 0234--02
Alarm
If the amount of displacement water is

increased two times with no transducer
response, the A 7-11 alarm is activated.
This alarm indicates that the displacement

water supply is insufficient and must be
checked.
DANGER
Disintegration hazard
If the A 7- 11 alarm is not remedied

there is a risk for breakdown due to
insufficient sludge conditioning.
1810234-02
13
3.5 Definition of Terms

Transducer signal The analog signal from the water transducer.
The transducer signal is monitored by the
control unit to detect minor changes of water
content in the outlet oil from the separator.
Reference value The lowest achievable transducer value for the
oil that is being processed.
The reference value is determined during the
reference time interval. The value is stored in
the control unit. (
\
The reference values differ for different lube

oils.
Reference time interval The time period after each sludge discharge,
(Parameter value) after which the actual transducer signal is
stored as a reference value.
Trigger range The allowed deviation of the water transducer
(Parameter value) signal, compared with the reference value.
The trigger range lower limit is the reference
value, and the range is normally set to 0.2% of
the reference value.
Trigger value Trigger range upper limit. When the transducer
signal reaches the trigger value, water must be
discharged from the separator.
Preset time between sludge discharge When this time has elapsed, a sludge discharge
sequences is initiated.
(Parameter value)
Conditioning water Water, added to the separator bow1 to soften the
sludge.
Displacement water Water, added to the separator bow 1 to displace
the oil and ensure there is no loss of oil at
sludge discharge.
14 1810234-02
3
r.~
Alfalaval
Operating Instructions
Printed Oct 2000

Book No. 1810020-02 V5
Alta Laval resE:::rves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Alta Laval company.
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Marine & Power AB 2000.
Study instruction manuals and observe the
warnings before installation, operation,
service and maintenance.
Not following the instructions can result in

serious accidents with fatal injuries.
In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions have

been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for situations
arising from unintended usage of the machine and its tools.
A summary ofthe safety information is found in the Safety chapter

under divider 1.
Contents
1 Scope 1
2 Operating 3
2.1 Start up Check List 3

2.2 Start up 5
2.3 Intervals Between

Sludge Discharges 7
2.3.1 Background 7
2.3.2 Lubricating oil cleaning 8
2.3.3 Bowl inspection 10
Bowl Cleaning 11
2.5 Operating Check List 13
2.6 Check of Gravity Disc Size

During Operation 17
2.7 Stop 18
2.8 Emergency Stop 20
2.9 After Emergency Stop 20
1810020-02
1810020-02
1 Scope
These operating instructions are valid for the

LOPX 705
LOPX 707
LOPX 709
LOPX 710
LOPX 713
LOPX 714
The LOPX separation system is designed for

cleaning oflubrication oil for marine and
power diesel engines.
1810020-02
1
1 Scope LOPX Operating Instructions
1810020-02
2
2 Operating
2.1 Start up Check List

Separator
1. Check that the separator is assembled and
connected correctly.
1 ®>·•;_::--·-·-··-----------~.::::::=::.==
DANGER ··::::::::·-... . .. ----
........... F=~~=-===~"'1
Disintegration
hazard
If the separator is not assembled and

connected properly it may lead to
disintegration.
2<1!l) ···-····----- .
2. Check the oil sump level: it should be no

more than half way up the sight glass.
NOTE
Too much or too little oil can damage

the separator bearings.
3. Release the brake.

c-
Starter
4. Power on.
'lt II
,..,
EJ
<(
'R
"' ~
a.
1810020-02 3
2 Operating LOPX Operating Instructions
Control Unit
5. Check that the mode selector switch points
to L (local).
L~
p
6. Power on.
The display reads '"OFF".
7. Close the door.
8. Check the direction of rotation of the bowl

by doing a quick start/stop. The revolution
counter must rotate clockwise.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
If power cables have been altered

always check the rotation direction.
If the separator rotates in reverse vital
Air Valve Block

9. Check that there is correct air supply by
reading the pressure gauge situated on the
valve block; see "System Reference".
Plant set value:
mm. max:
4 1810020-02
LOPX Operating Instructions 2 Operating
2.2 Start up
1. Start the oil feed pump from the pump
starter.
~
2. Switch the heater on from the control unit.
If the heater is not connected to the control
unit it must be switched on independently.
~--------------------------------~
3. Start the separator from the starter unit.

l'7fl
L1l
4. Listen and observe.

Vibration may occur during start up, when
passing critical rpm (revolutions per.
minute).
This is normal and should pass without
danger.
If vibration increases, or continues at full
speed, press the emergency stop button.
The cause of vibration must be determined
and corrected before starting again!
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
Excessive vibration may cause

breakdown.
1810020-02 5
5. Ensure that the separator is at full speed.

At full speed the starter ammeter reading
has decreased from a high starting value to
a low steady value; the idling value
[Z]
(slightly lower than the normal operating
value).
'
[&]
6. Check the oil feed temperature on the
~I ~ ~
control unit display by pressing the alarm 0
reset button.
If the temperature sensor is not linked to
the control unit read the temperature
indicator situated after the heater.
7. Wait until the oil feed temperature is
correct: l'lrll jqjol
• for cross head engines 80 - 90 oc
. for trunk piston engines 85 - 95 ac
8. Start the feed to the system from the
-'j/- 1r
~
control unit. /I'.
~
When the temperature is correct the 0
operation LED Ht (green).
1810020-02
6

Sludge Discharges
2.3.1 Background
WARNING
Disintegration
hazard
Experience has shown that if

intervals between sludge discharges
are too long, a compact and hard
sludge cake can accumulate. On
discharge, this cake may break up
and be discharged unevenly causing
imbalance in the bowl. If imbalance
is excessive, there is risk for serious
mechanical damage and injury to
personnel.
Recommendations are ....given regarding

.... .... initial
intervals between sludge discharges for
different applications. The setting may
subsequently have to be changed after actual
inspection ofthe bowl.
1810020-02
7
2.3.2 Lubricating oil cleaning

• Continuous operation:
In a ne\v lubricating oil system the oil is
initially clean but as it gets dirtier the
interval between discharges will have to
be shortened until a '·steady state'~ is
reached. Following information refers to
systems in "steady state'·.
Recommended intervals for Crosshead
engines
Type of oil Type of separator
Initial discharge Time to first bowl in-
spection
Main lubricating oi! system 0.5 hours 1 week LOPX

Stuffing box oil 5min. After each batch LOPX
When separating stuffing box oil, the

specialised '·MMPX Box Oil Cleaning
Plant'~ is primarily recommended. Please
note that the recommended initial
discharge interval is 5 minutes and that it
must never exceed three times this value.
Recommended intervals for Trunk
engines
Type of oil
Initial discharge Time to first bowl in-
spection
Main lubricating oil system 0.5 hours 2 days
• Ifseparator has been out of operation:

If the separator has been out of service for
24 hours or longer, while the engine has
been running, the interval between
discharges has to be shortened.
In this case the recommendation is:
• Discharge interval 5 minutes until the
\Vhole oi1 volume has passed twice
through the separator.
• A ftcr that resume normal discharge
interval.
8 1810020-02
• Intermittent operation:
For installations where one separator
serves one engine which is temporarily
stopped the following recommendations
apply:
If the engine is to be stopped for 24 hours
or less:
• Operate the separator continuously.
If the engine is to be stopped for more than
24 hours:
• Keep the separator in operation for 8
hours after the engine is stopped.
• Start the separator 8 hours before the
engine is started again.
Doing so most of the suspended particles
and condensed water will be removed
from the system and not settle in the sump
tank.
For installations where one separator
serves more than one engine the following
recommendations apply:
• Continuous use of the separator
whenever possible.
• Frequent switches between the engine
systems to be cleaned. In a typical case
with one separator serving 2--4
auxiliary engines switching after
maximum 24 hours of cleaning.
• Discharge interval:
Engine has been in operation with- Engine has not been in operation
out cleaning of the system oil since last cleaning of system oil
Discharge interval 5 min. Normal discharge interval
Duration until the whole oil volume
has passed twice through the
separator
After that resume to normal
discharge interval
1810020-02 9
2.3.3 Bowl inspection

To check if the initia11y selected interval is
appropriate, the bowl should be inspected
after a short test period shown in the previous
tables.
If sludge space is clean:
Interval may be prolonged with steps of 15

minutes, but it must not exceed three times the
recommended initial interval.
"Sludge space is clean" means that no

noticeabie amount of hard sludge remains in
the sludge space.
If sludge space is dirty:
Interval has to be shortened. Sludge space in bowl. Parts to be inspected:
When the bowl is opened tor routine cleaning, A. Top disc

B. Bowl hood
the sludge space should always be inspected C. Sludge space
and evaluated. If necessary, the interval D. Disc stack
between discharges should then be changed _ E. Sliding bowl bottom
accordingly.
N.B. Alfa Laval assumes no responsibility
for the actual choice of discharge
intervals, as these entirely depend on
local conditions.
10 181 0020-02

Bowl Cleaning
Suitable intervals between cleaning vary
according to the process parameters and
installation. The intervals can only be
determined by bowl inspections at actual
operating conditions. Indicated below are
some of the conditions, where experience has
shown that the interval between cleaning has
to be closely monitored and possibly
shortened.
• Installation not in accordance with Alfa
Laval speciiications and
recommendations.
• Poor operating water quality.
• Operation without sludge conditioning
water.
• Diesel engine condition bad.
Note:
1. A low pressure/low flow or no discharge
alarm with no apparent external cause
(incorrect flow, temperature etc.) is a sign
that the bowl needs immediate cleaning.
Never neglect to investigate and remedy
the cause of such alarms.
2. Cleaning of the operating system is
normally required whenever product-
wetted parts of the bowl are manually
. cleaned.
3. Intervals between manual cleaning can be
prolonged by the use of the "Alfa Laval
CIP System" (Cleaning-In-Place).
1810020-02
11
4. In cases where an uneven sludge cake

remains in the bowl after a discharge, this
induces a particularly heavy imbalance
when not covered by liquid. This may
occur in total discharge type separators
and when starting separators without
previous cleaning.
Therefore, always after each stop, inspect
the bowl for cleanliness from sludge, and
if required clean it before restart. This
should be done when the separator has
been in operation for 24 hours or more
after the last inspection or cleaning.
WARNING
Disintegration
hazard
Failure to clean the separator bowl,

including operating system, at
required intervals or after alarms and
stop ofbowl may cause imbalance
with risk of injury to personnel.
12 1810020-02
2.5 Operating Check List

Compulsory 200 hour Ser~ice
A compulsory service must be carried out

when the system has completed 200 hours of
operation after installation or after a gear has
been replaced.
1. Check that all units are in good condition
and function correctly.
2. Change the oil in the separator oil sump.
Clean the oil sump before filling with new
oil.
Consult the "Separator Manual".
The level should be no more than half way up

the sight glass.
NOTE
Neglecting an oil change will result in

damage to separator bearings.
3. Tighten all connections.
Duiing operation:
Check visually that there is oil in the sump.
NOTE

Check that the starter ammeter reading is the

normal low and steady value.
1810020-02 13
Observe the control unit front panel

information:
• heater operation LED lit (green):
only if the heater is connected to the
-·--·-
'I/
.. I ,
' /
rsJ
1[
o-e-o
,i/ / I '
control unit.
• separator system operation LED lit
/ I
'
:
'-
V1
o-
0 ~
'--.:K:
(green). ~~-
I IMV16
• activated valve LED lit (green).

61M6 Q
-::kl -Yr-
C)
During nonnal operation the trigger value is

..
ltlsll l2l 11
\
shown on the left, and the time to next sludge !::
0
~
discharge is shown on the right of the display.
~
More information may be read, as required, by
pressing the alarm reset button repeatedly (the
values are always shown to the right):
1. the oil feed temperature:
0
~ ~
• for cross head engines 80 - 90 oc
• for trunk piston engines 85 - 95 oc
If the temperature sensor is not linked to~
l'lrll lqlal ~

2. the oil feed temperature (if a second
121r11 II
~
sensor for heater control is connected). I ~

~
3. the accumulated operating time 1 in hours.

l3lhll I I I
<
i§
~
4. the water transducer value.

l 11
<
II I I I ~
~
5. the number of pulses for displacement

water. lsi II I I I s"'
~
l'lsll 121~1
Continue pressing until the display retums to
~
normal; i.e. the trigger value, and time to next ~
sludge discharge.
1. How to interpret the displayed figures as

hours:
000- 999 =actual value in hours
1.00-9.99 = 1000-9990 hours
10.0- 99.9 = I 0000- 99900 hours
100.-999. = 100000-999000 hours
14 181 0020-02
Parameter List
List No.: 3183Q-6181-5
Prinled Sep 1997

· Book No. 1810138-02 V5
Alta Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Alta Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Marine & Power AB
SE- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alta Laval Marine & Power AB 2000.


A summary of the safety information is found in the Safety chapter

under divider 1.
4
Contents
1 Scope 1
2 Process Parameters 3
3 Installation Parameters 5
4 Timer Sequence
Parameters 7
5 Service Mode Par?meter

90,94 and 95 9
5.1 Countdown of Timers

PSO- P89 9
5.2 Alarm Log 10

5.2.1 Examples of Logged Alarms 11
5.3 Timer function 13
6 Additional Parameter
Information 15
6.1 Process Parameters 15
6.2 Installation Parameters 18
6.3 Timer Sequence Parameters 19

6.3.1 Starting Sequence 19
6.3.2 Separation Sequence 20
6.3.3 Sludge Discharge Sequence 20
6.3.4 Stopping Sequence 20
7 Sequence Diagram 21
1810138-02
1810138-02
1 Scope
The parameter list is valid for the following

separation systems:
LOPX 705
LOPX 707
LOPX 709
LOPX 710
LOPX 713
LOPX 714
Including the EPC-400 control unit with

PROM (memory chips):
PROM (front circuit board): 31830-6210-1

PROM (rear circuit board): 31830-6132-1
1810138-02
1
1 Scope LOPX Parameter List
2 1810138-02
2 Process Parameters
The EPC-400 control unit is used within a

separation system for control of the separation
process. The control unit can be programmed
for different separator systems and for
different conditions within the system. The
programming is made by setting parameters.
The process parameters can be adjusted easily

and as often as required to meet changes in the
operating conditions, e.g. time between sludge
discharges, oil temperature and alarm points.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard

discharges is too long, there is risk of
heavy side breakdown.
Factory Plant
Parameter Description or unit Range
set value set value
P1 1 Max. time between Minutes 0-999 30 .....

sludge discharges P1 = P60 + P61
Changing of P1 automatically
changes P61.
P2 1 Clarifier mode c c
P3 Not in use ---
P4
ps1 High temperature oc or oF 0- 115 oc or 0 ......
alarm 0-255 °F
P6 1 Low temperature oc or °F. o- 115 oc or --- ......
alarm 0-255 °F
P7 1 T em perature set point oc or oF o- 110 oc or --- .....
0-240 °F
1810138-02 3
2 Process Parameters LOPX Parameter List
Factory Plant
set value set value
pal P-band % 10-500 --- ....~
pgl 1-time Minutes 0.1-10.0 --- .....

1 ......
P10 Stand-by/On mode 0 = Stand-by 0 or 1 1
1 = On
P1 0 = 0 must only be used during
test operation or if high water
content in oil.
P11 Not applicable 0-999 0
P12 Conditioning water Number of pulses 0-999 5 .....
P13 Displacement water Number of pulses 0-999 10 .....
P14 Min. number of Min. number of pulses of 0-999 2 .....
separate pulses additional displacement water.
P15to Not in use ---
P18
P19 Factory test constant 1
1. For more information, see "Additional Parameter Information" on page 15.
4 1 81 0138-02
3 Installation Parameters
NOTE
EPC-400 parameter P21 is factory set

1 to 50 Hz. If connected to a 60 Hz
_supply an alann will occur. Set P21 to
60 Hz and press the reset button. The
alann will disappear.
The installation parameters must be set before

the ;initial start -up and before process
parameters are set. The parameters rarely need
to be adjusted again.
Factory Plant
set value set value
P20 1 Separator type 5.1 = LOPX 705,707,709,710, 4.1-5.2 5.1 5.1 or 5.3
713
5.3 = LOPX 714
P21 Power frequency Hz 50 or 60 50 .....
Check that the frequency is
correct, see label on the
separator.
P22 Not in use ---
P23 1 EPC-400 address 1 = EPC-400 1- 8 1 1
2-8 = Not in use
P24 For remote communication with 48 ......
P25 COMLI protocol 2 .....
P26.to Not in use ---
P32
P33 Emergency stop o= Emergency stop only 0 or 1 0 .....
function 1 = Mechanical vibration switch
P34 1 Alarm delay time Seconds 1 -30 15 ......
P35'1 Low temperature Seconds 1-999 15 ......
alarm delay, after MV1
change over
1810138-02 5
:3 Installation Parameters LOPX Parameter List
Factory Plant
set value set value
~ P36 1 Remote control 0 = No remote control 0-3,10-13 0 .....

1 = Remote switches
! 2 = Remote computer
3 = Not used
' 10 = No remote control, alarm
A4-1 cancelled
11 = Remote switch, alarm A4-1
!
cancelled
; 12 = Remote computer, alarm
'
A4-1 cancelled
13 = Not used
P37 1 Heater type 0 No or common heater with 0-2
= 0 & • ~ ••
1 separate controller
l
j 1 = Heatpac EHS-62 controlled

by EPC-400
2 = Heater with control valve,
;
controlled by EPC-400
'
;
P38 Size of Heatpac kW 0, 7, 8, 14, 16, 22, --- .....
; heater If P37 = 1 then P38 is set to 16, 24,36,40,50,56,
otherwise P38 = "- - -". 65, 72
'
·' P39 Run time of control Seconds 0-999 --- .....
valve If P37 = 2 then P39 is set to 120,
otherwise P39 = "- - -".
P40 1 Temperature reading c = oc Cor F c .....
F = °F
P41 1 Max. start time for Minutes 0-999 15 .....
heater
P42 Not in use ---
;
i P43 1 Extra alarm function 0 Alarm indication on display. 0-1
= 0 .....
No action.
1 = Alarm indication on display.
Oil feed off during separa-
tion sequence.
; P44 Displacement water Number of times the displacement 0-999 2 .....
pulses water is increased by two pulses
~' before alarm (A 7-11 ).
i P45 to Not in use ---
' P49
1. For :more information, see "Additional Parameter Information" on page 15.
6 181 013B-02
4 Timer Sequence Parameters
The timer sequence parameters control the

operation of the separation system, i.e. start,
separation, sludge discharge and stop
functions.
Factory Plant
set value set value
Starting sequence
P50 1 Bowl closing water Seconds 0-999 15 .....

P51 Not in use ---
1
P52 Conditioning water Seconds 0-999 30 See table
Automatically set to below
P52= P12 x P70
P53 1 Reference time, oil Seconds 0-999 120 ......
feed on
P59
Separation sequence
' P60 1 Time to first discharge Minutes 0-999 10 .....

after start-up (for P60 + P61 = P1
calibration)
P61 1 Time between sludge Minutes 0-999 20 .....
discl1arges P60 + P61 = P1
Changing of P1 automatically
' changes P61.
P62 Pre-discharge interval Seconds 0-999 60 .....
P69
1810138-02 7
4 Timer Sequence Parameters LOPX Parameter List
Parameter Factory Plant

Description or unit Range
set value set value
Sludge discharge sequence
IP70 1
Displacement water Seconds 0-999 6 See table
below
II P71 Pause Seconds 0-99.9 30 ....
I
~
1
P72
Sludge discharge Seconds 0-99.9 3.0 ......
P75
P76 1 Conditioning water Seconds 0-999 30 See table
Automatically set to below
P76 = P12 X P70
P77 Not in use ---
1
P78 Reference time Seconds 0-999 60 ......
· P79 Not in use ---
Stopping sequence
P83
P84 1 Displacement water. Seconds 0-999 70 .....
Oil feed off
P85 Not in use ---
1
P86 Separator motor off Seconds 0-999 180 .....
P89
1. For more information, see "Additional Parameter Information" on page 15.
LOPX 705 LOPX 707/709/ LOPX 713/714

710
P12 5 5 5
P70 6 10 15
P52 and P76 30 50 75

=P12xP70
8 1810138-02
5 Service Mode Parameter 90, 94-and 95
\Vith aid of the service mode parameters

infom1ation can be requested and displayed,
for instance the countdown of timer sequences
can be displayed while they are running.
Factory Plant
Parameter Description or unit Range set set
value value
P90 Service mode 0 = No service mode o. 1,50 0 .....

1 = Countdown of timers
P50- P89
50 = Alarm log, including self
resetting alarms
P91 For remote 0
P92 communication with 19,2
P93 Profibus protocol 60
P94 Count down timer 0.0- 10.0 0.0
P95 Indication of P94 timer 0.0- 10.0 --- .....
Hours
actual value
P99
5.1 Countdown of Timers

PSO- P89
By setting P90 to 1, the mode selector in
position Land then by pushing the alarm reset
button, a countdown of each activated timer
(P50- P89) can be displayed during
operation.
Timer P61 shows that it is 32 seconds left to next

sludge discharge.
1810138-02 9
5 Service Mode Parameter 90, 94 and 95 LOPX Parameter List
:5a2 Alarm Log

Set P90 to 50, the mode selector back to L and
:push the alann reset button; the 32 latest
alarms are displayed. including self resetting
alam1s. Each logged alarm consists of three
consecutive groups of infom1ation:
I. The accumulated alarm log time, which
shows how long the EPC has been in
operation since the alarm in question.
Max. time between two alarms is 999.5
hours z 41 days. If this time is exceeded
the whole alam1 log will be reset to 0.
2. The alarm is indicated in the same way as
when it occmTed (except for the "abrms"
starting with an E):
• Alarm code starting with an A
• LED and an alarm code, for instance
''High or low oil temperature"
• LED indications only
• •·Alarm" code starting with an E (events
with no alarm released). El is a self
resetting function
E 1 = no signal for discharge
E4 = ALCAP functions in stand-by
mode
E5 = ALCAP functions back to
operation mode again.
3. The value of parameter Pl (maximum
time between sludge discharges).
10 1810138-02
LOPX Parameter List 5 Service Mode Parameter 90,94 and 95
5.2.1 Examples of Logged Alarms

• The capital ·"H" indicates that this is the
..
latest alarm which has been logged. The
EPC has been in operation 48 hours and
IHI IIL~ial21 ;::
~
20- 29 minutes since the alarm in
question. Every tenth minute is displayed,
but several alarms can be logged \Vithin
this period.
..s
The latest alarm was a ""Power failure"
IAit.t 11-1 I /I ~
P 1 (maximum time between sludge

discharges) was set to 30 minutes. IPI I lila! ..~
~
Between these two almms 10 hours and 0- 10

minutes have elapsed (58.2 - 48.2).
• 58 hours and 20-29 minutes ago the

event below occurred.
The event was a '"No signal for discharge".
ihl llslal21 1
No alarm was given, as the next discharge
attempt was succesful.
lEI til I I I
P 1 setting was 30 minutes.
!PI I lila! 1
• 106 operating hours and 30- 39 minutes
ago another alarm occurred. ihi iJialb.J3I .. ~
s;
The alarm was a "Water transducer fault". ..

(Which is indicated by the LED and not on
the display)
8 •:
g"
c
..
I I II I II '"'
g;
§
Pl setting was 30 minutes.

IPI II lila! .. g,
~
1810138-02 11
• If the accumulated time becomes more

than 999.5 hours it will the first time be
indicated by capital "H" and 1000 is
lhlq[jqjs.[al ..;
~
..
subtracted from the displayed value.
The second time it happens, another 1000
@ ~
"'
:is subtracted from the displayed value etc.
..
lrl I IBI21 ~
..
IPI II l3lal "c
§
Between these two alarms 10 hours have

elapsed (H 5.0 = 1005.0 hours)
..~
IHI II ls.lal ~
@ <!
~
~
..
lrl ll'l'lsl ~
..
IPI II l3lal "'
§
G This indicates the end of the log.
1810138-02
12
LOPX Parameter List 5 Service Mode Parameter 90, 94 and 95
5.3 Timer function

By setting P94 to >0.0 a count down timer is
activated. It is intended as a reminder of
service to be made after the elapsed running
hours. If e.g. P94 is set to 2.70 it means 2700
hours. Each 0.1 indicates 100 hours. When
2700 hours of operation have elapsed, an
alarm will be released and 3h- -- is indicated
in the front window. The alarm is repeated at
each start of the EPC. To avoid this the P94
timer has to be started or set to 0.
When P94 is >0 the actual count down value

is displayed when P95 is activated. P95 is just
an indication of the elapsed time in P94. It can
not be set.
To restart the timer, go to P94. Push third

button once (display flashes). Push button one
once. The timer is now restarted with the same
value. When the display is flashing, a new
value can be entered.
1810138-02
13
- - - ----- --------------------------------
1810138-02
14
6 Additional Parameter Information -
6.1 Process Parameters The only way to get a clean sludge

space is to make appropriate
Pl l\lax time between sludge discharge adjustment of the interval based on
Long intervals between sludge regular inspection.
discharge can cause sludge
accumulation and solidity in the bowl.
N.B. Alfa Laval assumes no responsibility
The sludge may then break up at
for the actual choice of discharge
sludge discharge and create heavy
interval times, as these depend entirely
imbalance in the bowl.
upon local feed characteristics.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard

discharges is too long, there is risk_of
heavy side breakdown.
As many factors influence the sludge

discharge interval, the choice of
interval must be based on experience.
When the bowl is opened for routine

cleaning, the sludge space should be
inspected and, if necessary, the interval
between discharges changed
accordingly.
Clean sludge space: the interval may
be prolonged. '"Clean sludge space"
means that no noticeable amount of
solidified sludge remains in the sludge
space.
Dirty sludge space: the interval must
be shortened ... Dirty sludge space"
means that some solidified sludge has
accumulated in the sludge space.
1810138-02
15
6 Additional Parameter Information LOPX Parameter List
Main lubricating oil system
Initial discharge Time to first bowl inspection

;
Recommended interval 1 hour 1 week
for cross head engines
Recommended interval 0.5 hour 2 days

for trunk piston engines
:P2 Clarifier mode

The LOPX separator is a clarifier
which can handle water.
PS High temperature alarm
Should be set sufficiently above the
temperature set point P7.
(Recommendation 5 - I 0 °C, or
10 - 20 °F, higher than P7).
If P5 = 0 (no monitoring temperature
sensor, Pt I 00, is connected)
then P6 = P7 = "'-- -".
P6 Low temperature alarm
Should be set sufficiently below the
temperature set point P7.
(Recommendation 5 - 10 °C, or
!] 0 - 20 °F, lower than P7).
P7 Temperature set point

To be set according to plant
application. See also P5 and P6.
P8 P-band (Proportional band)
1f P37 = 0 then P8 = "-- -".
]f P37 = 1 or 2 then P8 is set to 40%.
:P9 I-time (Integral time)

lf P3 7 = 0 then P9 = "- - "".
H P37=1 or 2 then P9 is set to 1.2
minutes.
16 1810138-02
LOPX Parameter List 6 Additional Parameter Information
How to set P8 and P9:

If the temperature varies with regularly
repeated oscillation, setting of the
proportional band and integral time
would be necessary.
• Increasing the value of parameter
P8 (proportional band width) will
result in a slower and more stable
control action.
• Increasing the value of parameter
P9 (integral time) also results in
slower response from the EPC-400.
We recommend you to follow these

guidelines:
l . Set P9 = 10 minutes.
2. Decrease P-band (P8) in steps until
the process reaches the point where
it starts to oscillate with a constant
amplitude. Test the stability after
each step by introducing a step-
change of load or set point.
3. When you have discovered the
point where the process oscillates Constant amplitude
with a constant amplitude note the
following figures: L\1\
A = The value of P-band (P8). ! \ II
I "-../:
B = The time for one full period in I !
I !
seconds. : I
I i
4. Calculation of optimal parameter 8
settings.
P-band 1-time
P8 = 2.2 X A P9 = 0.8 x B
The settings above give a rather good
result but may be adjusted according to
individual characteristics in different
loops.
1810138-02
17
PlO Stand-by I On mode N.B. Only use the stand-by mode when
In the case of transducer failure or necessary.
temporarily abnormal operation with Not adding displacement water will
excessive water content, or during fault lead to loss of oil.
finding, the ALCAP functions can be Check the addition of conditioning
set in stand-by mode (PI 0 = 0) and the water regularly while in stand-by
separator can be operated as a mode ..
conventional clarifier.
In stand-by mode the following apply: DANGER
• No transducer value nor deviation
from reference value will be Disintegration.
displayed. hazard
• No alarm function for "Water
Failure to follow the above
transducer fault"
instructions may lead to heavy side
• No "ALCAP alarms, A 7" will be breakdown.
displayed.
• No sludge discharges will be To remind the operator of stand-by
initiated by the transducer during mode, the display will indicate "'n.c."
P61. There will only be a sludge (not connected) to the left of the
discharge when P61 has elapsed. display and the time to next sludge
• No addition of displacement water discharge to the right of the display.
to the separator bowl. The time between sludge discharges
Conditioning water only is added. will automatically be set to 15 minutes
and a reminding alarm will occur every
• No draining function during P60 24 hours (A 7-3).
6.2 Installation Parameters

P20 Separator type
When P20=5.1 the specific functions
for the LOPX are automatically set.
P23 EPC-400 address
In a LOPX separation system the
EPC-400 is always regarded as master
unit, e.g. P23 = 1. LOPX can only
operate as a single unit and not in a
serial separation system.
18 1810138-02
LOPX Parameter List 6 Additional Parameter Information
P34 Alarm delay time If a steam heating system is connected

Activation of most alarm functions can to the EPC-400 and if the system is
be delayed up to 30 seconds, except equipped with an optional shut-off
for: valve, and provided P37= 0 or 2, the
• emergency I vibration alam1 valve is opened when the heater is
started. The valve is shut:
• high temperature alarm
• when the heater is stopped
• transducer alarm
which have a fixed delay time of 2 • at high temperature alarm
seconds. • at power failure
P35 Low temperature alarm delay after • at EPC stand-by mode.
MVI change over P40 Temperature reading
When the change over oB feed valve Degrees Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit
changes position the flow rate and thus
(°F) temperature readings available.
the oil temperature may be influenced.
P5, P6 and P7 have to be set according
By delaying the temperature alarm, a to oc or 0 F.
false alarm is avoided as the oil
temperature has time to stabilize. P41 Max. start time for heater
P35 should be set according to plant Sets the maximum allowed start time
application. If a delay time above 120 for the heater. Minimum temperature
seconds .is necessary, check the heating limit (P6) must be reached within this
system and the installation layout. time.
P36 Remote control P43 Extra alarm function
Remote control can be applied in form Extra alarm functions can be
of: connected. By setting P43 to 1 the oil
feed to the separator will be stopped
• external switches
when the extra alam1 occurs.
• external computers
P37 Heater type
The EPC-400 control unit is designed 6.3 Timer Sequence
for control of: Parameters
• Heatpac EHS-62 (P37 =1)
• Heater with heating media control 6.3.1 Starting Sequence
valve (P37=2)
PSO Bowl closing water
N .B. If a different type of heater is installed For proper closing of the separator
(P3 7 = 0), on! y a start/stop signal is bowl during start-up sequence. If more
available from the EPC-400 control than 60 seconds is required. it may
unit. indicate a malfunction.
1810138-02 19
----- ---~--~------
P52 Conditioning water Filling of displacement water to the

Addition of water to separator bowl bowl eliminates the risk of oil loss at
during sta11ing sequence. The water is the following sludge discharge.
to soften the sludge, to prevent sludge When a transducer signal from the
remaining after discharge. transducer MT4 is obtained the filling
P53 Reference time, oil feed on of displacement water is stopped and
Time to stabilize the transducer P72 starts.
reference value during the staning P72 Sludge discharge
sequence. The transducer reference Sludge discharge initiated by MV 15
value is stored when this time has admitting water to the separator bowl.
elapsed. If more than 4 seconds are required,
this may indicate a malfunction.
6.3.2 Separation Sequence P76 Conditioning water
Addition of water to the bowl after a
P60 Time to first discharge after start-up
sludge discharge. The water is to soften
Only the first time, after start-up, there
the sludge, to prevent sludge remaining
is a discharge after P60 (minimum time
after discharge.
between sludge discharges). The drain
valve (V5) can only be activated P78 Reference time
during P60. Bowl closing water is Reference time after a sludge
intermittently supplied. discharge. The transducer reference
value is stored when this time has
P61 Time between sludge discharges
elapsed.
P60 + P61 is the maximum time
between two consecutive sludge
discharges. See Pl.
Bowl closing water is intermittently 6.3.4 Stopping Sequence
supplied. P84 Displacement water. Oil feed off
The time within P61 may be Before the separator is stopped
interrupted by a sludge discharge, displacement water is added to the
initiated by the transducer signal. bowl to displace the oil and ensure
there is a minimum loss of oil.
P86 Separator motor off
6.3.3 Sludge Discharge Sequence The separator motor is automatically
P70 Pulse length of displacement water switched off. Restarting is blocked for
Pulse length during filling of 3 minutes.
displacement water.
20 1810138-02
7 Sequence Diagram
The duration of the monitoring functions and output signals is illustrated in the diagram.
Valve Terminal Activated function Stand- Starting Separation Sludge discharge Stopping
Relay by sequence sequence sequence sequence
Sensor OFF PSO P52 P53 P60 P61 P62 P70 P71 P72 P76 P78 PB4 PB6 OFF
15 s 130-75s 120 s Omin Omin 60s s 30 s 3.0 s J30-75 s 60s 70s 180 s
Mon. functions
- X7:1 Extra alarm
PS41 X7:3 High oil pressure
PS42 X7:4 Low oil pressure
XS1/ Vibration
X8:4
XS2 Emergency stop2
- X9:3 Heater fault
TT1 X11 :1-3 High oil temperature 3
TT1 X 11:1-3 Low oil temperature 3
Water transducer
MT4 XE:1-4
(signal displayed)
MV15/
X5:3/X7:4 Discharge failure
PS42
Output signals
- X1:1-2 Motor starter

-
XS1
MV1
X2:3-4
X4:4
Blocking vibration
switch
Oil to separator
-
MV10AI
MV10
X5:1/X5:2
Displacement/
Conditioning water I-- ~ ~
-
MV15
MV16
X5:3
X5:4
Bowl opening water
Bowl closing water4 to- ~-··· ~····

-
1. See list after timer sequence parameters on page 4.
2. Emergency stop (XS2) is normally connected to terminal X8:4. If optional vibration switch (XS1) is installed, it
will be connected to terminal X8:4. Emergency stop (XS2) will then be oonnected to the system power supply.
If the EPC is in stand-by mode (OFF) and the emergency stop button is pushed, the separator motor will be
stopped.
3. With optional sensor TT1 installed P50 will not start if the temperature is to low or to high.
4. During P60 and P61 intermittently.
1810138-02 21
7 Sequence Diagram LOPX Parameter List
Separation sequence
Bowl closing water is intermittently supplied

during the separation sequence (shown in the
diagram with a broken line).
Sludge discharge sequence
Within this period of time any trigger signa!

from the transducer MT 4 will interrupt the
P70 sequence.
Stopping sequence
Before the actual stopping sequenct; begins

the separation is completed with a sludge
discharge sequence.
1810138-02
22
Check the back pressure:
read the pressure gauge situated by the low

pressure switch on the clean oil outlet line.
Plant set value:
If excessive vibration occurs press the

emergency stop button and evacuate the room.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
Never discharge a vibrating separa-

tor. Vibration wi11 increase if only
part of solidified sludge is
discharged.
Check all connections for leakage.
CAUTION
Slip hazard
6
Oil leakage may make the floor
slippery and cause injuries.
1810020-02 15
Avoid contact with hot machine surfaces.
CAUTION
Burn hazard
\\\
Process pipes, lubrication oil and
various machine surfaces can be hot
and cause bums.
Use ear protection if noise levels arc high.
WARNING
Noise hazard
Excessive noise can cause damage to

hearing if no ear protection is used.
16 1810020-02
2.6 Check of Gravity Disc

Size During Operation
1. Carry out a discharge (for uninterrupted
time during check).
2. Close the isolating valves for both
pressure switches PS41 and PS42 (to
avoid pressure alarms during check).
3. Note the normal backpressure in the oil
outlet.
4. Close regulating valve RV 4 completely.
5. Check that oil flows out through the water
outlet.
6. Re-open regulating valve RV4.
7. Check to see if oil is still flowing out
through the water outlet.
• If oil is still flowing out, the gravity
disc is the correct size. Go to item 8.
• If there is no oil flowing out, the gravity
disc is too sma11.
Stop the separator and fit a larger
gravity disc. Restart and repeat the test.
8. Reset the system:
• Carry out a discharge.
• Reset normal backpressure in the oil
outlet using regulating valve RV 4.
• Open both pressure switches PS41 and
PS42.
1810020-02
17
2.7 Stop
To stop the system:
1f
-·- ~
l. Stop the system from the control unit: (';
'-..../
I
A sludge discharge is initiated.

Separator stop sequence operation LED
/ I '-
~
flashes (yellow).
The LED changes to steady when the
sludge discharge is completed.
....
")
~
Stop the heater from the control unit.
If the heater is not connected to the control
unit it must be switched otr independently.
3. Wait until the oil feed temperature starts to
0
!Nl~
drop:
Read the temperature on the control unit
~ ~ ~
display by pressing the alarm reset button.
0
If the temperature sensor is not linked to ~
4. Stop the oil feed pump at the pump starter.
""lJj
~
"'
5. Wait until the separator is switched offby
the control unit, i.e. when the starter
ammeter reading drops to zero.
IEJ II
6. Apply the brake.
7. Wait until the separator has come to a

t!y
<..'
~
complete stop (4 - 7 minutes; depends on
.separator size: see "System Reference").
o/"
8. Release the brake.
L---------------~----------------~
II
18 1810020-02
9. In order to empty the bowl, restart the

separator drive motor from the separator
starter and let it run for about 1 minute. ®®
~--------------------~--------~
j
1810020-02
19
2.8 Emergency Stop

If an emergency situation occurs press the
~~
emergency stop button and evacuate the room.
Do not return until the separator has come to a
complete stop.
DANGER ~----------------------~~
Disintegration
hazard
Do not enter the room after an

emergency stop while the separator is
still rotating.
2.9 After Emergency Stop

The cause of the emergency must be remedied
before attempting to restart the separator.
If the cause is not found a major service must

be performed and all moving parts thoroughly
checked.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
Do not stm1 the separator after an

emergency stop without first
remedying the cause of the
emergency
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock

the power supply before dismantling.
Consult the "Separator Manuar' and the

'"Alarm List'" about emergency procedures.
20 1810020-02
Dismantling work must not be started before

all rotating parts have come to a complete
standstill.
DANGER
Entrapment hazard
Do not begin maintenance work

while the machine is still rotating.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
After an emergency stop the

separator bowl must be manually
cleaned before starting up again.
The separator must be reassembled and all

covers and guards in place before unlocking
the power supply and starting the system.
DANGER
Entrapment hazard
Do not switch on without all covers

1810020-02 21
22 1810020-02
5
Alfalaval
LOPX Separation System (.,
Alarms and Fault Finding
Printed Nov 2000

Book No. 181 0144-02 V6
Alta Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alta Laval Separation As
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alta Laval Separation AB 1997.



under divider 1.
Contents
1 Scope 1 4 Alarm Tests 25
2 EPC Signs 3 5 Test Program 27
3 Alarms 5 5.1 How to Start the

Test Program 27
3.1 Alarm Functions 5
5.2 Lamp Test 28
3.2 Alarm Reset 6
5.3 How to Activate
3.3 Alarm Survey 7 Different Parts of the
3.4 LED Alarms and Test Program 28
Fault Finding 8 5.4 Functions in the
3.4.1 High Oil Pressure 8 Test Program 29
3.4.2 Low Oil Pressure (Low Flow) 9
3.4.3 Sludge Discharge Failure 10
3.4.4 Water Transducer Fault 11
3.4.5 Emergency Stop 12
3.4.6 Vibrations {Option) 13
3.4.7 Heater Fault 14
3.5 LED and Display Alarms and
Fault Finding 15
3.5.1 High or Low Oil Temperature
(Option) 15
3.5.2 Temperature Sensor Error
(Option) 16
3.6 Display Alarms and
Fault Finding 17
3.6.1 Communication Error 17
3.6.2 Processor Fault 18
3.6.3 Programming Error 18
3.6.4 Power Failure 19
3.6.5 Temperature Deviation 20
3.6.6 ALCAPAiarms 21
3.6.7 Other Alarms 23
3.6.8 Countdown Timer Alarm 23
1810144-02
1810144-02
1 Scope
The alarms, alarm tests and the test program

are valid for the following separation systems:
LOPX 705
LOPX 707
LOPX 709
LOPX 710
LOPX 713
LOPX 714
Including the EPC-400 control unit with

PROM (memory chips):
PROM (front circuit board):31830-6210-l

PROM (rear circuit board):31830-6132::-l
1810144-02 1
1 Scope LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
1810144-02
2
2 EPC Signs
The control unit signs for the LOPX

separation system are shown in this chapter.
------------------~~---.
LOPX
Monitoring functions
Monitoring functions (options)
1810144-02
3
2 EPC Signs LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
I I
1-------£
~
MV1 0~
MV16
.
IEPC-4001
LOPX
Output signals
.. ~ ~-
\WI
Operating symbols
4 1810144-02
3 Alarms
3.1 Alarm Functions

The alarm system is designed to ensure that
the separation system always remains in a safe
state. There are two different types of alarm
functions:
• Sensor-related alarm functions are
indicated by light emitting diodes (LEOs)
on the EPC-400.
• Display-related alarm functions are
indicated on the EPC-400 display. When
any of the displayed alarm functions are
activated the left digits start flashing and
the right digits are steadily lit.
If there is more than one alarm at the same

tiiT'e, the EPC-400 will display the alarms in
the order in which they occurred.
Jm[[DJ
An activated alarm condition is identified either by an alarm LED (to the left in the
picture) or an alarm code on the display together with the main alarm LED (to the
right in the picture).
1810144-02
5
3 Alarms LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
3.2 Alarm Reset

·1. Acknowledge the alarm signal by pressing
the alarm push-button.
The flashing light then changes to steady.
2. Remedy the cause.
3. Reset the alarm function by pressing the
alann push-button a second time.
0
The LED will tum off.
It is possible to reset th_e system without

remedying the cause, but the alarm signal will
be repeated.
NOTE
Never return to the EPC-400 control

unit to acknowledge or reset an alarm
if it by any means can be hazardous.
WARNING
Disintegration
hazard
Never reset an alann without first

finding and remedying the cause.
6 1810144-02
LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding 3 Alarms
3.3 Alarm Survey

LED Display Alarm function Page
alarms alarms
8 High Oil Pressure 8
§ Low Oil Pressure (Low Flow) 9
)·M· Sludge Discharge Failure 10
8 Water Transducer Fault 11
@ Emergency Stop 12
§ Vibrations (Option) 13
ru Heater Fault 14
8 cIIEIEIEI High or Low Oil Temperature (Op-

tion)
15
8 lrl ~~~perature Sen~or Error (Op- 16
IT Communication Error 17
~ Processor Fault 18
[[L Programming Error 18
E Power Failure 19
[L Temperature Deviation 20
~ ALCAP Alarms 21
~ Other Alarms 23
~ Countdown Timer Alarm 23
1810144-02
7
3.4 LED Alarms and Fault·

Finding
3.4.1 High Oil Pressure
Cause Corrective action

Regulating valve, RV4, or other valves, downstream Open or regulate RV4, or other valves, to correct back
throttled or closed. pressure, normally about 1.5 bar (150 kPa).
Automatic actions at alarm Automatic actions after alarm reset
Main alarm flashes. Main alarm off.

Alarm diode (PS41) flashes. Alarm diode off.
Change over valve (V1) is set for oil recirculation. V1 is set for oil feed to separator.
8 1810144-02
3.4.2 Low Oil Pressure (Low Flow)
Causes Corrective actions
Too low oil feed. Check the oil feed pump.

Adjust the oil flow.
Strainer before the oil feed pump is clogged. Clean the strainer.
Oil feed pump has stopped. Check the oil feed pump.
Change over valve (V1) is in recirculation position. 1. Check the air supply to the solenoid valve block air
(MV1).
2. Check MV1.
3. Check V1.
Too low back pressure. Increase the back pressure with regulating valve RV4.
The correct back pressure is normally about 1.5 bar
(150 kPa).
Bowl opened accidentally during operation. Check the opening water valve (MV15) for leakage.
See "Separator Manual".
Leakage from bowl. See "Separator Manual".

Alarm diode (PS42) flashes. Alarm diode off.
V1 is set for oil recirculation. V1 is set for oil feed to separator.
1810144-02 9
3.4.3 Sludge Discharge Failure
No or very low opening water supply. Check the water supply system:
11 litres/min are required for LOPX 705
181itres/min are required for LOPX 707,709,710,713 &
714.
: Opening water valve (MV15) damaged. Check MV15 .
. No signal from low oil pressure switch (PS42) at dis- Check PS42.
; charge.
· Separator operating system not working. 1. Check the separator by manually opening MV15 for
discharge.
2. Dismantle and check the operating system. See
"Separator Manual".
· Dosing ring tightened too much. Tighten the dosing ring screws with a torque of 7 Nm for
LOPX 705
Tighten the dosing ring screws with a torque of 20 Nm for
LOPX 707,709,710, 713 & 714.
N.B. This alarm is activated after two attempts to discharge, within the same discharge cycle, have failed.
Alarm diode flashes. Alarm diode off.
. The stop sequence is initiated. 1. If the power has been off for more than about 1o
minutes the separator bowl must be stopped and
manually cleaned before restart.
2. The separator and the EPC program have to be
restarted.
10 1810144-02
3.4.4 Water Transducer Fault
Loose connection between transducer test circuit Check connections.

board and oscillator.
Faulty oscillator unit or faulty EPC control module. Check supply voltage in the MT4 on terminal 3- 4 (20 V
DC).
About every fifth second the voltage at terminal 4 - 5 (20
V DC) will drop for approx. 0.5 second:
• If voltage drop: replace the oscillator unit.
• If no voltage drop: replace the EPC control module .
For more information about the interconnections, see
"System Reference".
Alarm diode flashes. Alarm diode off.
Change over valve (V1) is set for oil recirculation. V1 is set for oil feed to separator.
1810144-02 11
3.4.5 Emergency Stop
Cause Corrective actions

Emergency stop button has been pushed. 1. Remedy the cause for the emergency stop.
2. Reset the alarm by switching the power off and on.
3. Restart the separator.
4. Restart the EPC program.
Automatic actions at alarm Automatic action after alarm reset
Main alarm flashes. N.B. This alarm function can not be reset by pushing
the alarm reset button. See above.
Alarm diode flashes.
The separator is stopped and the heater turned off.
Oil feed through the heater and separator stays on for
max. 3 minutes, or until FS4 signals no flow. Bowl
closing water supplied for 15 seconds.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
The separator bowl must be manually

cleaned before starting up again
12 1810144-02
3.4.6 Vibrations (Option)
Q~
v:J §
"
Cause Corrective actions
Vibration switch activated: separator bowl out of bal- 1. Remedy the cause. See "Separator Manual".
ance. Check the vibration switch setting.
2. Reset the alarm by switching the power off and on.
3. Clean the separator bowl.
4. Restart the separator.
5. Restart the EPC program.
Automatic actions at alarm Automatic action after alarm reset

Main alarm flashes. N.B. This alarm function can not be reset by pushing
the alarm reset button. See above.
Alarm diode flashes.
The separator is stopped and the heater turned off.
Oil feed through the heater and separator stays on for

max. 3 minutes, or until FS4 signals no flow. Bowl
closing water supplied for 15 seconds ..
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
The separator bowl must be manually

cleaned before starting up again
1810144-02 13
3.4.7 Heater Fault
N.B. Heater fault is only activated if the heater is controlled by the EPC-400.
' Cause Corrective action
i Oil flow stopped or temperature switch tripped in an If oil flow stopped, investigate the cause.
i installed Heatpac heater. See corrective actions for PS42.
I Check the flow switch on the Heatpac heater.
' If temperature switch tripped, investigate the tempera-
I
ture switch setting. If OK check that the heater is clean.
Clogged heater. Clean heater.
Safety switch for other type of electric heater or steam Remedy the cause.
heater tripped.
· Automatic actions at alarm Automatic actions after alarm reset

: Main alarm flashes. Main alarm off.
i Alarm diode flashes. Alarm diode off.
i
I Change ·over valve (V1) is set for oil recirculation. V1 is set for oil feed to separator.
Heater switched off. Heater switched on.
14 1810144-02
3.5 LED and Display

Alarms and Fault
Finding
3.5.1 High or Low Oil Temperature

(Option)
N.B. Also applicable to TI2 temperature sensor, if fitted.
Low temperature alarm when: Investigate the reason and remedy it.
;
- clogged heater
- insufficient steam supply
- faulty steam trap
-faulty steam supply valve
-electrical fault (tripped fuse)
High temperature alarm when: Investigate the reason and remedy it.
- faulty steam supply valve
- electrical control system out of action
Set point (P7) changed or the alarm limits are too 1. Adjust the parameters.
close to the set point. P5 =max. temp
P6 = min. temp
P7 =set point.
See "Parameter Lisf'.
2. Check the temperature control loop.
Steam control valve (SRV1) open or closed too much. 1. Check and adjust the SRV1 function.
2. Check the EPC output functions.
Low temperature alarm when the temperature in- Check the heater and parameter P41, See "Parameter
creases too slowly, during start-up. List".
Pt 100 temperature signal faulty. Check the Pt 100 temperature sensor.
:
N.B. The current temperature is indicated when the alarm is acknowledged. To find the appropriate
temperature sensor reading, push the alarm reset button twice 1C (1 F)= TI1, 2C (2F) = TT2.
For more information, see "Operating Instructions".

Alarm diode and displayed value flash. Alarm diode off and display returned to normal.
Oil feed (MV1) off. MV1 on.
Heater switched off at high temperature (if controlled Heater switched on when temperature is below set point
i by EPC-400). (if heater is controlled by EPC-400).
1810144-02 15
3.5.2 Temperature Sensor Error

(Option)
lei IIEIEIEI i
"'
N.B. Also applicable to TI2 temperature sensor, if fitted.
Temperature sensor is incorrectly connected. Check the temperature sensor by the test program, see
"Analog inputs" on page 32 in the chapter Test Program.
Temperature sensor loop is open or short-circuit. Check the connections.
Temperature sensor cables are too close to power ca- Check the cables between the temperature sensor and
bles. EPC-400.
N.B. Push the alarm reset button to find appropriate process value reading.
1C (1 F) = TI1, 2C (2F) = TT2. If both temperature sensors are fitted, alarm A6 is also activated.

Alarm diode and displayed value flashes. Alarm diode off and display returned to normal.
Oil feed (MV1) off. MV1 on.
Heater switched off at high temperature (if controlled Heater switched on when temperature is below set point
by EPC-400). (if heater is controlled by EPC-400).
16 1810144-02
3.6 Display Alarms and

Fault Finding
3.6.1 Communication Error
Alarm code Cause Corrective actions
::!
Communication error with exter- 1. Check external and internal
: IRitll-1 1 11 "'
~
nal computer. connections.
2. If internal communication error,
replace the control module.
Communication error between 1. Check by measurement the fuses

IRIIII-i
~
e
141 ~
front and rear circuit board. A 1:F2 (front board), A2:F2 (rear
board).
(See "Component Description,
EPC-400 Control Unif').
2. Replace the control module.
Automatic action at alarm Automatic actions after alarm reset

Display flashes. Display normal.
1810144-02 17
3.6.2 Processor Fault
Alarm codes Causes Corrective actions
IRicll-1 ,,, "'

g Internal RAM error. Replace control module.
~
External RAM error. Replace control module.

IRicli-1 lei "'
~
~
"'~ E2 RAM error. Replace control module.

IR!cll-1 131 ~
Program error. Replace control module.

IRicll-1 l'~l "'§
~
Mode switch error. Check that the mode selector is in the cor-
IRicll-1 lsi i
~
rect position.
A I D (Analog I Digital) conversion Check the fuse A 1:F2 (front board)

\Ricll-1 lbl ~
~
~ error. If the fuse is correct, replace the control
module.
.. Calibration error. Ask for service or replace the control mod-
IRicll-1 111 g
~ ule.

3.6.3 Programming Error
Alarm code Cause Corrective action
In programming mode too long Change the mode selector to the

IRI3II I I I ~
~
(more than 30 minutes without
programming during this time).
"L" {Local) position and, when appropriate,
return to the "P" (Programming) position
and continue with programming.
Main alarm flasfies. Main alarm oft.

-
18 1810144-02
3.6.4 Power Failure

Power failure. 1. Check the power supply.
IRI~II-1
~
§
1
1 1 ~ 2. If the power has been off more than
about 10 minutes the separator bowl
must be stopped and manually
cleaned before restart.
3. Restart the heater, separator and
EPC program.
Power supply frequency too high 1. Check the power supply.
IRI~II-1 lei
~
~
~ (more than+ 5%). 1 2. If the power has been off more than
about 1o minutes the separator bowl
must be stopped and manually
cleaned before restart.
3. Restart the heater, separator and
EPC program.

A!l outputs are off.
Only valid for alarm A4-1: Only valid for alarm A4-1:
Main alarm diode and display Main alarm off.
start to flash when power returns. Display indicates "OFF".
Only valid for alarm A4-2: Only valid for alarm A4-2:
1. The frequency deviation must be continuous or repeated during the alarm delay time before an alarm is acti-
vated.
1810144-02
19
3 Alarms LOPX Alarms and Fa~lt Finding
3.6.5 Temperature Deviation
Alarm code Cause Corrective actions

« Temperature deviation alarm (dif- At commissioning:
IR!6ll II I ~
~
terence between TT1 and TT2 is
more than 30 °C/54 °F).
Check if the distance between
sensors is too great.
System in operation:
Check the temperature sensors.
N.B. Push the alarm reset button to find the appropriate process value reading 1C (1 F) = TT1,
2C (2F) = TT2. For more information, see "Operating Instructions".

20 1810144-02
3.6.6 ALCAP Alarms

High water transducer {MT 4) val-
IR!1II-I ItI :0
~ ue (above 400):
• High water content in oil. Check the oil system for water leakage.
• Water transducer dirty. Clean the contact surfaces of water trans-

ducer. See "Component Description, Wa-
ter Transducer".
Low water transducer (MT4) val-
IRI111-I lei ~
~ ue (below 100):
• Open circuit in the MT4. 1. Check connections in control unit and

transducer.
2. Check cables for damage.
• Bad connection between 1. Check the cable connection.

oscillator unit and electrode.
2. Tighten oscillator electrode connector
ALCAP stand-by for more than 1. The reason for stand-by mode must
IRI1II-I 131
~
~ 24 hours. be checked!
2. Try to operate the system normally.
PROM and/or RAM fault. Replace control module.
IRI1II-1 lsi .,.,
<[
~
Water transducer trigger value 1. System and component check:
IRI1II-11JII "'"'
~ less than 30.
Insufficient displacement water.
• Check that the valve block strainer is
free from deposits.
Insufficient conditioning water.
• Check that the displacement water
flow from MV1 0 is correct.
• Check that the inner water pipe in the
separator inlet pipe is free from
deposits. Clean if necessary.
• Check that the seal ring and sealing
surface on the sliding bowl bottom are
free from any damage.
2. If the alarm still occurs, please check
following parameter settings in EPC
400:
• P12 :2:5 (If this value is below 5, then
set it to 5)
• P70 = according to parameter list
setting for your separator type
• P76 =actual value of P12 x actual
value of P70.
1810144-02 21

Water transducer (MT 4) trigger- 1. Check for water leakage into lube oil
IR11II-Itl21 ~
~ ing 5 times in a row. system (e.g. from cooler or engine).
2. Change over to stand-by mode
(adjust P10 to 0).

Oil feed off. Oil feed on.
DANGER
If the A 7 - 11 alarm is not remedied

there is a risk for breakdown.
22 1810144-02
3.6.7 Other Alarms
Extra alarm. 1. Check the connected external

IRiqll-1 1
1 1
"'
"
~
function.
2. Check the jumper at terminal XC-X7:1
{when extra alarm not used).
Low pressure signal (PS42) Check the pressure switch.

IRiqll-1 lrl ~
~
faulty at start. Circuit should be
open.

Only valid for alarm A9-1: Oil feed on.

If P43=1 then oil feed off.
Only valid for alarm A9-2:

The start of the timer sequences
is blocked.
3.6.8 Countdown Timer Alarm

The count down timer has Restart the timer after relevant actions are
l3lhll-l-l-l "'
;g
~ reached zero. completed (Parameter 94).

1810144-02 23
1810144-02
24
4 Alarm Tests
Use the following guide for testing alarm

functions by activating them. Alarms are
provoked by one or more actions (A, Band so
on) as shown in the right column, however,
certain alam1 functions can not be tested
without being disconnected.
N.B. If the alarm functions are to be
disconnected in the control unit. be
careful to avoid a short-circuit.
The recommendation is to test the alarms

every 3 months.
LED alarm Display alarm Function Sensor Actions to provoke an alarm
High oil pressure PS41 Increase back pressure.
8
Low oil pressure (low PS42 A. Stop oil feed pump.
8 flow)
B. Change MV1 position by reducing
air pressure.
c. Reduce the back pressure.
Sludge discharge failure PS42 1. Disconnect hose for opening water

)·M· 2.
(MV15).
Initiate a sludge discharge.
Water transducer fault MT4 Disconnect cable to XE:4 (the test signal
'·8 to MT4).
Emergency stop XS2 Press the emergency stop button.

(§
Vibrations (option) XS1 Tap the vibration switch until the alarm is
@ released.
Heater fault - 1. Start the heater.

{S} 2. Disconnect cable to X9:3.
1810144-02 25
4 Alarm Tests LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
LED alarm Display alarm Function Sensor Actions to provoke an aiarm

High or low oil tempera- TI1 A. Remove sensor from pipe and put
@ lC ture {option) into hot/cool liquid.
B. Change alarm limit parameters
(P5 =max. temp., P6 =min. temp.)
For more information see the
"Parameter Lisf'.
N.B. Reset the parameter values
after test.
Communication error - Remove fuse A2:F2 (rear board).
IRI/11-1 !41
A I D conversion error - Remove fuse A 1:F2 {front board).
IRI2II-I ]bl
Programming error - Leave the mode selector switch in
IRI3II I I I position P for 30 minutes.
Power failure - Switch the power to the EPC off and on.
IRI4II-I 111
Power supply frequency - Set parameter P21 to wrong frequency.
IRI411-I 121 too high (more than
+ 5%).
Temperature deviation TI1-TI2 Remove sensor from pipe to cool or heat

IRis I I I I up (temp. diff. more than 30 °C/54 °F).
IRilll-1 ,,, High water transducer

value (above 400).
MT4 Touch the central screw in the 1\.tiT4
connection box.
Low water transducer MT4 Disconnect the central screw in the MT4
IRJ111-I 121 value (below 100). connection box and keep the oscillator
unit free.
Water transducer trigger MT4 Close displacement water supply and

IRilll-11]11 value not above 30.
Insufficient amount of
wait 7 discharge cycles.
The amount of displacement water is
displacement water. checked every fourth discharge.
]Riqjj-j ,,, Extra alarm - A. Activate appropriate sensor.

B. Disconnect cable X7:1.
PS42 faulty at start PS42 With the EPC in off mode put a jumper
IRJqjJ-1 ]21 (Circuit should be open) between XC- X7:4 and push the start
button.
26 1810144-02
5 Test Program
The EPC-400 control unit has a test program,

for testing of input and output functions,
memory etc.
This test program should be run during

installation and whenever there is a need for it,
for instance, during fault finding.
5.1 How to Start the Test

Program
NOTE
,'em
• [D
The test program is only to be used __,~-.:,...·:...,11

.-I !3
when the separator system is out of
operation.
To run the test program, do as follows:

1. Open the control unit door.
2. Switch the power off and the mode
selector in any position (R, L or P).
3. Press the discharge and the alarm push-
buttons simultaneously, and keep them
pressed.
4. Switch the power on.
5. Release the discharge and alarm push-
buttons when the test program has started.
1810144-02
27
5 Test Program LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
5.2 Lamp Test

The test program starts with a lamp test.
1. The display lit with power on.
2. There are two ways to check the lamps:
• Each LED and display segment 0
individually lit (see the picture).
• Each group of LED:s and display
segments lit.
Push the button 2 (see the figures in the
picture below) to switch between the two
modes.
5.3 How to Activate

Different Parts of the
Test Program
Use the push-buttons to activate different
parts of the test program (see the figures 1, 2~
and 3 in the picture).
1. Push button 1 to step from function I to
function 2 etc. in the test program.
It is not possible to step backwards.
Wait until the function is activated before
pushing the button again.
ol---+--3
2. Push button 2 to step forward within each
function in the test program, for instance
from function 1.1 to 1.2.
3. Push button 3 to activate or deactivate
output terminal (function 5 and 6).
1810144-02
28
LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding 5 Test Program
5.4 Functions in the Test

Program
1. Memory
Function
..
I I I I Ia I ~ 1.1
1.2
PROM
Internal RAM
Memory correct
1.3 External RAM
I I I I lEI
Memory fault
"";;;
~
1.4 EEPROM
2. Digital inputs
Function Terminal Unit Correct

value
2.1 Low flow (Low oil pressure) X7:4-XC PS42 0
I I I I Ia I §
""
2.2 High pressure X7:3-XC PS41 1
Q
2.3 Not in use - - 1

Circuit open
2.4 Extra alarm X7:1-XC - 0
II I I I tl $
§
<.
2.5 Emergency stop or Vibration
switch
X8:4-XC XS2 or
XS1
1
Circuit closed 2.6 Not in use - - 1

2.7 Start or stop EPC X8:2-XC Remote 0
switch
2.8 Start or stop heater X8:1-XC Remote 0
switch
1810144-02 29
3. Digital inputs
Function Terminal Unit Correct

value
3.1 Alarm acknowledge or Reset X9:4-XC Remote 0
switch
I I I I Ia I 3.2 Heater fault X9:3-XC 1
Circuit open
3.3 Sludge discharge X9:2-XC Remote 0
switch
I I I I I tl
Circuit closed
4. Mode selector
Function
4.1 1 Remote (R) position
I I lj..jc lo.l
Remote position
~
~
4.1
4.1
Local (L) position
Program (P) position
I I IlL lolcl
Local position
<!
~
§
L
I I IIP!rlol
Program position
i"~
i. 4.1 has three positions: R, L, and P.
30 1810144-02
5. Digital outputs
'Use push-button 3 to activate or deactivate

each output (see "How to Activate Different
.Parts of the Test Program" on page 28).
N.B. Corresponding green LED is not lit.
Function Terminal Unit
'
5.1 Oil feed X4:4-XD MV1/V1
I I 11 I Ia I ~
~
5.2 Displacement or conditioning
water drain
X5:1-XD MV10A
Circuit deactive
,, 5.3 Displacement or conditioning X5:2-XD MV10

water supply
I I I I I
<(
' ~ 5.4 Opening water X5:3-XD MV15

~
5.5 Closing water X5:4-XD MV16
Circuit active
5.6 Steam shut-off valve or Heatpac X6:1-XD -
fixed load
5.7 Steam valve decrease or Heatpac X6:2-XD -

fixed load
5.8 Steam valve increase or Heatpac X6:3-XD

fixed load
6. Digital outputs
Use button 3 to activate or deactivate each

output (see ''How to Activate Different Pans
of the Test Program'' on page 28).
N.B. Corresponding green LED is not lit.
6.1 Heatpac variable load X6:4-XD
I I I I Ia I I
~
6.2 Heatpac alarm blocking during X4:2-XD K15in
i
start power
Circuit deactive unit
6.3 Not in use
I I I I I /I
<(
i 6.4 Separator stop X1 :1-2

§
Circuit active 6.5 Not in use
6.6 Remote/common alarm X2:1-2

6.7 Blocking vibration switch X2:3-4 XS1
1810144-02 31
7. Not in use
8. Analog inputs
To simulate the temperature sensor elements
~--------~-~----x_1_o_.x__11--------~~
(Pt 100) in 8.1 and 8.2, a resistor can be used.
Separate plug connectors with appropriate
resistors are included in the test module kit.
Resistor Reference temp. Display reading
110 Q 25 oc (77 °F) 60
140 Q 104 oc (219 °F) 215
The normal value on the display for function

8.1 and 8.2 should be 60- 215. Outside the
range 42-233 indicates a fault. 000 (or a very
low value) or 255 indicates a serious fault.
A normal value for function 8.3, Reference

4 V should be 195-215.
This table shows how to find the fault:

"Temperature sensor error": alarm code "EEE" Possible causes
Func~ion Terminal ·Unit FuseA1:F2 AID conver- Input Input short
blown sion faulty open circuit
8.1 Temperature sensor for control X10: 1-3 TT2 000 000 255 000
8.2 Temperature sensor for alarm X11: 1-3 TT1 000 000 255 000
8.3 Reference 4 V 000 000 195-215 195-215
8.4 Not in use
Function Terminal Unit Displayed value

8.5 Calibration X10 TT2 0 = OK E = Error
8.6 Calibration X11 TT1 0 = OK E = Error
For instance, if the display shows '"000" for

function 8.1, 8.2 and 8.3, it must be either a
blown fuse or AID converter fault. Check it in
this order:
1. If the fuse is blown, replace it.
2. If the fuse is correct, replace the contr91
module.
32 1810144-02
9. Serial communication
I I II I Jol ""
~
9.1 Not applicable
(The display will show an E).
X13:1-4
Circuit correct
9.2 RS 232 C X14 X14:1-4
Measure -10 to -12V DC
on X14:1-4 (Circuit correct).
'I I I I
Circuit fault
lEI!
N.B. After the test, remove the terminal
jumpers and connect communication
cables.
10. Test of EPROM (rear circuit board)
11.. Test of internal RAM in CPU

II II I lol i
Circuit correct
(rear circuit board
12. Test of external RAM in CPU

(rear circuit board)
13. Test of IC 8255 1/0 port

I I I I lEI i
Circuit fault
(rear circuit board)
14. Low reference analog input

(internal)
A value between 77 and 116 is displayed,

when it is correct.
15. High reference analog input

(internal)
A value between 25 l and 3 77 is displayed,

when it is correct.
1810144-02 33
16. Transducer signal (internal)
The display shows 100 ±-50 with oil

inside .the WT 200 and 55 ± 10 with air,
when it is correct.
17. Not in use
18. Not in use
19. o-volt reference, analogue in
A value between 34 and 46 is displayed when

correct.
N.H. Stop the test program by switching
power off-on.
34 181 0144-02
6
r.~
Alfalaval
LOPX 705 Separation System
System Reference
Product No. 1765119-01
Printed May 1996

Book No. 1810261-02 V1
· Alfa·Laval Marine & Power

Alta Laval reseNe the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments. regarding possible errors and omissions or
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Separation AB
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alta Laval Separation AS 1996.


under divider 1.
Contents
1 Technical Data 1 2.3.12 Combined Separator and

Pump Starter lnterconn.
Diag; 13- 25 Amp 21
1.1 Separation System 1
2.3.13 Combined Separator and
1.2 Separator 2 Pump Starter Circuit Diag.;
4-12.5 Amp 22
2 Drawings 3
Pump Starter Circuit Diag.;
2.1 Mounting Drawings 3
23
13-25 Amp
2.1.1 Mounting Drawing 4
2.2 Separator Drawings 7
2.2.1 Basic Size 7

2.2.2 Foundations 8
2.3 Interconnection and Circuit

Diagrams 9
2.3.1 Cable List 9

2.3.2 Standard Equipment
Interconnection Diagram 11
2.3.3 Standard Equipment
Interconnection Diagram
(Cont.} 12
2.3.4 Optional Equipment
Interconnection Diagram 13
2.3.5 Heatpac Control
(Electric Heater) 14
2.3.6 Heatpac Control
(Steam Heater) 15
2.3.7 Separator Starter
Interconnection Diagram;
4-12.5 Amp 16
2.3.8 Separator Starter
Interconnection Diagram;
13-25Amp 17
2.3.9 Separator Starter Circuit
Diagram; 4- 12.5 Amp 18
2.3.10 Separator Starter Circuit
Diagram; 13-25 Amp 19
Pump Starter lnterconn.
Diag; 4-12.5 Amp 20
1810261-02
1810261-02
1 Technical Data
1.1 Separation System
Separator LOPX 705 SFD-30
Application Cleaning of all types of lubricating oil used

for marine and power diesel engines.
Separation temperature Cross head engines

Trunk piston engines
Capacity Rated capacity 5700 1/hr
Detergent:
Cross Head Diesel Engine 1800 1/hr
Trunk Piston Diesel Engine 1300 1/hr
Operating water Pressure 150-600 kPa

Temperature 5-85 oc
Maximum density 1000 kg/m3
Maximum hardness 180 ppm (CaC0 3 10 °dH)
Minimum pH value 6
Salinity maximum 60 ppm chloride
(equivalent to 100 ppm NaCl)
Compressed air Pressure 650-800kPa

Free from oil
Dry with dew point at least 10 oc
below ambient temperature
Sludge production 2 litres per discharge
Maximum water
consumption 2 litres per discharge
Maximum back pressure 250 kPa
1810261-02 1
1 Technical Data LOPX 705 System Reference
1.2 Separator
50 Hz 60Hz
Speed Drive motor 1420-1500 rpm 1700-1800 rpm
Bowl spindle max. 7607 rpm 7540 rpm
Rev. counter 118-125 rpm 142-150 rpm

Gear ratio 71 : 14 67:16
Torque Jp reduced to motor shaft 18 kg m2 12 kg m2
Miscellaneous Starting time 1.5- 3.5 minutes

Stopping time with brake 2-4 minutes
Maximum operating time
without oil feed 180 minutes
Sump lubrication oil 4.1 litres
Motor power (min.) 4kW
Power consumption:
'maximum at start up 6kW
maximum operating 3,6 kW
Bowl data Sludge and water space 1.2 litres
Manufacturing materials Frame lower and upper cast iron

Frame hood silumin
Bowl shell stainless steel
Other process parts bronze, brass and
stainless steel
2 1810261-02
2 Drawings
2.1 Mounting Drawings
3
1810261-02
1\)
:....
:....
3:
0
c
....:::1
3'
------, c.c
c
Q1
r~-,
1
L
I
..J ~.
:J
c.c
! @-_(
I ,
H ' )
,_, __ I
~~
LOPX 705 System Reference 2 Drawings
Legend
Flow
¢
201 Oil inlet JIS 25A 1OK
206 Conditioning and displacement water
209 Oil Recirculation to tank JIS 25A 1OK
220 Oil outlet JIS 25A 1OK
222 Sludge discharge outlet, JIS 1OOA 5K
371 Operating water pH value not below 6pH,
hardness max 10°dH 150-600 kPa
( 1,5-6 bar}, Salinity max 60ppm Cl
(equivalent to 100 ppm NaCI)
H high pressure G 3/4 internal
L low pressure G 3/4 internal
372 Opening water
376 Closing water

463 Drain, hose conn. 025 mm (1")
501 Operating air, Cu-pipe 06/04 650-800 kPa
A Starter/Combined starter
8 Operating water tank with/without level

switch
c Protection device, emergency stop box
0 Flow control equipment
E Vibration switch
F Max. deviation from vertical 30°
G Max. 3 m Athwarthships
H Separator
I Max. 15 m Fore and Aft
J Thermometer kit
K Temperature sensor kit
- - - Not included in standard delivery
=== : Optional equipment
1810261-02 5
2 Drawings LOPX 705 System Reference
--~----------------------------------------------------~--------------
Basic Equipment
litem Description Qty. Article no.
1 Separator LOPX 705 SFD-30 1 881149-02-02
2 EPC-400 control unit 1 31830-6228-2
3 Emergency stop 1 1763946-01
4 Water transducer, WF200 1 31830-1770-4
5 Flange connection JIS 40A 1 1762567-83

10K
6 Pressure pipe assembly JIS 1 1764780-81

25A 10K
7 Flow indicator 1 1761974-83
8 Regulating valve JIS 25A 1OK 1 1762570-84
9 Change-over valve JIS 25A 1 748393-85

10K
10 Solenoid valve block, water 1 1763455-91
11 Solenoid valve block, air 1 1763524-80
13 Connecting hose 2 537174-80
14 Mounting parts 1 1765119-41

15 Connection flange JIS 25A 1 1765006-81
10K
16 Connection flange JIS 40A 1 1765044-80
10K
18 Flexible hose, water 2 1764007-03

19 Flexible hose, water 1 1763906-02
12 - 191 Ancillary kit 1765119-21
6 1810261-02
2.2 Separator Drawings
2.2.1 Basic Size
1050
510
139 435
65
Ret. 557015 Rev. o

A. Maximum horizontal B. Maximum vertical C. Tightening torque 20 Nm.
displacement at the inlet/ displacement at the sludge secured with a lock nut
outlet connections during connection during operation
operation ±20 mm ± lOmm
1810261-02 7
LOPX 705 System Referen<~e 2 Drawings
2.3 Interconnection and Circuit Diagrams
2.3.1 Cable List
Standard Equipment
No. Type Connection point A Instruction Connection point B Remarks
10 RCOP 5 X 1.5 Starter EPC-400
11 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Alarm panel
12 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 MV1
13 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 MV 10A
17 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 PS42

18 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 XS2
19 RCOP 2 pair 0.5 EPC-400 sse MT4

20 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 PS41
Optional equipment
XS1 Vibration switch

21 RCOP 2 pair 0.5 EPC-400 xs 1
Remote operation of control unit EPC-400

23 RCOP 2 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Remote operation switch
TT1 temperature sensor Pt1 00 for alarm

24 RCOP 2 pair 0.5 EPC-400 sse TT 1
1810261-02 9
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Supervision of externally controlled heater

40 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Start/ Stop Heater
41 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Heater fault
42 RCOP 1 pair0.5 EPC-400 Remote operation switch
44 RCOP 1 pair0.5 . EPC-400 Steam shut off
.. Heatpac EHS control

,: No. Type Connection point A Instruction Connection point B Remarks
40 ReOP 4 pair 0.5 EPe-400 Heatpac power unit
42 ReOP 1 pair0.5 EPC-400 Remote operation switch
"
I 43 RCOP 4 pair 0.5 EPe-400 sse TT2/TT1
Heatpac SHS control

40 ReOP 2 pair 0.5 EPC-400 SRV 1

41 ReOP 1 pair 0.5 EPe-400 Heater fault
42 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Remote operation switch
43 ReOP 4 pair 0.5 EPC-400 sse TT2/TT1

44 ReOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Steam shut off
Other equivalent and approved cables may be used.

Where SSC is indicated it should be a signal shielded cable with the shield properly
connected to earth as shown in the electrical drawings.
For other connections armoured cable may be used provided the armour is connected to
earth as shown in the electrical drawings.
For further information about cables see ..Component Description. EPC-400 Control Unit"
10 1810261-02
2.3.2 Standard Equipment Interconnection Diagram
POWER SUPPLY
~ffi~O~M~S~TAA~ff~R~F~OO~SE~P~A~RA~T~OR~---------;lOr-----;l
~~~ 48 VAC~~~~ 50/60 Hz
lD-3 STOP OF SEPAAATOR
lD- 4 POT.FREE CONTACT, MAX 50 V AC/DC, 1 A
lD-5 PROffCTIVE EARTH (PE)
r \._
-~
SIGNAL TO ALARM PANEL IL 11-1
'Por:-FRrr co•i.rAC!. oPENsAf'ALAkM"--- \.1 ~ - :-11-11-2
MAX 50V AC/DC. l.OA I •r-
-~
~ (")
0
:z:
;a
0
r-
c
MVl (Vl)
OIL fEED
~ ~12-1
~12-2
dl @)12
~
.-..;
fT1
-u
. •I
(")
I
~~~ DRMN ~::~.JI

-4>-
0
@ 0
MV10
DISPLAC. WA ffR ~~~~2'.,11
LSL---c:::... ~ i=l ~1----+---il
f.:;\
MV15
OPENING WATER ~~~~2'"11
~ ~ .• i=l ~
\!,Vt----+---il
MV16
CLOSING WAffR ~116-6-1:11
~ ;l ~
~t-------il
Ret. 1763488 Rev. 4
1810261-02 11
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.3.3 Standard Equipment Interconnection Diagram (Cont.)
ElORA ALARM
r . - . -::--, ~ ·II-~
::0
: INPUT . ~ ---u--- -...,.,__...• - r'...., -
----11
L . _ . .::.J
/'"\._ nfl--
~-
~
00
"'"'
-e·
~ PS 41
!!I HIGH PRESSURE
~
"'c:
::0
..
(IJ
<>. PS 42
LOW PRESSURE
(")
0
:z
--l
:::0
0
I
c:
:z
XS2 ~
EMERGENCY STOP ('Tl
SEPARATOR -o
(")
{Special stop I
~
sequence) 0
0
%5
~~TXD
RXD
=a· ~ ~
;:!~ MT4
~I(!
z-u
WAl£R 1RANSOUCER
~?;
::::!>
~~ NOl£!
Shield connected
~~ only in transducer
~~
~~
-c
01~
§ ...
~~ L_
.___________________:_E__~F~~~~!c~~~~~~~~~----------------------------_jx~
or r er in ormation see our System ManuaL 8
Ret. 1763488 Rev. 4
12 1810261-02
2.3.4 Optional Equipment Interconnection Diagram
X$1
~BRAllON SWITCH Ien:-~_; ~11
REPLACES XS2
EMERGENCY STOP
I ca~~~i--:-,---{ 21
L_~_ J
REMOTE
CONTROL UNIT
PUSH-BUTION
FUNCllONS
START/STOP
DISCHARGE INIT.
f::H-t--i
1--------'--++lr. XB: 2I
1l-Ji-t-i-IX9: 1~ I
ALARM ACK. 1l-4-t-i-IX9: ~IJ
(")
0
:z
IT 1 (Algero) I ~-;~~ll -1
:::0
Temp. sensor ~24-2 1-+---{ 0
r-
2 X Pt 100 1 c:
(For 2-wire conn. . ~ . :z
see dwg. 1764441)~- ...:J =i
f"T1
-o
(")
SUPERVISION OF I
~
EXT. CONTROLLED HEATER 0
I 0
REM. START/STOP .- -42.-t--ILI_ _ '4z\_ _ ~H-jl-42-1

(INPUT) L...--41-2-it . \:./ I ~~-2
HEATER FAULT (INPUT)

..UMP£R ~EN NOT USED
r--41-1--IL_I _ _
u-...--41-2-11 .
'4
1
'"_,
\_ _ _
~~-2- I H-jl-41-1-tn---u~lj:.J 1
START/ STOP
{OUTPUT,48 VAC)
~·~~~1---------(!®}-----f--ll
·~~I
~=~~1--4-----i
STEAM SHUT-OFF
(OUTPUT,48 VAC) 1 ®)----,---.4,
-·-·::.J
L
For further information see our System Manual.
Ref. 1763488 Rev. 3
1810261-02 13
2.3.5 Heatpac Control Interconnection Diagram (Electric Heater)
HEATPAC
POWER UNIT 4tH
40-8
40-2
SEE ALSO 40-3

INTERCONNECllON 40-4
DIAGRAM FOR 1---11--+"+11 :::
SElE.C1ED HEATER -40-J
40-6
SIZE 40-\
40-2
0
_j 0
:z:
--i
::::0
0
I
X
("") c:
~
REMOTE r·-·::~ . -f
START/STOP ' - - 42-1--11 ,. \_ f-,.., 11-42-1 fT1
·L.......---42-2---jJ·--,4~ - t!-~2 --o
HEATER 1
L - . - . :__l 0
I
~
0
0
~
X
Vl
ra
~
>
~ Temp. sensor
2 X Pt 100
J..,
0
TT 2 (Control)
(For 2-wire conn.

_:::I see dwg. 1764441)
zo
;;jZ
TT 1 (Alarm)
g~
;zO
zc::
g~
oz
Z,-<
2n
~~
~;a
~?2
q....,
""O
• ::1:
~~
~~
<XI~
"':I:
fT1V)
:c:~
L
"'"' For further information see our Sy.>tem Manual.
Ref. 1763488 Rev. 2
14 1810261-02
2.3.6 Heatpac Control Interconnection Diagram (Steam Heater)
SlrAM SHUT-OFF
(Output, 48 V AC}
40-1 +-----1rxA:: 7 I
SRV 1
SlrAM REG. VAL¥£
(24 V AC MOTOR}
(max 1,6 A}
HEAl[R FAULT ("")

0
NOTE ! JUMPER :z
vniEN NOT USED ;a
0
I
c:
:z
REI.I01[ r·-·-::r . ..., ~ 42-1 :::::j
- - 42-1-11 ,.- :\._ -£XEJ
START/STOP
HEAlER
· c....- -42-2-tl- ~4~ -t-'t:!.r"'2-2 rr1
-o
L . - . ..::.J - ("")
!
C)
"""""
C)
~
X
i~
Temp. sensor
2 X Pt 100
TT 2 (Control)
il (For 2-wire conn.
!!l
::l see dwg. 1764441)
ZS!
!~
TT 1 (Aigrrn)
~~
g~
i~
~§
£'"'
~p
!!!~ • Note that conductor 2 is connected to terminal 3 and

~~ conductor 3 to terminal 2 in steam regulating valve
~~
in
::0~ L
::~ For further information see our System Monual.
Ref. 1763488 Rev. 3
1810261-02 15
~-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2.3.7 Separator Starter Interconnection Diagram; 4 -12.5 Amp
MAINS SUPPLY
3x220,380,415 OR 440VAC , 50 60Hz
SELECT VOLTAGE ON TRANSFORMER T1
2-1
SEPARATOR 2-2
MOTOR 2-3
n----1G)r----;1
CONTACTOR RESPONSE, SEPARATOR

PcHENTIALFREE CONTACTS~MAX 250V 0 . 5 A - - - - - -
l .
If- -=-- -=-- ~
- ~
L - - __
---l1-- 3
-:_..:::.:J
1
I
SYSTEMS EMERGENCY STOP

(CONTROL VOLTAGE OFF)
* I.=_-_-_:1______
- ..~.~ I 1
t Jl~ -_ --
I
TO CONTROL SYSTEM EPC -41 400

10-1/10-2 : CONTROL VOLTAGE 48VAC
10-3/10-4 : STOP OF SEPARATOR
10-5 : PROTECTIVE EARTH (PE)
*
r- ----11
---1
I.
y =---1~----- r ~~ ==
~ IL _ _
SEPARATOR ~~~g~ ~+~~T
COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH * ~-=--=:t- - - --- f ~~ ==

J:O_fONTROL ~YSTE!!_ EPC -41_L400 _ _
(SPECIAL STOP SEQUENCE) I . - :- - - - - --,
1 r;, _-
;;:;- 20-1 --1L] - r ~
XS 2 ~ zo-2--11 """\.2~
SEPARATOR
EMERGENCY STOP
.
~ s=z ~
1
9 1 --lh [;:;'\
(0r--t--i
*REPLACES JUMPER ON TERMINALS L

Ref. 1764026
16 1810261-02
2.3.8 Separator Starter Interconnection Diagram; 13-25 Amp
MAINS SUPPLY
3x220,380,415 OR 440VAC , 50 60Hz
SELECT VOLT AGE ON TRANSFORMER T1
V.AX FUSE ; 63 A
2-1
SEPARATOR
MOTOR
2-2
2-J
11------<01---~1
'f---4

PoTENTlALFREE CONTACTS~MAX 250V0.5A---- -
·l\--=--
-1 iE-=--
SYSTEMS EMERGENCY STOP *

(CONTROL VOLT AGE OFF)

10-1/10-2 : CONlROL VOLTAGE 48VAC
10-5 : PROTECTIVE EARTH {PE) U)
I - _ _ _jl l IL _ _
---1
)>
;o
SEPARATOR REMOTE STOP* ~- - - - \ \ - - - - - - -i\--- ---1
REMOTE START Lv~- -, 1 · 1r-- rrl
. I ;o
COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH * ~-=--=:t - ---- I ~~ ==

(SPECIAL STOP SEQUENCE)
SEPARATOR
::MERGENCY STOP
"REPLACES JUMPER ON TERMINALS L

Ret. 1764036 Rev. o
1810261-02 17
-----~------------------------------------------~---------
2.3.9 Separator Starter Circuit Diagram; 4-12.5 Amp

0:::
0
I-
<!:
0:::
<!:
Q_
w
(/)
~,,
I ittL,-. . -
l I I I
I I I
._c;-:_·=--......·~----, -1
~ ~\--\- - ~~ ~- - - - - ~ I
~ lJ: I~
en
0
5 .~
N 10
0 0
_j
I I I
Ref. 1764025
18 1810261-02
2.3.10 Separator Starter Circuit Diagram; 13-25 Amp

0:::
8<C
a:::
<C
Q_
w
(f)
~I•
I I I I
~ll_ -·-· ·-· ---,
I I I ~ II• e:::;g=------<p-----<p-----,
I I I
I I I
I I
~ \-~-r- - - - £-{- - - -
~ IN l::s
<n
I')
X
>
"'
~
co
tJ~
.....
r-
~
1'0
u...
I
<0
~ •g
I
N
~ "'~
- -
_I
Ref. 1764034 Rev. o
1810261-02 19
----------------------------------------------------------------------
2.3.11 Combined Separator and Pump Starter lnterconn. Diag; 4-12.5 Amp
MAINS SUPPLY
3x220,380,415 DR 440VAC , 50 60Hz
SEPARATOR
MOTOR n---1G)l-----ll
!-----+
3-1
PUMP J-2
11-----<G)I-----+---11
MOTOR J-3
'I
PoTENTI&FREECONTACT~AX25~0.5A-----.~L __ -n~~
l II--=:_- _- ~
11-- __ ...:.._~
CONTACTOR RESPONSE, PUMP

I 11-----~
- - -"~ ~ ::><:
PoTENTI&FREECONTACT~AX25~0.5A------~L----~~
II- - - _~-:._ ~ I
SYSTEMS EMERGENCY STOP* r :=_-- -11 t. 11---
(CONTROL VOLTAGE OFF) -..!.~--!I----- It---

10-1/10-2 : CONTROL VOLTAGE 48VAC
,----11 I
REMOTE STOP *
SEPARATOR REMOTE START
f--1:o-
L-y-
--ll
= --jj - - - - - r ;~ ==
. IL - -
COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH * ~~~t - - - __ ~ ~~ ==

lO....fONTROL2YSTE~EPC -41.EOO _ _ _
(SPECIAL STOP SEQUENCE) . _ . - - - - '
xs 2
lr,,~
:- ~ ~L}
20-1
20-2-jl -
·r J
,2~
SEPARATOR
EMERGENCY STOP
.
~ :=~
I -Jh
4j
fn\
\!)1---t--li
,-----JI
PUMP REMOTE STOP *
REMOTE START
f----":ro- - --ll - - - - -
L-y- - --ll
+-. ~~1r = =
- -
*REPLACES JUMPER ON TERMINALS L

Ret. 1764030
20 1810261-02
2.3.12 Combined Separator and Pump Starter lnterconn. Diag; 13-25 Amp
MAINS SUPPLY
3x220,3B0,415 OR 440VAC , 50 60Hz
MAX FUSE ; 63 A
SEPARATOR
MOTOR lf-----{01----t---il
!-----+
PUMP
MOTOR
If-----~
CONTACTOR RESPONSE, PUMP
PoTENTIALFREE CONTACTS~MAX 250VO.SA- - - - - -
l .
-lL- - -~
If--=._- -=._- ~ .;..
;:a;:
SYSTEMS EMERGENCY STOP

(CONTROL VOLTAGE OFF)
* ~-
- J,.~- --11
-lL_ - - - - - L ·
Jl- - -
It---
10-1
TO CONTROL SYSTEM EPC -41 400 1------llI 10-2
10-1/10-2 ; CONTROL VOLTAGE 48VAC 10-l
10-3/10-4 ; STOP OF SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR ~r.8lHi~; ~ ~~---- - H~

COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH * r - -
l....!...o- -
- -lL_ - - - _ -
--11
I Jl-
t- -
It- -
-
-
PUMP REMOTE STOP*

REMOTE START
1
___
y- -
t-"J:;'>- -
...JI
-if- - - - - -
11
r . IL _ _
--U- - -
1r - -
*REPLACES JUMPER ON TERMINALS L_

Ref. 1764043 Rev. 0
1810261-02
21
1\)
1\) :0 !
1\:) )I'V
(!)
:'"" ~
......
lo
I '
..... :t\)
(A)
~ ~~
I -~!~-,- I
~
o:rQ1- - - . - . --K4 - . 0
0 ~~-
:~~~
~.. f r, 5~~ =---
~;~::q
I
= -=-Y
~
-
PUMP
3
-·C":::s
CD
-1-1 .,.~K1----------- - J -- - tL---

----
~--
1_~-
__ SEPARATOR
c.
CJ)
CD
"'0
~
1 2_ _ M Q.)
3rv
J :..-f6
6 r---- ~- 01.....
L_ - I l I I ~-- -: 0
')!'>h.,.-----..,.,..
~III
- hI
1
33 I 34 . . . I
I 1
1
*'
-~
I
33 I 34
"""
Q.)
:::s
c.
"'0
t::
3
"'0
I I I 1
CJ)
X3 I I I I or
I ~
105 106 107 r-J:"<>- 108 21 CD
""&
[,
•
~109 -·0"""
(')
110 t::
::::;:
5
• • c -o
X
121 122
or
K4
.
c.c -.....!
0
0'1
115 ~ (/)
•
120
I
......
1\)
-
'<
(/)
<t>
3
_I b1 JJ
_..
L <t>
~
0
)> ro
1\.)
~
3 """\
<t>
::::s
"'C ()
6
1\.)
xoo:!ssu CD
2.3.14 Combined Separator and Pump Starter Circuit Diag.; 13-25 Amp
0::::
0
r
<t:
0::::
<t:
Q_
w
(f)
~·~·
I I l I I l I I
I . T I ----l I r-r- . - ·. . - . - . - .
I I I l ~
l l
I. l I ~
I l I
II• -=~:...,__--------.----.---.,
...r <
l
Ill I I I ~ .., :r:: ~
I I I I I
I ._,_1---l I
~
N ....
\\-\- _l_j l _ - - j-._t---- -:;-r-----

- I I I IN I~ ::: I I
I l l 2
1
I l l N I
I I I ::: I
I I I ::=: l
-~T~----- ~-----
1 l I ,---- I
I I I l : .__----.-1~
~ ~~~-1~-~---
l IN I~ .__- -j----l
l Q
l
l
I
<0 0
·~ ·~ ·~
0
J
Rev. 1764041 Rev. o
1810261-02 23
----------------------------------------------------------------
24 1810261-02
b~
Alfalaval
Installation Instructions
Printed Nov 2000

Book No. 1810024-02 V4
. ·~--: :- _· . · . , · · Alta Laval Marine & Power · - ·,: · · :._ ..- .- -- - ·

Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Marine & Power AB
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
©Copyright Alfa Laval Separation AB 2000.
Not following the instructions can resu~t in



under divider I.
Contents
1 Scope 1 7.2 Air Piping 26

7.2.1 Pipes 26
2 System Layout 3
7.2.2 Solenoid Valve Block, Air 26
3 Separator 7
8 Electrical System 27
4 Sludge Draining System 9 8.1 Ambient

Temperature Limitation 27
4.1 Sludge Tank 10
8.2 Mounting 28
4.2 Sludge Piping 11
8.3 Identification 28
4.3 Bowl Casing Drain 13
8.4 Cable Types 29
4.4 Sludge Tank Ventilation 13
8.5 Power Supply 30
5 Oil System 15
8.6 Cable Routing 30
5.1 Piping 17
8.7 Short Shield Connections 31
5.2 Oil Feed Line 17
5.2.1 Pump and Suction Line 17 9 Completion and

18
Initial Start 33
5.2.2 Heater
5.2.3 Change Over Valve 18 9.1 Completion Check List 33
5.3 Oil Outlet Line 19 9.2 Initial Start up 35
5.4 More than one Oil Tank 20 9.3 After Initial Start up 37
6 Operating Water System 21 10 Shut-down and Storage 39
6.1 Operating Water 22 10.1 Storage before Installation 39
6.2 Water Tank (Not applicable 10.2 Shut-down after use 40

for LOPX 714) 22
10.3 Protection and Storage 41
6.2.1 Tank Properties 22
10.4 Reassembly and Start up 43
6.2.2 Installation 23
6.3 Installation Height 23
6.4 Water Piping 24

6.4.1 Pipes 24
6.4.2 Solenoid Valve Block, Water 24
7 Pneumatic System 25
7.1 Compressed Air 26
1810024-02
1810024-02
1 Scope
These installation instructions are valid for the

• LOPX 705
• LOPX 707
• LOPX 709
• LOPX 710
• LOPX 713
• LOPX 714
Most of the installation instructions are

specifications, which are compulsory
requirements.
These specifications are sometimes completed
with non-compulsory recommendations,
which, if followed, will improve the
installation quality.
Additional installation information, such as
drawings and component installation
instructions, can be found in the following
books of this system manual:
• "System Reference"
Contains drawings and technical data
about the system.
• "Separator Manual"
Contains installation instructions and
drawings specific for the separator in the
chapter "Technical Reference".
• "Component Descriptions"
1810024-02
1
1 Scope
LOPX Installation Instructions
Contains technical data, installation

instructions and drawings about ancillary
system equipment.
NOTE
Be sure to study all relevant

documentation supplied to become
familiar with the function and
operation of the system and each
particular unit.
NOTE
If safety instructions, installation

specifications and additional
installation information in this manual
are not strictly followed, Alfa Laval
can not be held responsible for any
2 1810024-02
2 System Layout
cQ ----r-----1
17 (18) 19
II 1111 li@J
5
(22)1.___ / (13)
{! ~
A B
A Oil feed D Com pressed air

B Cleaned and recirculated oil outlet E Sludge discharge outlet
C Operating water
() Numbers in brackets refer to units not included in the standard delivery.

Process line, flow direction
~
Strainer Removes larger solid particles from the oil.
1
0
1810024-02 3
2 System Layout LOPX Installation Instructions

2 ()
Heater Heats unprocessed oil to separation temperature.
3
{SJ
Temperature transmitter Measures the oil temperature.
4 @
Pneumatically controlled Leads the unprocessed oil to the separator or back
~
change over valve to the tank (recirculation).
5
6
zs: Separator
Water transducer
Cleans the oil by removing water and solid
particles.
Measures the changes of water content in the

7 @ separated oil.

8
0
High pressure switch Senses high pressure in the oil outlet.
9
@
10
@
11
®
Manually controlled Regulates the cleaned oil back pressure.
12
~ regulating valve

13 ~
Water tank Contains operating water. Not applicable for
14
D LOPX 714
Solenoid valve block, air Distributes compressed air to the pneumatically
~
controlled valve.
15
Solenoid valve block, water Distributes operating water, conditioning water, and
16
B displacement water to the separator.
4 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 2 System Layout

Control unit Supervises the separation system.
17
II II
Starter Starts the separator and/or the pump.
18
II II
Emergency stop button Initiates a controlled switch off sequence.
19
@]
Water line
Flexible hose, water Leads the operating water to the separator.

20 ~
Air line
Flexible hose, oil Leads the oil.

21 ~
Sludge tank Collects sludge and water from the separator.
22 I I
~
1810024-02 5
2 System Layout LOPX Installation Instructions
6 1810024-02
3 Separator
(}8) .•...· .>19

,t;:j eli' I ' c/> II; I:§J ,. .
.
.. n .- --
. v··
See the storage and installation instructions

and descriptions in "Technical Reference" and
"Dismantling/Assembly" in the
"Separator Manual".
1810024-02 7
3 Separator LOPX Installation Instructions
8 1810024-02
4 Sludge Draining System
E Sludge discharge outlet


I Sludge tank Collects sludge and water from the separator.
22 I
II __J
1810024-02 9
4 Sludge Draining System LOPX Installation Instructions
4.1 Sludge Tank

Specification
The sludge tank must meet the following

specifications (see examples):
• It must be installed directly under the
separator sludge outlet.
• The volume must be at least one cubic
metre for each connected separator.
• The tank height (A) must not be less than 3
400mm.
• The ventilation pipe and the separator 1 Sludge pipe connection
sludge pipe must be installed according to 2 Ventilation pipe
3 Sludge outlet pump connection
the instructions in "4.2 Sludge Piping" A Min. height 400 mm
and "4.4 Sludge Tank Ventilation". B Min. slope 15°
Recommendation
The sludge tank should be easy to empty and

inspect.
Consider the following recommendations (see

examples):
• The tank floor, or most of it, should have a
slope (B) of minimum 15°.
• A heating coil should be used to keep the
sludge warm and fluid while being
pumped out.
• The sludge outlet pump connection should ,--------------
>
L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
be positioned in the lowest part of the
®
tank.
4 Manhole
• A manhole should be installed for 5 Bowl casing drain connection
inspection and cleaning. 6 Water drain connection
7 High level alarm switch
• Fit the tank with a sounding pipe or a high 8 Heating coil
level alam1 switch, or both.
10 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 4 Sludge Draining System
4.2 Sludge Piping

Specification
• The sludge pipe from the separator to the
sludge tank should be vertical.
• If a vertical pipe is not possible, the
deviation (A) from the vertical line must
not exceed 30°.
Maximum deviation from vertical: 30"
• The sludge pipe must not extend below the

tank top.
NOTE
An extended sludge pipe will obstruct

ventilation and create back pressure
that could cause separator problems.
No pipe below tank top
1810024-02 11
Recom men dati on

If more than one separator is connected to the
same sludge tank, a butterfly or a flap valve
should be installed in each sludge pipe.
A. If a butterfly valve is used, it should be
equipped with an interlocking switch
(connected to the separator starter) to
prevent the separator from being started
when the valve is not fully open.
I Butterfly valve
2 Starter interlocking switch
3 Electric control line
B. If a flap valve is used, make sure that the

valve prevents back pressure when sludg·e
is discharged from another separator.
1 Flap valve
2 Maximum level
12 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 4 Sludge Draining System
4.3 Bowl Casing Drain

The bowl casing drain must be open to allow
ventilation and inspection. The water from the
bowl casing drain should be collected in a
funnel which feeds the sludge tank or a
collecting tank.
The drain pipe connected to the sludge tank

must extend close to the tank floor. This is to
avoid odours from the sludge and discharge
splash-back.
NOTE
If the bowl casing drain is not open

the sludge can splash back into the
separator bowl and cause operating
problems or damage.
1 Bowl casing drain 3 Floor level
2 Funnel 4 Sludge tank
5 Drain pipe
4.4 Sludge Tank

Ventilation
The sludge tank must be sufficiently
ventilated.
Specification
The ventilation pipes must meet the following

specifications:
• The ventilation pipe should be straight,
but if it is impossible to install a straight
pipe, the bends must not be sharp.
• The ventilation pipe must not extend
below the tank top.
• The number and minimum dimensions of
pipes depend on size and number of the
separators connected to the tank.
1810024-02 13
See table and pictures below.
Type 1 separator 2 separators 3 separators 4 separators
LOPX 705 1 x0100mm 1 x0100mm 2x0100 mm 2x0125mm
LOPX 707 1 x0100 mm 1 x0125 mm or 2x0125mm 2x0150mm

LOPX 709 2 x0100 mm
LOPX 710
LOPX 713/714 1 x0150 mm 1 x 0175 mm 2 x 0150 mm 2x0175mm
• If two ventilation pipes are required,

install one at each end of the sludge tank.
• A sludge tank with partition walls must

have ventilation pipes in all
compartments.
14 1810024-02
5 Oil System
(13)
{f ··.······v
A B
A Oil feed
B Cleaned and recirculated oil outlet

Process line, flow direction
~
Strainer Removes larger solid particles from the oil.
1
0
1810024-02 15
5 Oil System LOPX Installation Instructions

2
0
Heater Heats unprocessed oil to separation temperature.
3
Q
Temperature transmitter Measures the oil temperature.
4
®
5
; Pneumatically controlled
change over valve
Water transducer
Leads the unprocessed oil to the separator or back
to the tank (recirculation).
Measures the changes of water content in the

7 @- separated oil.

8
0
High pressure switch Senses high pressure in the oil outlet.
9
@
10
@
11
C0
Manually controlled Regulates the cleaned oil back pressure.
12
~ regulating valve

13
~
Flexible hose, oil Leads the oil.
21 ~
16 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 5 Oil System
5.1 Piping
Specification
The correct pipe size must be used in the oil
system:
• Connection DN 25 for LOPX 705.
• Connection DN 40 for LOPX 707- 714.
The number of bends in the oil pipes must be

minimized.
5.2 Oil Feed Line

5
5.2.1 Pump and Suction line
4
Specification
3
To ensure optimum performance, consider the
following rules:
• The suction height must be as low as
possible.
• If the oil feed pump is positioned above 1
the oil tank, a foot valve must be installed
1 Tank floor 5 Heater
close to the tank floor. 2 Foot valve 6 Temperature transmitter
3 Strainer 7 Change over valve
• The oil feed pump must be a constant flow 4 Oil feed pump
pump.
• The pump must be positioned close to the
oil tank.
......... ....
• A strainer must be fitted in the suction line ·.··.·~

• • • • • •• • • "1.5- 2mm
to protect the pump from coarse particles. ·.·.·.·.·.t------
• • •• • • •• • •
The diameter of the holes in the strainer • • • • • • •• • •
must be 1.5 - 2.0 mm. • •• •• •• •• •
• • • • •
• •• • •• • •• • •• • ••
• The strainer free flow area must be at least • • • • •
35% of total filter area. • •• • •• • •• • •• • ••
• • • • •
• •• • •• • •• • •• • •
• • • •
1810024-02 17
5.2.2 Heater
The heater must be installed close to the
separator to maintain correct feed oil
temperature. A temperature sensor must be
installed between the heater and the change
over valve.
5.2.3 Change Over Valve

The change over valve must be installed just
before the separator to allow oil recirculation.
The recirculation line should be connected

either directly to the oil tank or to the oil outlet
line from the separator.
18 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 5 Oil System
5.3 Oil Outlet Line

Specification
The oil outlet line from the separator must be

connected to the lubricating oil tank.
Components in the outlet line:

• water transducer N .B must be installed in
a vertical position.
• flow indicator
• high pressure switch
• low pressure switch
• pressure gauge
• regulating valve
• non-return valve.
Separator 6 Pressure gauge
For further information, see "Component 2 Water transducer 7 Regulating valve
Descriptions". 3 Flow indicator 8 Non-return valve
4 Pressure switch, high 9 Oil tank
All units should be easily accessible. The flow 5 Pressure switch. low
indicator and the pressure gauge must be
visible simultaneously for adjusting the back
pressure.
The water transducer must be installed not

more than 2 metres from the separator. It must
be installed vertically in an upstream
direction.
1 Water transducer
In order to keep the transducer filled with oil, 2 Pipe bend
it must be installed low with an upward pipe
bend between the transducer and the tank.
Recommendation
1
Install a drain valve close to the water
transducer to make it possible to drain the oil
if the transducer has to be removed.
1 Water transducer
2 Drain valve
1810024-02 19
5.4 More than one Oil Tank

sD
Recom men dati on
When one separator serves more than one oil
tank, both the suction and the outlet lines
should be fitted with change over valves. To /
/
avoid oil transfer from one tank to another,
," 3
these valves must be inter-linked. /
A Unprocessed oil 1 Change over valve

B Separated oil 2 Change over valve
3 Inter-link
20 1810024-02
6 Operating Water System
·v·
:, . '.:·.. n·
..
C Operating water

Water line
Solenoid valve block, water Distributes operating water, conditioning water, and
16
0 displacement water to the separator.
Water tank Contains operating water. Not applicable for

14
D Flexible hose, water
LOPX 714
Leads the operating water.

20 ~
1810024-02 21
6 Operating Water System LOPX Installation Instructions
6.1 Operating Water

For water quality, including temperature and
pressure, see "System Reference".
6.2 Water Tank (Not 2

applicable for
LOPX 714) q
/ '\ ' ~~..,
p======-=<...../J,
'- / If
- I
I I
./
6.2.1 Tank Properties
Specification 5
The operating water tank must meet the
following specification:
• Manufactured of stainless steel or other
non-corrosive material.
• The water volume in the tank must be at 4
least 20 litres.
1 Water supply line inlet 5 Sight glass

Recommendation
2 Float valve 6 Bracket
3 Overflow and ventilation
The tank should be fitted with: 4 Water outlet shut-off valve
• a float valve in the water inlet
• a sight glass for level indication
• a shut-off valve
• an overflow
• ventilation.
NOTE
Operating water shortage may result

in sludge discharge failure and cause
separation problems.
22 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 6 Operating Water System
6.2.2 Installation
Specification
~ ---------1
The tank installation must meet the following I.~~
~t------- T-----
specification: \V I
• The tank must be installed close to the

i
separator(s). The maximum permitted
I B
distance between the separator and the I
2
--"w'n
1
tank is 15 metres fore and aft (A) and

3 metres athwart-ship (B). j__ \\f~!
• The operating water tank can be connected
to maximum three separators.
A I
• Plan the installation in order to avoid air
pockets in the pipes. 1 Water tank A Fore and aft
2 Separator B Athwart-ship
6.3 Installation Height

Specification ,,,,,,,,[9(] .
The height between tank water top level and
the separator operating water inlets must be at
least 2.2 and not more than 3.2 meLres (A).
(Not applicable for LOPX 714)
A
The height between the solenoid valve block
and the separator operating water inlets must
be not more than 0.5 metre (B).
1810024-02 23
6 Operating Water System LOPX Installation Instructions
6.4 Water Piping
6.4.1 Pipes
Specification
The pipe installation must meet the following

specification:
• The pipes must be at least 3/4" and of
non-corrosive material.
• The pipe between the tank main outlet and
the solenoid valve block (static (low)
4---qJ Q--4
pressure line) should, if possible, be short
and straight.
. .·.·8·
The number of pipe bends must be
minimized to avoid air pockets and
prevent unnecessary pressure drop. / '
• If the water tank is supplying more than
one separator, the pipe size must be at
least 1" instead of 3/4" (Not applicable for
LOPX 714). -
Recommendation 1 High pressure water line 4 Strainers

2 Low pressure water line 5 Water tank
• The pipe between the water supply line 3 Shut-off valves (Not LOPX 71 4)
high pressure line) and the solenoid valve
block should be short and straight.
• A shut-off valve should be installed close
to the solenoid valve block.
.______~_1 ~-2 -~ 1
_" \_······3
1 Solenoid valve block

2 Shut-off valve
6.4.2 Solenoid Valve Block, Water 3 High pressure water pipe
See the '"Component Descriptions".
24 1810024-02
7 Pneumatic System
.·· ··:::'\.;.;:·.: :-·:--::

;:. =:-:::.-:·::: ... <_:::;:·.:- :_=:
... .·.-. =:::
······'f\'!J>······
D
rs.·
D Compressed air

Solenoid valve block, air Distributes compressed air to the pneumatically
~
controlled valve.
15
1810024-02 25
7 Pneumatic System LOPX Installation Instructions
7.1 Compressed Air

The compressed air must meet the quality and
pressure specified in the "System Reference".
7.2 Air Piping
7.2.1 Pipes
Specification
The pipe installation must meet the following

specification:
• The inner diameter of the air pipes must be
not less than 4 mm.
• The material must be copper or stainless 4mm
steel. 6mm
7.2.2 Solenoid Valve Block, Air

See the ""Component Descriptions".
1810024-02
26
8 Electrical System
8.1 Ambient Temperature

Limitation
Specification
Leading classification societies state in their
regulations for engine-room equipment that
the maximum ambient temperature
permissible is +55 °C.
Do not locate electric and electronic

components close to heat-generating
equipment
It is essential that electrical and electronic

components have good ventilation to keep the
temperature below +55 °C.
1810024-02
27
8 Electrical System LOPX Installation Instructions
8.2 Mounting
Recommendation
The cabinet is wall-mounted. For hole
dimensions, see dimensioned drawing.
• Do not install electrical or electronic
equipment where it can be damaged by
leaking liquids.
• Connect the earth cable between the wall
and the cabinet.
8.3 Identification
Recommendation
Mark all cables clearly to simplify
identification and fault finding.
28 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 8 Electrical System
8.4 Cable Types
Specification
Follow the instructions given in the cable list.
Examples of cable types that can be used.

• Steel armoured cable.
• Copper armoured cable with a separate

earth core.
• Steel armoured and shielded signal cable;

pair twisted or parallel.
• Shielded signal cable; pair twisted or

parallel.
I
i
f I i
~ u
r I
1810024-02 29
8.5 Power Supply

Ao~
>
>
~
~
48V
Recommendation :,...
So-called full transformers (with separate

windings) are recommended to avoid the risk
of damage to e.g. noise suppression
tr
components in electronic units.
l 148V
~------------------------------~~
Il i
A Primary phase
8.6 Cable Routing
Recommendation
Power cables carry the power supply to
motors, heaters, etc.
Any distance between signal and power cables A B

reduces electrical noise transfer.
t®®\ (@®\
Examples of recommended routing of various ~ ~
cable types.
A Power Cables
• Power cables and signal cables routed on a B Signal Cables
cable rack should be separated.

• If the space is limited, cables can be
routed in tubes.
30 181 0024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 8 Electrical System
8.7 Short Shield

Connections
Specification
The shields should always be connected as
shown in the installation drawings.
When making the connection to earth, it is

important that the length of the separated
shield is kept as short as possible to prevent
transmission of noise to the electronic
circuitry.
Cable gland with integrated earth connection of the

shield.
1810024-02 31
32 1810024-02
9 Completion and Initial Start
9.1 Completion Check List

It is essential before starting up the separator
system that all units are in good operating
condition and that all pipelines and control
equipment are properly connected to assure
correct operation.
Use this check list as a guide for completing

the system installation:
1. Compare the system with the installation
drawings.
If modifications of the recornmended
layout have been made, study them
thoroughly to make sure that the principle
of the process flow has not been altered. If
in doubt, consult Alfa Laval for approval.
2. Check that transport seals are removed
from all pipes.
3. Check that all pipes are flushed clean and
pressure tested.
4. Check that the separator corresponds with
the power frequency (50Hz/60Hz).
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
Running the separator at overspeed

due to wrong frequency will reduce
the safety margin considerably.
1810024-02 33
9 Completion and Initial Start LOPX Installation Instructions
NOTE
If the separator has been operated at

overspeed, it could be severely
damaged.
Contact Alfa Laval before restarting.
5. Check that the mains power supply is

correct.
6. Make sure that the machines are lubricated
in accordance with the instructions.
Separators are delivered without oil in the
oil sump. For information about oil filling
and oil type, see the "Separator Manual"
or the "Operating Instructions".
NOTE

Neglecting an oil change will result in

damage to separator bearings.
7. Poweron.
8. Verify the direction of rotation of the bowl
by doing a quick start/stop (5-1 0
seconds). The revolution counter must
rotate clockwise.
34 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 9 Completion and Initial Start
9. It is very important that the direction of

rotation during operation is correct.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
If the separator rotates in reverse vital

10. Start the motor again and let the separator

run for about 30 seconds and then stop the
motor.
Check for unusual sounds, obstructions,
and misalignment by listening very
carefully to the bowl rotation until it
comes to a complete standstill.
11. Check the pump function and direction.
9.2 Initial Start up

Use this check list for initial system start up:
1. Check that there is oil in the feed oil tank.
2. Check water and air supply.
3. Check power supply to the control unit
and that the voltage is in accordance with
data in "Component Descriptions".
DANGER
Disi nteg ration
hazard
Running the separator at overspeed

due to wrong frequency may cause
disintegration.
1810024-02
35
4. Check all parameter settings in the contra]

unit. See "Installation Parameters" in the
"Parameter List".
5. Run the control unit test program. See
"Alarms and Fault Finding".
6. Start the separator system as described in
"Operating Instructions".
Start up step by step, checking that the
machine and units function proper1y.
7. Establish system pressures.
Preparations before adjustment:
• Carry out a sludge discharge.
• Set parameter I 0 = 0 (clarifier mode).
• Close the isolating valves for both
pressure switches, PS41 and PS42 (to
avoid pressure alarms during
adjustment).
NOTE
The following is a guideline only.
• To establish the lowest back-pressure

level (delivery head) in the system
during operation, open the back-
pressure regulating valve RV 4 fully.
Read and note the pressure = P min
• To establish the highest back-pressure
level in the system during operation,
close the back -pressure regulating
valve RV4 slowly until the back-
pressure ceases to increase. Read and
note the back-pressure= Pmax
36 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 9 Completion and Initial Start
• Calculate the normal back-pressure

level during operation = P nonnal
Pmin + Pmax
- - - - - = P normal
2
• Calculate the value for low pressure

switch PS42 setpoint = Plow press.
p min + p normal
- - - - - =plow press.
2
• Calculate the value for high pressure

switch PS41 setpoint Phigh press.
p normal + p max
- - - - - = phigh press.
2
• Adjust the normal back-pressure to the

p normal value.
Reset the system:
-Set parameter 10 = 1 (ALCAP mode).
- Open the isolating valves for both
switches, PS41 and PS42.
• Adjust the low pressure switch PS42 to
open at pressure decreasing below the
Plow press. value.
• Adjust the high pressure switch PS41 to
open at pressure increasing above
Phigh press. value.
9.3 After Initial Start up

A 200 hour operating service must be
undertaken. See "Operating Check List" in the
"Operating Instructions".
1810024-02
37
1810024-02
38
10 Shut-down and Storage
10.1 Storage before

Installation
If the equipment is stored before installation,
these safeguards must be performed:
Storage period < 6 months > 6 months

See description in
Action Separator Ancillaries Separator Ancillaries
Protect from dust, this chapter.

dirt, water, etc. X X X X "Storage and installation"
in "Technical reference"
in "Separator Manual".
Protect with anti-rust this chapter.
oil X X "Before shutdowns"
in "Common maintenance
instructions"
in "Separator Manual".
Intermediate Service X X "Service instructions"
(IS) after storage in "Separator Manual":
Major Service (MS) X "Service instructions"
after storage in "Separator Manual":
1810024-02 39
10 Shut-down and Storage LOPX Installation Instructions
10.2 Shut-down after use

If the separation system is going to be shut-
down for a period of time these safeguards
must be performed:
Shut-down period < 3 months 3-12 months > 12 months

(stand-by} See description in
Action Separat. Ancillar. Separat. Ancillar. Separat. Ancillar.
Remove bowl X X X "Dismantling/Assembly"

in "Separator Manual":
Protect from dust, this chapter.

dirt, water, etc. X X X X X X
Protect with anti- this chapter.

rust oil X X X X "Before shutdowns"
in "Common maintenance
instructions" in
"Separator Manual".
Intermediate Serv- "Service instructions"

ice (IS) before start X X in "Separator Manual":
up
Major Service (MS) "Service instructions"
before start up X in "Separator Manual":
40 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 10 Shut-down and Storage
10.3 Protection and Storage

All system equipment, both the separator and
the ancillary equipment, must be stored
indoors at 5 - 55°C, if not delivered in water-
resistant box for outdoor storage.
If there is a risk for condensation of water, the

equipment must be protected by ventilation
and heating above dew point.
The following protection products are

recommended:
• Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 112 or equivalent)
with long lasting effective treatment for
external surfaces. The oil should prevent
corrosion attacks and give a waxy surface.
• Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent)
thin and lubricating for inside protection.
It gives a lubricating transparent oil film.
• Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the
anti-rust oil after the shut-down.
If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the

equipment must be inspected every 6 months
and, if necessary, the protection be renewed.
Separator
The separator must be dismantled and

protected. See the "'Service Instructions" in
the "Separator Manual".
Electrical Equipment
See the "Component Descriptions".
Solenoid Valve Block, Water
See the "Component Descriptions".
1810024-02
41
Valves, Pipes and Similar Equipment

• Components like valves need to be
cleaned with solvent and treated with
anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Water pipes should be drained and treated

with anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Articles made of rubber or plastics
(e.g. seals) must not be treated with
anti-rust oil.
Electric Heater
• Fill the heater with a non-corrosive
lubricating oil.
• Place a number of bags of silica gel inside
the connection box to absorb humidity.
Steam Heater
• Drain the condensed water from the steam
valve and the steam trap.
• Drain all condensed water from the heater.
• Fill the oil part of the heater with a

non-corrosive lubricating oil.
Pump
• Clean the pump housing outside from oil
and grease with solvent.
• Protect the pump by filling it with non-
corrosive lubricating oil.
• Apply anti-rust oil on the pump housing
outside.
Rubber Parts
• Gaskets, 0-rings and other rubber parts
should not be stored for more than two
years. After this time, they should be
replaced.
42 181 0024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 10 Shut-down and Storage
10.4 Reassembly and

Start up
• Clean away the anti-rust oil with white
spirit.
• Remove the silica gel bags from all units.
• Follow all relevant instructions in the
"Separator Manual", the "Installation
Instructions" and the "Component
Descriptions" respectively.
• Before operating the heater:
• Check by lifting the safety valve handle
that it functions correctly.
• Follow the start-up check list for the
heater in the manufacturer's
instructions.
• For plate heat exchangers: check the
bolt connections to ensure that all
gaskets are tight.
1810024-02 43
44 1810024-02
8
ALFA LAVAL TUMBA AB
LOPX 705SFD-30
Separator Manual
Product No. 881149-02-02

Book No. 1270717-02 V1 Alfa Laval
A l F A l A V A l S EPA RAT I 0 N
LOPX 705SFD-30
Separator Manual
Product No. 881149-02-02

Book No. 1270717-02 V1 r.~ Alfa Laval
Alta Laval Separation AB
Separator Manuals, dept. SKL
S-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 53 06 50 00
Telefax: +46 8 53 06 50 29
Printed in Sweden, 96-06
© Alfa Laval Separation AB 1996

This publication or any part thereof may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alta Laval Separation AB.
Contents
1 Read this first 7
2 Safety Instructions 9
3 Separator Basics 15
3.1 Basic principles of separation 16
3.2 Design and function 18
3.3 Definitions 28
4 Operating Instructions 29
4.1 Operating routine 30
5 Service Instructions 35
5.1 Periodic maintenance 37
5.2 Maintenance Logs 41
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS) 47
5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS) 63
5.5 Lifting instructions 77
5.6 Cleaning 78
5.7 When changing oil 82
5.8 Vibration 86
5.9 Common maintenance directions 88
6 Dismantling/Assembly 93
6.1 Introduction 94
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS) 96
6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (IS) 101
6.4 Bowl body and
operating mechanism (IS) 109
6.5 Operating water device (IS) 116
3
6.6 Vertical driving device (MS) 122
6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS) 134
7 Trouble-tracing 145
7.1 Mechanical functions 146
7.2 Separating functions 150
7.3 Vibration switch (option) 153
8 Technical Reference 155

8.1 Technical data 156
8.2 Connection list 158
8.3 I ntertace description 160
8.4 Water quality 164
8.5 Lubricants 165
8.6 Drawings 174
8.7 Storage and installation 183
Index 193
4

serious accidents.
In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions

have been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for
situations arising from the unintended usage of the machine and its
tools.
5
1 Read this first
This manual is designed for operators and service

engineers working with the Alta Laval separator
LOPX 705SFD-30.
For information concerning the function of the
separator, see chapter "3 Separator Basics" on
page 15 and chapter "8 Technical Reference" on
page 155.
If the separator has been delivered and installed
by Alta Laval as part of a processing system, this
manual is a part of the system documentation. In
this case, study carefully all the instructions in the
system documentation.
Separator Manual and Spare Parts Catalogue
In addition to this Separator Manual a Spare
Parts Catalogue, SPC is supplied.
This Separator Manual consists of:
Safety Instructions
Pay special attention to the safety instructions for
the separator. Not following the safety instructions
can cause accidents resulting in damage to
equipment and serious injury to personnel.
Separator Basics
Read this chapter if you are not familiar with this
type of separator.
Operating Instructions
This chapter contains operating instructions for
the separator only.
7
1 Read this first
Service Instructions
This chapter gives instructions for daily checks,
cleaning; oil changes, servicing and check points.
Dismantling I Assembly
This chapter contains step-by-step instructions for
dismantling and assembly of the separator for
service and repair.
Trouble-tracing
Refer to this chapter if the separator functions
abnormally.
If the separator has been installed as part of a
processing system always refer to the Trouble-
tracing part of the system documentation first.
Technical Reference
This chapter contains technical data concerning
the separator and drawings.
Index
This chapter contains an alphabetical list of
subjects, with page references.
8
_2_S_a_fe_t-=--y_ln_s_t_ru_c_t_io_n_s_ _ _ Zf\_
The centrifugal separator includes parts that
rotate at high speed. This means that:
• Kinetic energy is high
• Great forces are generated
• · Stopping time is long
Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.

Rotating parts are carefully balanced to reduce
undesired vibrations that can cause a breakdown.
Material properties have been considered
carefully during design to withstand stress and
fatigue.
The separator is designed and supplied for a
specific separation duty (type of liquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density etc.) and must not be
used for any other purpose.
Incorrect operation and maintenance can result in
· unbalance due to build-up of sediment, reduction
of material strength, etc., that subsequently could
lead to serious damage and/or injury.
The following basic safety instructions therefore
apply:
• Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval.
• Strictly follow the instructions for
installation, operation and maintenance.
• Ensure that personnel are competent and
have sufficient knowledge of maintenance
and operation, especially concerning
emergency stopping procedures.
• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts
and the special tools supplied.
9
DANGER
.6 Disintegration hazards
• Use the separator only for the purpose

rrr/h
and parameter range specified by
Alta Laval.
kPa
• "C
• If excessive vibration occurs, stop
separator and keep bowl filled with
liquid during rundown.
• When power cables are connected,

always check direction of motor rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could
unscrew.
• Check that the gear ratio is correct for

power frequency used. If incorrect,
subsequent overspeed may result in a
serious break down.
• Welding or heating of parts that rotate

can seriously affect material strength.
• Wear on the large lock ring thread must

not exceed safety limit. q>-mark on lock
ring must not pass opposite q>-mark by
more than specified distance.
• Inspect regularly for corrosion and

erosion damage. Inspect frequently if
process liquid is corrosive or erosive.
DANGER
~ Entrapment hazards
• Make sure that rotating parts have come 1111111

to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.
• To avoid accidental start, switch off and

lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work. j
• Assemble the machine completely
before start. All covers and guards must
be in place.
Electrical hazards
• Follow local regulations for electrical

installation and earthing (grounding). '
WARNING
Crush hazards
• Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.
• Do not work under a hanging load .
Noise hazards
• Use ear protection in noisy

environments.
11
CAUTION
•
Burn hazards
Lubrication oil and various machine

\\\
surfaces can be hot and cause burns.
Cut hazards
• Sharp edges on separator discs and lock

ring threads can cause cuts.
12
Warning signs in the text

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three grades
of warning signs used in the text where there is a
risk for injury to personnel.
DANGER
Type of hazard
This type of safety instruction indicates a

situation which, if not avoided, could result in
fatal injury or fatal damage to health.
WARNING
Type of hazard

disabling injury or disabling damage to
health.
CAUTION
Type of hazard

light injury or light damage to health.
NOTE
This type of instruction indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result in damage
to the equipment.
13
~~
LU
14
3 Separator Basics
Contents
3.1 Basic principles of separation 16
3.2 Design and function 18

3.2.1 Overview 18
3.2.2 Mechanical power transmission 19
3.2.3 Sensors and indicators 20
3.2.4 Process main parts 22
3.2.5 Separating function 25
3.2.6 Sludge discharge cycle 26
3.3 Definitions 28
15
3. 1 Basic principles of separation 3 Separator Basics
3.1 Basic principles of

separation
The purpose of separation can be:
.... /
• to free a liquid of solid particles,
• to separate two mutually insoluble liquids with
different densities while removing any solids
.
.
~
presents at the same time, .
• to separate and concentrate solid particles
from a liquid.
_II
Sedimentation by gravity
Separation by gravity
A liquid mixture in a stationary bowl will clear
slowly as the heavy particles in the liquid mixture
sink to the bottom under the influence of gravity.
A lighter liquid rises while a heavier liquid and
solids sink.
Continuous separation and sedimentation can be
achieved in a settling tank having outlets
arranged according to the difference in density of
the liquids.
Heavier particles in the liquid mixture will settle
and form a sediment layer on the tank bottom.
Sedimentation in a settling tank, with outlets making it
possible to separate the lighter liquid parts from the
heavier
Centrifugal separation
In a rapidly rotating bowl, the force of gravity is
replaced by centrifugal force, which can be
thousands of times greater.
Separation and sedimentation is continuous and
happens very quickly.
The centrifugal force in the separator bowl can
achieve in a few seconds what takes many hours
in a tank under influence of gravity. ¢
The centrifugal solution
16
3 Separator Basics 3. 1 Basic principles of separation
Separating temperatures
For some types of process liquids (e.g. mineral
oils) a high separating temperature will normally
increase the separation capacity. The
temperature influences oil viscosity and density
and should be kept constant throughout the
separation.
Viscosity
Low viscosity facilitates separation. Viscosity can
be reduced by heating.
High viscosity (with low temperature)
Low viscosity (with high temperature)
Density difference
The greater the density difference between the
two liquids, the easier the separation. The density
difference can be increased by heating.
High density (with low temperature)
Low density (with high temperature)
17
3.2 Design and function 3 Separator Basics
3.2 Design and function
3.2.1 Overview
The separator comprises a processing part and a
driving part. It is driven by an electric motor (9).
Mechanically, the separator machine frame is
composed of a bottom part, a top part and a
frame hood. The motor is flanged to the frame as
shown in the illustration. The frame feet (6) are
vibration damping.
The bottom part of the separator contains the
horizontal driving device (4), driving shaft with
couplings (7, 8), a worm gear (5) and a vertical
spindle (3).
The bottom part also contains an oil bath for the
worm gear, a brake and a revolution counter.
The frame top part and the frame hood contain
the processing parts of the separator, the inlet,
outlet and piping (1 ).
The liquid is cleaned in the separator bowl (2).
This is fitted on the upper part of the vertical
spindle and rotates at high speed in the space
1. Inlet and outlet device
formed by the frame top part and frame hood. The
2. Bowl
bowl also contains the discharge mechanism 3. Vertical driving device with bowl spindle
which empties the sludge from the bowl. 4. Horizontal driving device
5. Worm gear
The main inlets and outlets are shown with
6. Frame feet
connection numbers in the illustration. These
7. Friction coupling
numbers correspond with the numbers used in B. Elastic coupling
the connection list and the basic size drawing 9. Electric motor
which can be found in chapter"8 Technical
Reference" on page 155. 201. Dirty oil inlet
206. Displacement/conditioning water inlet
220. Clean oil outlet
221. Water outlet
222. Sludge discharge outlet
372. Bowl opening water inlet
376. Bowl closing and make-up water inlet
18
3 Separator Basics 3.2 Design and function
3.2.2 Mechanical power

transmission
The main parts of the power transmission
between motor and bowl are illustrated in the
1-------1
figure.
The friction coupling ensures a gentle start and
acceleration and at the same time prevents
overloading of the worm gear and motor.
The worm gear has a ratio which increase the
bowl speed several times compared with the
motor speed. For correct ratio see chapter "8.1
Technical data" on page 156.
To reduce bearing wear and the transmission of
bowl vibrations to the frame and foundation, the
top bearing of the bowl spindle is mounted in a
spring casing.
The worm wheel runs in a lubricating oil bath. The
bearings on the spindle and the worm wheel shaft
are lubricated by the oil splash produced by the
rotating worm wheel.
1. Bowl spindle
2. Top bearing and spring casing
3. Worm wheel
4. Worm
5. Friction coupling
6. Worm wheel shaft
Brake
The separator is equipped witt~ a brake to be
used when stopping the separator. The use of the
brake reduces the retardation time of the bowl
and critical speeds will therefore be quickly
passed.
The brake lining acts on the outside of the
coupling pulley.
(
Applying (1) and releasing (2) of brake
19
3.2· :·Design and function 3 Separator Basics
3.2.3 Sensors and indicators

Revolution counter (1)
A revolution counter indicates the speed of the
separator and is driven from the worm wheel
shaft. The correct speed is needed to achieve the
best separating results and for reasons of safety.
The number of revolutions on the revolution
counter for correct speed is shown in chapter "8
Technical Reference" on page 155. Refer to name
plate for speed particulars.
Oil sight glass (2)
The sight glass shows the oil level in the worm
gear housing.
Back pressure gauge (3)
Correct limits for the back pressure in the clean oil
outlet can be found in chapter "8.2 Connection
list" on page 158.
Increasing back pressure in the clean oil outlet
can be caused by:
• restriction in the outlet piping, e.g. a buckled
or bent pipe,
• increased throughput, 1. Revolution counter
• increased viscosity, decreased separating 2. Oil sight glass
temperature. 3. Back pressure gauge
4. Vibration switch (option)
Vibration switch (4, option) 5. Cover interlocking switch (option)
The vibration switch, properly adjusted, trips on a

relative increase in vibration.
The vibration switch is sensitive to vibration in a
direction perpendicular to its base. It contains a
vibration detecting mechanism that actuates a
snap-action switch when the selected level of
vibration is exceeded. After the switch has tripped
it must be reset manually by pressing the button
on the switch.
Cover interlocking switch (5, option)
When required, the cover interlocking switch Reset push button on vibration switch
should be connected to the starter equipment so
that starting of the motor is prevented when the
separator hood is not (completely) closed.
20
21
3.2 Design and function · 3 . Separator Basics
3.2.4 Process main parts
Inlet and outlet device

206.Jj.
1. Oil paring disc
2. Inlet pipe
3. Displacement/conditioning water pipe
22. Paring chamber cover
Separator Bowl
4. Disc stack
5. Large lock ring
6. Bow/body
16. Sludge space
17. Bowl hood seal ring
18. Distributing cone
19. Distributor
20. Bowl hood
21. Top disc
'-----·10
372.---~- '-------11
Discharge mechanism 376'---,.>
'-----12
7. Sliding bowl bottom
Non rotating parts are indicated by dark shade
B. Operating slide
9. Dosing ring
10. Springs and spring support
11. Distributing ring
12. Control paring disc
13. Nozzle
14. Nozzle
15. Drain valve plug
Connections
201. Dirty oil inlet
206. Displacement/conditioning water
221. Water outlet
222. Sludge discharge outlet
372. Opening water inlet
376. Closing and make-up water inlet
22
Inlet and outlet device

The inlet and outlet device consists of the
following parts:
• The inlet (201 ). This comprises the pipe bend
and the long inlet pipe (2) which extends into
the middle of the bowl.
• The outlet (220). This comprises the paring
chamber cover (22) and the oil paring disc (1)
which pumps the separated oil out of the
bowl. The oil paring disc is located in a paring
chamber above the top disc (21 ).
The inlet and outlet device is held together by the
inlet pipe threading which is fixed to the oil paring
disc. 0-rings seal the connections between the
parts.
The outlet connection housing is fastened to the
separator frame hood. Height adjusting rings
determine the height position of the oil paring disc
in the paring chamber.
Separator bowl
The separator bowl with its sludge discharge
mechanism is built-up as follows:
The bowl body (6) and bowl hood (20) are held
together by the large lock ring (5). Inside the bowl
are the distributing cone (18), the distributor (19)
and the disc stack (4). The disc stack is kept
compressed by the hood. The sliding bowl bottom
(7) forms an internal separate bottom in the bowl.
The sludge space (16) is the space between the
sliding bowl bottom and the bowl hood in the bowl
periphery. It is kept closed by the sliding bowl
bottom which seals against a seal ring (17) in the
bowl hood.
23
Sludge discharge mechanism

At intervals decided by the operator, the sliding
bowl bottom drops to empty the bowl of sludge.
The sludge discharge mechanism, which controls
the sliding bowl bottom, comprises an operating
slide (8) and an operating water device. Passive
parts are: the dosing ring (9), nozzles (13, 14) and
drain valve plugs (15). The operating water
device on the underside of the bowl supplies
opening (372) and closing/make-up (376) water
to the discharge mechanism via the control paring
disc (12).
24
3.2.5 Separating function

Dirty oil is fed into the bowl through the inlet pipe
(3) and is pumped via the distributor (5) towards
the periphery of the bowl.
When the oil reaches slots of the distributor, it will ~201
rise through the channels formed by the disc
stack (6) where it is evenly distributed.
The oil is continuously cleaned as it travels
towards the center of the bowl. When the cleaned
oil leaves the disc stack it rises upwards, flows
through slots in the top disc (4) and enters the oil
paring chamber (2). From the latter it is pumped
by the oil paring disc (1) and leaves the bowl
through outiet (220). Separated water, sludge and
solid particles, which are heavier than the oil, are
forced towards the periphery of the bowl and
collected in the sludge space (7) outside the disc
stack.
Separating principle
1. Oil paring disc

2. Oil paring chamber
3. Inlet pipe
4. Top disc
5. Distributor
6. Bowl disc stack
7. Sludge space
201. Dirty oil inlet

25
3.2.6 Sludge discharge cycle

When the sludge space is filled up and water
approaches the disc stack, some droplets of
water start to escape with the cleaned oil. The
small increase of the water content in the cleaned
oil must be sensed and initiate a sludge discharge
cycle.
The separator discharges a fixed volume of
sludge and water. The discharge volume is
approximately 100% of the space outside the disc
stack, the so-called sludge space. The contents
of the discharge can contain some emulsified oil.
Closed bowl (normal operation)

206
The sliding bowl bottom (7) is pressed upwards
by force of the closing water in the closing water
space (8) under the sliding bowl bottom which is
greater than the force of the process liquid above
the sliding bowl bottom.
The operating slide (11) is pressed upwards by
the springs (12) and the valve plugs (3) then
cover the drain channels (2).
Bowl closed (normal operation)
1. Sludge port
2. Drain channel
3. Drain valve plug
4. Nozzle*
5. Nozzle"
6. Dosing ring *
7. Sliding bowl bottom "
8. Closing water space
9. Opening chamber *
10. Closing chamber*
11. Operating slide *
12. Spring*

372. Opening water inlet*
376. Closing and make-up water inlet*
Parts effecting a sludge discharge
26
3 Separator Basics
3.2 Design and function
Bowl opens for discharge
In order to avoid oil losses at discharges, 206

displacement water can be added through inlet
J.
(206) prior to a discharge.
The opening water (372), which is supplied into

the space above the operating slide ( 11 ),
overcomes the force from the springs (12) and
1
the operating slide is pressed downwards. The 2
drain channels (2) open and the closing water 4
drains out through the nozzle (4). This allows the ~---11
force on the underside of the sliding bowl bottom
(7) to become lower than the force on the upper 2 "
side. The sliding bowl bottom moves downwards ~
L---------------------------------~0
and the bowl opens for a discharge through the Bowl opens for discharge
sludge ports (1 ).
Bowl closes after discharge

After some hundreds of a second the opening
chamber (9) above the operating slide (11) has
been filled by water leaving the closing water
space (8). This water overflows through channels
in the operating slide down to the closing
chamber (1 0) between the operating slide and
dosing ring (6). When also this chamber has been
filled, the hydraulic forces directed up- and
downwards on the operating slide are equal and
the springs (12) move the operating slide
upwards.
Bowl closes after discharge
The drain channels (2) are closed by the drain
valve plugs (3) and the increasing force from the
closing water (376) presses the sliding bowl
bottom (7) upwards. The bowl closes and the
sludge discharge cycle is complete.
Bowl closing water is supplied during the sludge
discharge sequence and at intervals during the
separation sequence to replace evaporated
water.
Closing and opening water are supplied from the
high pressure water system.
27
3.3 Definitions 3 Separator Basics
3.3 Definitions
Back pressure Pressure in the separator outlet.
Clarification Liquid/solids separation with the intention of separating particles, normally
solids, from a liquid (oil) having a lower density than the particles.
Counter pressure See Back pressure.
Density Mass per volume unit. Expressed in kg/m 3 at a specified temperature,
normally at +15 oc.
Gravity disc Disc in the bowl hood for positioning the interface between the disc stack and
the outer edge of the top disc. This disc is only used in purifier mode.
Interface Boundary layer between the heavy phase (water) and the light phase {oil) in a
separator bowl.
Intermediate Service Overhaul of separator bowl, inlet/outlet and operating water device. Renewal
(IS) of seals in bowl inlet/outlet and operating water device.
Major Service (MS) Overhaul of the complete separator, including bottom part (and activities
included in an Intermediate Service, if any). Renewal of seals and bearings in
bottom part.
Sediment (sludge) Solids separated from a liquid.
Sludge discharge Ejection of sludge from the separator bowl.
Throughput The feed of process liquid to the separator per time unit.
Expressed in m3/h or lit/h.
Viscosity Fluid resistance against movement. Normally expressed in centistoke
(eSt= mm2/s), at a specified temperature.
28
4 Operating Instructions
Contents
4.1 Operating routine 30

4.1.1 Ready for start 30
4.1.2 Start 31
4.1.3 Running 33
4.1.4 Normal stop 33
4.1.5 Safety stop 34
29
4. 1 Operating routine 4 Operating Instructions
4.1 Operating routine

These operating instructions describe routine
procedures to follow before and during the start,
running and stopping sequences of the separator.
If there is a System Manual, always follow the
operating instructions of the System Manual. If
there is no System Manual the instructions below
are to be followed.
4.1.1 Ready for start

To achieve the best separation results the bowl
should be in a clean condition.
1. Check that the hinged bolts for the frame
hood are fully tightened.
2. Check that all inlet and outlet connections
have been correctly made and properly
tightened.
CAUTION 6
~------------------------------~
II
Check tor leakages (not admitted)
Burn hazards
Make sure that hose connections and flange

couplings are properly assembled and
tightened.
Escaping hot liquid can cause burns.
3. Check that the oil level is slightly above the

middle of the sight glass.
NOTE
During running the oil level should be barely
visible in the lower part of the sight glass.
Too much or too little oil can damage the
separator bearings. Check the oil level
Fill if necessary. See chapter "8.5 Lubricants"

on page 165, for a list of recommended oils.
30
4 Operating Instructions 4. 1 Operating routine
4. Make sure that the brake is released.
Release the brake
4.1.2 Start
1. Start the separator.
2. Check the direction of rotation of the bowl.
The revolution counter should turn clockwise.
DANGER
Disintegration hazards
When power cables have been connected,

always check direction of rotation. If Check for correct direction of rotation
incorrect, vital rotating parts could unscrew.
31
4. 1 Operating routine 4 Operating Instructions
3. Check the separator for vibration. Some

vibration can occur for short periods during
the starting cycle, when the separator passes
through its critical speeds. This is normal and
passes without danger. Try to learn the
vibration characteristics of the critical speed
pattern.
DANGER
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator

and keep bowl filled with liquid during
rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be identified Check for vibration
and rectified before the separator is
restarted. Excessive vibration may be due to
incorrect assembly or insufficient cleaning of
the bowl.
In the trouble-tracing chapter "7 .1.1 Separator

vibrates" on page 146, a number of causes are
described that can create vibration.
4. Check, if possible, the current consumption of
the motor starter to ensure that the separator
has reached full speed.
At full speed the starter ammeter reading has
decreased from a high starting value to a low
steady value; the idling value (slightly lower
than the normal operating value).
The time to reach full speed may not exceed Current increases when the coupling engages...
the limit given in chapter "8 Technical
Reference" on page 155.
When running normally, open the closing water
valve (connection 376) for approximately 5
seconds to close the bowl.
... to decrease to a stable value when full speed has

been reached
32
4 Operating Instructions 4. 1 Operating routine
4.1.3 Running
1. Check that the feed has the correct flow and
temperature. See chapter "8 Technical
Reference" on page 155 for correct values.
2. Adjust the oil outlet pressure to 1,5 bar.
3. Discharge by opening the valve for opening
water valve (connection 372) until a
discharge is heard. For max. and min. time
for discharge intervals, see chapter "8
Technical Reference" on page 155.
DANGER
Ensure that correct discharge intervals and

cleaning procedures are used.
Unbalance due to improper washing out of
solids may lead to contact between rotating
and non-rotating parts.
4. For daily condition checks, see "5.2.1 Daily

checks" on page 41.
4.1.4 Normal stop

1. Carry out a sludge discharge before stopping
the separator. Otherwise the bowl must be
cleaned manually before the next start up.
The volume of the discharged sludge must be
compensated for by additional feed.
2. After discharge, turn off the feed and stop the
separator with the bowl filled with liquid.
3. Apply the brake.
The final action, apply the brake
33
4. 1 ·Operating routine 4 Operating Instructions
DANGER
Entrapment hazards
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a

complete standstill before starting any ·
dismantling work. The revolution counter and
the motor fan indicate if the separator parts
are rotating or not. The separator must not be dismantled before
standstill
4.1.5 Safety stop

1. If the separator begins to vibrate excessively
during operation, stop it immediately by
pushing the safety stop. The separator motor
is switched off.
Keep the bowl filled during the run-down to
minimize the excessive vibration.
2. Evacuate the room. The separator may be "'a.
hazardous when passing its critical speeds L---------------------------------~
Push the safety stop if excessive vibration
I*
during the run-down.
DANGER
Do not discharge a vibrating separator.

Out-of-balance vibration can become worse
if only part of the sediment is discharged.
CAUTION
After a safety stop the cause of the fault must

be identified.
If all parts have been checked and the cause
remains unclear, contact Alta Laval for
advice.
34
5 Service Instructions
Contents
5.1 Periodic maintenance 37 5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS)63

5.1.1 Introduction 37 5.4.1 Bowl hood seal ring 63
5.1.2 Maintenance intervals 37 5.4.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl body nave
5.1.3 Maintenance procedure 39 63
5.1.4 Service kits 40 5.4.3 Bowl spindle; radial wobble 63
5.4.4 Brake 64
5.2 Maintenance Logs 41 5.4.5 Buffer springs and ball bearing housing
65
5.2.1 Daily checks 41
5.4.6 Coupling friction pads 66
5.2.2 Oil change 41
5.4.7 Corrosion 67
5.2.3 Intermediate Service (IS) 42
5.4.8 Cracks 67
5.2.4 Major Service (MS) 44
5.4.9 Disc stack pressure 67
5.2.5 3-year Service (3S) 46
5.4.10 Dosing ring 67
5.4.11 Erosion 67
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service 5.4.12 Flexible plate in coupling 68
(IS) 47
5.4.13 Guide surfaces 70
5.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring 47
5.4.14 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc 70
5.3.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl body nave
48 5.4.15 Lock ring; priming 71
5.3.3 Corrosion 5.4.16 Lock ring; wear and damage 73
48
5.3.4 Cracks 5.4.17 Oil paring disc; height position 73
51
5.3.5 Disc stack pressure 5.4.18 Operating mechanism 73
52
5.3.6 Dosing ring 5.4.19 Operating paring disc; height position74
53
5.3.7 Erosion 53 5.4.20 Operating slide 75
5.3.8 Guide surfaces 5.4.21 Sliding bowl bottom 75
55
5.3.9 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc 5.4.22 Springs for operating mechanism 75
57
5.3.10 Lock ring; wear and damage 58 5.4.23 Worm wheel and worm; wear of teeth75
5.3.11 Operating mechanism 5.4.24 Cover interlocking switch (option) 76
60
5.3.12 Operating slide 5.4.25 Vibration switch (option) 76
60
5.3.13 Sliding bowl bottom 61
5.3.14 Springs for operating mechanism 62 5.5 Lifting instructions 77
5.3.15 Worm wheel and worm; wear of teeth62
5.3.16 Cover interlocking switch {option) 62 5.6 Cleaning 78
5.3.17 Vibration switch (option) 62 5.6.1 External cleaning 78
5.6.2 Cleaning agents 78
5.6.3 Cleaning of bowl discs 80
35
5.6.4 CIP-system 81
5.7 When changing oil 82

5.7.1 Worm wheel and worm; wear of teeth82
5.7.2 Oil change procedure 85
5.8 Vibration 86
5.8.1 Vibration analysis 86
5.8.2 Vibration switch (option) 87
5.9 Common maintenance directions 88

5.9.1 Ball and roller bearings 88
5.9.2 Before shutdowns 91
36
5 SetVice Instructions 5. 1 Periodic maintenance
5.1 Periodic maintenance
5.1.1 Introduction
Periodic (preventive) maintenance reduces the
risk of unexpected stoppages and breakdowns.
Follow the maintenance logs on the following
pages in order to facilitate the periodic
maintenance.
DANGER
Separator parts that are either worn beyond

their safe limits or incorrectly assembled may
cause severe damage or fatal injury.
5.1.2 Maintenance intervals

The following directions for periodic maintenance
give a brief description of which parts to be
cleaned, checked and renewed at different
maintenance intervals.
The maintenance logs for each maintenance
interval later in this chapter give detailed
enumeration of the check points that must be
done.
Daily checks consist of minor check points to
carry out for detecting abnormal operating
conditions.
Oil change
The oil change interval is every 1000-1500 hours
or at least once every year if the total number of
operating hours is less than 1000-1500 hours.
When using a group D oil, time of operation
between oil changes can be extended from the
normal1000-1500 hours to 2000 hours.
37
5. 1 Periodic maintenance 5 Service Instructions
Intermediate Service (IS)

Intermediate Service consists of an overhaul of
the separator bowl, inlet/outlet and operating
device every 3 months or 2000 operating
hours. Seals in bowl and gaskets in inlet/outlet
device are renewed.
Major Service (MS)

Major Service consists of an overhaul of the
complete separator and includes an Intermediate
Service every 12 months or 8000 operating
hours. Seals and bearings in the bottom part are
renewed.
3-year Service (3S)

3-year Service consists of renewing the frame
feet. The feet get harder with increased use and
age.
Periodic maintenance schedule

Oil change caa
Intermediate Service = IS
Major Service = MS
3-year Service= 3S
...
3S
MS MS MS
IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
'
II• • • • • • • •......• • • • • • • • •ul• ••r······•
CIA•
1.·• .·.· ·. I I ,
I I I····
3rd year
Installation 1st year 2nd year
38
5 Service Instructions 5. 1 Periodic maintenance
5.1.3 Maintenance procedure

At each Intermediate and Major Service, take a
copy of the maintenance log and use it for
notations during the service.
An Intermediate and Major Service should be
carried out in the following manner:
1. Dismantle the parts as mentioned in the
maintenance log and described in chapter "6
Dismantling/Assembly" on page 93.
Place the separator parts on clean, soft
surfaces such as pallets.
2. Inspect and clean the dismantled separator
parts according to the maintenance log.
3. Fit all the parts delivered in the service kits
while assembling the separator as described
in chapter "6 Dismantling/Assembly" on page
93. The assembly instructions have
references to check points which should be
carried out before and during the assembly.
39
5. 1 Periodic maintenance 5 Service Instructions
5.1.4 Service kits

Special service kits are available for Intermediate
Service (IS), Major Service (MS) and 3-year
Service (3S).
For other services the spare parts have to be
ordered separately.
Note that the parts for IS are not included in the
MS kit and parts for IS & MS are not included in
the 3S kit. Kits are available for Intermediate Service, Major
Service and 3-year Service
The contents of the service kits are described in
the Spare Parts Catalogue.
NOTE
Always use Alfa Laval genuine parts as
otherwise the warranty will become invalid.
Alta Laval takes no responsibility for the safe
operation of the equipment if non-genuine
spare parts are used.
DANGER
Use of imitation parts may cause severe

damage.
40
5 Service Instructions 5.2 Maintenance Logs
5.2 Maintenance Logs
5.2.1 Daily checks

The following steps should be carried out daily.
Main component and activity Part Page Notes

Inlet and outlet
Check for leakage Connecting housing -
Separator bowl
Check for vibration and noise 86
Horizontal driving device
Worm wheel shaft and gear casing
Check for vibration and noise 86
Check Oil level in gear housing 30
Electrical motor
1)
Check for heat, vibration and noise
1l See manufacturer's instruction
5.2.2 Oil change

The oil change and check of worm gear should be carried out every 1000-1500al hours of operation.
Note! In a new installation, or after replacement of gear, change the oil after 200 operating hours and
clean the gear housing.

Worm wheel shaft and gear housing
Check Worm wheel and worm 82
Renew Oilbl in gear housing 85
When the separator is running for short periods, the lubricating oil must be changed every 12 months even if the
total number of operating hours is less than 100G-1500 hours (2000 h).
a)
When using a group D oil, time of operation between oil changes can be extended from the normal 1000-
1500 hours to 2000 hours.
b)
See chapter "8.5 Lubricants" on page 165 for further information.
41
5.2 Maintenance Logs 5 Service Instructions
5.2.3 Intermediate Service (IS)

Name of plant: Local identification:
Separator: LOPX 705SFD-30 Manufacture No.!Year:
Total running hours: Product No: 881149-02-02
Date: Signature:

Inlet and outlet
Clean and inspect Threads of inlet pipe 57
Connecting housing -
Separator bowl
Clean and check Lock ring 58
Bowl hood 47
Top disc -
Oil paring disc 57
Bowl discs 80
Distributor -
Distributing cone -
Sliding bowl bottom 61
Bowl body -
Bowl spindle cone and bowl 48
body nave
Operating mechanism 53, 60,
62
Check Corrosion 48
Cracks 51
Erosion 53
Galling of guide surface 56
Disc stack pressure 52
Operating device
Clean and check Operating paring disc -
42

Renew Oil in gear housing 85
Electrical motor
Lubrication (if nipples are fitted) See sign on motor -
Signs and labels on separator
Check attachment and legibility Safety label on hood 180
Direction of rotation arrow 180
Power supply frequency 180
Monitoring equipment (option)
Function check Vibration switch 62
Cover interlocking switch 62
Note! Renew all parts included in the Intermediate

Service kit (IS).
43
5.2 Maintenance Logs 5 Service Instructions
5.2.4 Major Service (MS)

Nanie of plant: Local identification:
Separator: LOPX 705SFD-30 Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours: Product No: 881149-02-02
Date: Signature:

Inlet and outlet
Clean and inspect Threads of inlet pipe 57
Connecting housing -
Separator bowl
Clean and check Lock ring 71,58
Bowl hood 47
Top disc -
Oil paring disc 57
Bowl discs 80
Distributor -
Distributing cone -
Sliding bowl bottom 61
Bowl body -
Bowl spindle cone and bowl 48
body nave
Operating mechanism 53, 60,
62
Check Corrosion 48
Cracks 51
Erosion 56
Galling of guide surface 56
Disc stack pressure 52
Height position of oil paring 73
disc
44

Operating device
Clean and check Operating paring disc -
Check Height position of operating 73
paring disc
Vertical driving device
Clean and check Bowl spindle -
Buffer springs and ball bearing 65
housing
Radial wobble of bowl spindle 63
Renew Spindle bearings 122
Axial play of flexible plate 68
Renew Bearings 134
Oil in gear housing 85
Brake
Clean and check Spring and brake shoe 64
Renew Friction pad 64
Friction coupling
Clean and check Worm wheel coupling -
Renew Friction pads 66
Electrical motor
Lubrication (if nipples are fitted) See sign on motor -
Signs and labels on separator
Check attachment and legibility Safety label on hood 180
Direction of rotation arrow 180
Power supply frequency 180
Monitoring equipment (option)
Function check Vibration switch 62
Note! Renew all parts included in the Intermediate
Service kit (IS) and Major Service kit (MS)
45
5.2 Maintenance· Logs 5 Service Instructions
5.2.5 3-year Service (38)

Renew the frame feet as described below. The
3-year service should be carried out in
conjunction with a Major Service (MS). The extent
of the 3-year service is the same as for a major
service plus the parts included in the 3-year
Service kit (3S).
Frame feet, renewal

1. Disconnect pipes, hoses and cables
connected to the separator.
2. Remove the nuts (3, 4).
3. Lift the separator.
NOTE
When lifting a separator it must always hang 2
securely. See separate instruction in chapter
"5.5 Lifting instructions" on page 77.
4. Renew the vibration dampers (1, 2). ·~

k---------------------------------~G
5. Lower the frame. Check that the bolts do not 1. Vibration damper, upper
press against the edges of the holes. 2. Vibration damper, lower
3. Nut
6. Tighten the nut (3) to 20 Nm. 4. Lock nut
7. Hold the nut (3) firmly and secure with the
lock nut (4).
8. Connect the previously disconnected pipes,
hoses and cables.
46•
5 Service Instructions 5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS)
5.3 Check points at

Intermediate Service
(IS)
5.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring

Poor sealing between the bowl hood seal ring and
the sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom will
cause a leakage· of process liquid from the bowl.
Renew the bowl hood seal ring at each
Intermediate Service (IS).
Max. permitted indentation of the seal ring is 1 mm
Knock out the old ring by means of a pin inserted

in the holes intended for this purpose.
Removal of the seal ring

Fit the new ring as follows:
Press the ring into the groove with a straight
wooden board placed across the ring
NOTE
If the new ring is too narrow, place it in hot
water (70-80 °C) for about 5 minutes.
If it is too wide, it will shrink after drying in
80-90 ac for about 24 hours. Fitting of the seal ring
47
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS) 5 Service Instructions
5.3.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl

body nave
Impact marks on the spindle cone or in the bowl

body nave may cause poor fit and out-of-balance
vibrations.
The bowl spindle and the nave should also be
checked if the bowl spindle has been dismantled
or if the bowl runs roughly.
Corrosion may cause the bowl to stick firmly to
the spindle cone and cause difficulties during the
next dismantling.
• Remove any impact marks with a scraper
and/or whetstone.
Rust can be removed by using a fine-grain emery
cloth (e.g. No 320).
Finish with polishing paper (e.g. No 600).
NOTE
Always use a scraper with great care. The
cone shape must not be deformed. Remove impact marks from the nave and cone
5.3.3 Corrosion
Evidence of corrosion attacks should be looked
for and rectified each time the separator is
dismantled. Main bowl parts such as the bowl
body, bowl hood and lock ring must be inspected
with particular care for corrosion damage.
DANGER
Inspect regularly for corrosion damage.

Inspect frequently if the process liquid is Main bowl parts to check for corrosion
corrosive.
48
5 SeNice Instructions 5.3 Check points at lntennediate SeNice (IS)
Always contact your Alta Laval representative if

you suspect that the largest depth of the
corrosion damage exceeds 1,0 mm or if cracks
have been found. Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and given
clearance for operation by Alta Laval.
Cracks or damage forming a line should be
considered as being particularly hazardous.
Non-stainless steel and cast iron parts

Corrosion (rusting) can occur on unprotected
surfaces of non-stainless steel and cast iron.
Frame parts can corrode when exposed to an
aggressive environment.
Stain less steel

Stainless steel parts corrode when in contact with
either chlorides or acidic solutions. Acidic
solutions causes a general corrosion. The
chloride corrosion is characterised by local --'!:}-,~-.,. I
damage such as pitting, grooves or cracks. The
risk of chloride corrosion is higher if the surface is: L----------------·~_~_~-_--_-~_._~_J._~_~---------~~
_
.• Exposed to a stationary solution. Example of chloride corrosion in stainless steel
• In a crevice.
• Covered by deposits.
• Exposed to a solution that has a low
pH value.
A corrosion damage caused by chlorides on
stainless steel begins as small dark spots that
can be difficult to detect.
49
1. Inspect closely for all types of damage by

corrosion and record these observations
carefully.
2. Polish dark-coloured spots and other
corrosion marks with a fine grain emery cloth.
This may prevent further damage.
Polish corrosion marks to prevent further damage

DANGER
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate

cracks beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger
and are totally unacceptable.
Replace the part if corrosion can be
suspected of affecting its strength or
function.
Other metal parts

Separator parts made of materials other than
steel, such as brass or other copper alloys, can
also be damaged by corrosion when exposed to
an aggressive environment. Possible corrosion
damage can be in the form of pits and/or cracks.
50
5 SeNice Instructions 5.3 Check points at Intermediate SeNice (IS)
5.3.4 Cracks
Cracks can initiate on the machine after a period
of operation and propagate with time.
• Cracks often initiate in an area exposed to
high cyclic material stresses. These are
called fatigue cracks.
• Cracks can also initiate due to corrosion in an
aggressive environment.
• Although very unlikely, cracks may also occur
due to the low temperature embrittlement of
certain materials.
The combination of an aggressive environment
and cyclic stresses will speed-up the formation of
cracks. Keeping the machine and its parts clean
and free from deposits will help to prevent
corrosion attacks.
DANGER
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous

as they reduce the strength and functional
ability of components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
It is particularly important to inspect for cracks in

rotating parts and especially the pillars between
the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
Always contact your Alta Laval representative if
you suspect that the largest depth of the damage
exceeds 1,0 mm. Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and cleared
for operation by Alta Laval.
51
5.3.5 Disc stack pressure
NOTE I
.
I
I
Ensure that the disc stack pressure is I
sufficient to maintain bowl balance.

Insufficient pressure in the disc stack can
cause vibration and reduce lifetime of ball
bearings.
The lock ring (1) should press the bowl hood (2)
firmly against the bowl body (3). The hood in turn
should exert a pressure on the disc stack (4),
clamping it in place. 1. Lock ring
2. Bowl hood
3. Bowl body
4. Disc stack
Compress the disc stack by tightening the lock

ring, see chapter "6.3.3 Assembly" on page 105.
Correct pressure is obtained when it is possible to
tighten the lock ring so far by hand that the
<j)-mark on the lock ring is positioned 60° - 90°
before the mark on the bowl body.
To achieve this, add an appropriate number of
discs to the top of the disc stack beneath the top
disc.
Then advance the lock ring by giving the spanner
handle some blows till the <)>-marks are passed
and the bowl is fully assembled. <)>-marks on bowl body and lock ring in line
If the <j)-marks do not reach or pass each other,

the reason could be an incorrectly assembled
bowl or to many discs in the disc stack.
Reassemble and check.
52
5.3.6 Dosing ring

Clean the nozzles (1) with a soft iron wire and
polish the surface (2) with steel wool.
Inspect the surface (3) in contact with the
operating slide. Remove any marks with a
whetstone or fine emery cloth (grain size 240).
1. Nozzles
2. Surface inside the dosing ring
3. Surface in contact with the operating slide
5.3.7 Erosion
Erosion can occur when particles suspended in
the process liquid slide along or strike against a
surface. Erosion can become intensified locally
by flows of higher velocity.
DANGER
Inspect regularly for erosion damage. Inspect

frequently if the process liquid is erosive.
Always contact your Alta Laval representative if Max.1 mm

the largest depth of any erosion damage exceeds
1,0 mm. Valuable information as to the nature of
the damage can be recorded using photographs,
plaster impressions or hammered-in lead.
Erosion is characterised by:
Maximum permitted erosion
• Burnished traces in the material.
• Dents and pits having a granular and shiny
surface.
Surfaces particularly subjected to erosion are:
53
1. The oil paring disc.

2. The top disc.
3. The pillars between the sludge ports in the
bowl wall.
4. The sealing edge of the bowl body for the
seal ring in the sliding bowl bottom.
5. The underside of the distributor in the vicinity
of the distribution holes and wings.
6. The surface of the sliding bowl bottom that
faces the conical part of the distributor.
7. The sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom.
Look carefully for any signs of erosion damage.

Erosion damage can deepen rapidly and
consequently weaken parts by reducing the
thickness of the metal.
DANGER
Disintegration hazard Surfaces particularly subjected to erosion
Erosion damage can weaken parts by

reducing the thickness of the metal.
Pay special attention to the pillars between
the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
Replace the part if erosion can be suspected
of affecting its strength or function.
54
5 SeNice Instructions 5.3 Check points at Intermediate SeNice (IS)
5.3.8 Guide surfaces

Check surfaces indicated (1) for burrs or galling.
Rectify when necessary.
Repair of galling on guide surfaces; see following
pages. Before fitting the sliding bowl bottom,
clean (do not degrease) the contact surfaces I
~~==~~----~~~
(1 and 2). Apply Alta Laval lubricating paste or
Molykote 1000 Paste with a well-cleaned brush
on surfaces (1 and 2).
Sliding bowl bottom
NOTE
To avoid the risk of galling, the contact
surfaces (1) should be primed with a slide
lacquer at every Major Service (MS).
The slide-lacquered surfaces will be
destroyed if the surfaces are degreased.
Bowl body
Lubricate the 0-ring and the seal ring with

silicone grease making sure they are not
damaged and lie properly in their grooves.
Operating slide
==========~2~~ -J~!
~---------------=~--------------~0
Dosing ring
~
1,2= A/fa Lava/lubricating paste or

Molykote 1000 Paste.
Spring support
55
Repair of galling on guide surfaces

Galling (friction marks) may appear on guide
surfaces in the operating system, the bowl body
and the sliding bowl bottom. Surfaces subject to
repair are indicated by an arrow.
The example below describes the repair of the
lower guide surface of the bowl body nave.
Guide surface in the bowl body

Recommended tools for correction of galling:
• Emery cloth, 240 grade.
• Hand drilling machine
• Degreasing agent.
• Fibre brush, 0 25mm.
• Fibre brush, 0 50 mm.
• Very fine single-cut file.
1. Clean the surface thoroughly with a

degreasing agent, i.e. white spirit. This is
important.
2. If the galling is excessive, first use the fine

single-cut file. The file should be used with
c )
caution so that the damage is not made

worse.
Remove the high spots on the surface. Do not
use rotating files or similar. Remove the high
spots only - not the undamaged material.
56
3. An emery cloth of 240 grade should be used

to smooth the edges and to remove any [ __ -~-~:~_-_J)
burnt-in foreign matter.
4. Finish off by polishing the damaged spot with

the fibre brushes and brush wax. It is
recommended that the whole area where
galling may occur is polished. Polishing will
help smoothen the whole of the damaged
area, even in the deepest parts.
Prime the repaired area with lubricating spray

Molykote 321 R. Read the correct procedure
under checkpoint "5.4.15 Lock ring; priming" on
page 71. Apply Alta Laval lubricating paste or
Molykote 1000 Paste to the surface after priming.
5.3.9 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc

Damage to the threads and the top surface of
level ring may cause the paring disc to scrape
against the paring chamber cover even if the
height has been adjusted correctly.
Screw the inlet pipe into the paring disc and
check that the inlet pipe turns easily.
Check the threads of the inlet pipe and oil paring disc
57
5.3.10 Lock ring; wear and damage

Excessive wear or impact marks on threads,
guide and contact surfaces of the lock ring, bowl
hood and bowl body may cause hazardous
galling.
Check the thread condition by tightening the lock
ring (1) after removing the disc stack and bowl
hood 0-ring (2) from the bowl.
DANGER
Wear on large lock ring thread must not

exceed safety limit. The <j>-mark on lock ring 1. Lock ring
must not pass opposite <j>-mark by more than 2. 0-ring for the bowl hood
the specified distance.
In a new bowl the alignment marks on the lock

ring and the bowl body are exactly opposite each
other.
If thread wear is observed, mark the bowl body at
the new position of the alignment mark on the
lock ring by punching in a new alignment mark.
If the original <jl-mark on the lock ring passes the
<jl-mark on the bowl body by more than 25°
/
(which corresponds to A=60 mm, on the LOPX _,· I
(M~/~
705SFD-30), an Alta Laval representative must
be contacted immediately.
If the marks become illegible, an Alf.q Laval
representative should be contacted immediately
The q>-mark on the lock ring must not pass the q>-mark
to inspect thread wear and for determining the
on the bowl body by more than 28'
position of new alignment marks.
58
Damage
The position of the threads, contact and guide
surfaces are indicated by arrows in the
illustration.
-~~··,
~~~--~/=
Clean the threads, contact and guide surfaces
with a suitable degreasing agent.
~
Check for burrs and protrusions caused by =' GZ
eJ / -
~...-\ . . .
impact. Watch your fingers for sharp edges. '~~~
If damage is established, rectify using a

. ·- .. ·-----=I
whetstone or fine emery cloth (recommended
grain size 240}.
If the damage is considerable, use a fine single-
cut file, followed by a whetstone.
Clean and check thread, contact and guide surfaces

of the lock ring
59
5.3.11 Operating mechanism

Dirt and lime deposits in the operating
mechanism may cause poor discharge function or
no function at all.
Clean and polish surfaces with steel wool if
necessary.
1
Reasons for dirt or deposits:

• Hard or unclean operating water. Change
water supply or install a water softener or a
fine filter.
• Sludge has been sucked down into bowl
casing and into the operating system. Check
the installation and the venting system of both
the sludge tank and bowl casing drain.
5 4
i-
~~
5
II
1. Bowl body
2. Valve plug
3. Operating slide
4. Dosing ring
5. Nozzles
5.3.12 Operating slide
Poor sealing between the valve plugs on the
operating slide and bowl body may prevent
complete closing of the bowl.
Examine the sealing surfaces (1) of the bowl body
in contact with the valve plugs. Remove any
marks and lime deposits with a very fine grain
emery cloth.
Check the guiding surface (2) in contact with the
dosing ring. Remove any marks with a whetstone
~· I
~~~=====d_______jl
(grain size 240).
1. Bowl body sealing surfaces in contact with the

valve plugs
2. Operating slide guide surface in contact with the
dosing ring
60
Remove all the valve plugs. Tap in the new plugs.
Tap in new valve plugs
5.3.13 Sliding bowl bottom

Poor sealing between the bowl hood seal ring and Min 1.5 mm
the sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom will
cause a leakage of process liquid from the bowl.
Check the sealing edge of the sliding bowl
bottom. If damaged either through corrosion or
erosion or other means, it can be rectified by
turning in a lathe. Maximum permissible reduction
of the original profile height (2,0 mm) is 0,5 mm.
NOTE
Never reduce the height outside the sealing Min. height of the profile on sliding bowl bottom
edge to reach the minimum profile height.
If the seal ring for the sliding bowl bottom is to be

replaced, turn the sliding bowl bottom upside
down and inject compressed air through the hole
on the underside. This will press the ring
outwards far enough to be gripped easily.
WARNING
Risk for eye injury
Wear safety goggles. Removal of the 0-ring in sliding bowl bottom using
compressed air
61
5.3.14 Springs for operating

mechanism
Detective or broken springs may prevent
complete closing of the bowl.
Renew those springs which differ from other
springs in regard to length or are defective in
other respects. Worm wheel and worm; wear of
teeth
Same as described in "5.7 .1 Worm wheel and
worm; wear of teeth" on page 82 in this chapter.
Check for defective or broken springs
5.3.15 Worm wheel and worm;

wear of teeth
Same as described in "5.7.1 Worm wheel and
worm; wear of teeth" on page 82 in this chapter.
5.3.16 Cover interlocking switch

(option)
When the button is pushed, check that the
connections 13 and 14 inside the switch are short
-circuited. A principal diagram of the connections
is shown in chapter "8.6.7 Cover interlocking
switch (option)" on page 182.
5.3.17 Vibration switch (option)
NOTE
Before carrying out the function check
described below, check that a safety stop will
not cause serious interruption of the
operation.
Knock on the vibration switch cap a number of

times within one second (the number is decided
by the system parameter settings). If the switch Vibration switch
functions correctly, the separator will perform a
safety stop.
How to adjust the setpoint is described in chapter
"5.8.2 Vibration switch (option)" on page 87.
62
5 Service Instructions 5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS)
5.4 Check points at

Major Service (MS)
5.4.1 Bowl hood seal ring

Same as described in "5.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring"
on page 47.
5.4.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl

body nave
Same as described in "5.3.2 Bowl spindle cone
and bowl body nave" on page 48 .
.5.4.3 Bowl spindle; radial wobble

The bowl spindle wobble should be checked if the
bowl spindle has been dismantled or if rough bowl
running (vibration) occurs.
NOTE
Spindle wobble will cause rough bowl run.
This leads to vibration and reduces lifetime of
ball bearings.
Check the wobble before mounting the bowl. Revolve the spindle manually
Before measuring, make sure that the buffer
plugs are properly tightened.
• Fit a dial indicator in a support and fasten it to

the frame.
• Remove the brake cover to get access to the
coupling drum. Use the coupling drum to
revolve the spindle manually.
• Measure the wobble at the top of the tapered
end of the spindle. Permissible radial wobble
is maximum 0,04 mm.
• If wobble is too large, renew all the ball
bearings on the spindle.
Measure wobble after assembly. If it is still
excessive, the spindle is probably damaged and Measurement of radial wobble
must be replaced.
63
5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS) 5 Service Instructions
5.4.4 Brake
A worn or oily friction pad will lengthen the
braking period.
If the friction pad is worn:
• Remove the screws and exchange the friction
pad.
NOTE
The screws are slotted in both ends.
\
Friction pad is fastened with screws
If the friction pad is oily:

• Clean the friction pad and the coupling drum
with a suitable degreasing agent.
• Roughen the friction surface of the friction
pad with a coarse file.
NOTE
Identify the cause of oily friction pad. If oil is
leaking from the gear housing, renew the
sealing ring between the two parts.
Measurements when the friction pad is oily
Checking of spring and brake shoe:

Formation of rust on brake parts may cause the
brake to jam.
• Remove any rust from the surface (1) of the
brake shoe and the corresponding guide
surface in the cap (2).
{2)
• Rub in Molykote Paste on the surfaces.
(3)
• Replace the spring (3) if it has been weak.
This is indicated by chattering from the spring
when the brake is in released position.
• Oil the spring when assembling.
1. Contact surface on the brake shoe for the spring
2. Guide surface in the cap for the brake shoe
3. Spring ·
64
5.4.5 Buffer springs and ball

bearing housing
Weakened or broken buffer springs or defective
contact surfaces for the buffers on the ball
bearing housing may give rise to separator
vibration (rough bowl run).
Top bearing springs

In case of spring fracture, the complete set of
springs should be replaced, even if only one
spring is broken.
1
1. Ball bearing housing

2. Radial buffer
3. Buffer spring
4. Screw plug
Ball bearing housing

· Examine the contact surface for the buffers on the
ball bearing housing. In case of defects
(indentations deeper than 0,5 mm), renew the
housing as well as buffers and springs.
Max. permitted indentations made by radial buffers
65
5.4.6 Coupling friction pads

Worn or oily pads in the coupling will cause a long
acceleration period.
If the separator does not attain full speed within
about 4 minutes or the bowl lose speed during
operation, the friction pads of the coupling may be
worn or oily.
Check the pads. If the pads are oily:
• Clean the pads and the inside of the coupling
drum with a suitable degreasing agent. Location of coupling friction blocks
Roughen the friction surfaces of the pads with
a coarse file.
If the pads are worn, they must be renewed:
• Remove the
electric motor ( 1)
elastic plate (2)
friction blocks (3).
If disconnecting the motor cables, note the
positions of cables in the terminal box to
reconnect correctly (for correct direction of
rotation).
1. Electric motor
2. Elastic plate
3. Friction block
• Remove the screws and renew the pads.
NOTE
The screws are slotted in both ends.
1 Replace all pads even if only one is worn.
Three screws fix the friction pad to the friction block

DANGER

always check direction of rotation. If
incorrect, vital rotating parts could unscrew
causing disintegration of the machine.
66
Different friction blocks for different power

supply frequencies
If mounting new friction blocks, check that the
blocks are correct for the power supply frequency.
The measure A is different for 50 and 60 Hz
separators.
50Hz: A=55mm
60 Hz: A = 35 mm
Measure A is different for 50 and 60 Hz installations
5.4.7 Corrosion
Same as described in "5.3.3 Corrosion" on page
48.
5.4.8 Cracks
Same as described in "5.3.4 Cracks" on page 51.
5.4.9 Disc stack pressure

Same as described in "5.3.5 Disc stack pressure"
on page 52.
5.4.1 0 Dosing ring

Same as described in "5.3.6 Dosing ring" on page
53.
5.4.11 Erosion
Same as described in "5.3. 7 Erosion" on page 53.
67
5.4.12 Flexible plate in coupling

The axial play (1) of the flexible plate should be
approximately 2 mm.
L------------=~------~=-------~0
I~
Location of the axial play (1) in the flexible coupling
Check the play as follows:

Fit the elastic plate in its place in the coupling disc
of the separator. Make sure that good contact is
obtained.
The elastic plate must be fitted
Measure the distance from the frame ring (or

motor adapter) to the coupling disc of the
separator.
Measure of distance tor coupling in separator frame
68
Measure the distance from the motor coupling

disc to the motor flange.
X mm - Y mm = 2 mm.
If required, adjust the position of the motor
coupling disc.
Ymm
Measure of distance for coupling on motor
69
5.4.13 Guide surfaces

Check surfaces indicated (1) for burrs or galling.
Rectify when necessary. +-1
Repair of galling on guiding surfaces, see "5.3.8 +-1

Guide surfaces" on page 55.
Treat the guide surfaces with slide lacquer in the
following way:
1. Mask the nave hole of the bowl body. Slide
lacquer must not enter this hole.
2. Carefully degrease the contact surfaces (1) Sliding bowl bottom
between the sliding bowl bottom and bowl
body. Dry the surfaces well.
3. Apply slide lacquer Molykote 0321 R with a
well cleaned brush. Protect the surfaces
which should not be treated.
4. Air-cure the treated surfaces for 15 minutes.
5. Use a smooth fibre brush to polish to an
even, homogeneous contact film.
6. Apply slide lacquer a second time.
7. Air-cure the lacquer for a further 15 minutes.
8. Polish the film to a shiny surface. The film
should look like well-polished leather when
properly done.
9. Finish the treatment by lubricating the contact Bowl body
surfaces (A) with Alta Laval lubricating paste
or Molykote 1000 Paste. Use a well-cleaned
brush. Rub it into the surface, do not leave
any excessive paste.
10. Lubricate the 0-ring and the seal ring with
silicone grease and check that they lie 1
= ¢At major service
properly in their grooves.

Alta Lava/lubricating paste or
J, Molykote 1000 Paste
/ Slide lacquer
(Molykote D 321R) Paste
5.4.14 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc

Same as described in "5.3.9 Inlet pipe and oil
paring disc" on page 57.
70
5.4.15 Lock ring; priming

The arrows indicate positions of threads, guide
and contact surfaces to be primed.
Recommended agents for priming procedure:
• Degreasing agent
• Lubricating spray Molykote 321 R
• Hand drilling machine
• 2 fibre brushes
Threads, guide and contact surfaces to be primed
1. Clean the lock ring thoroughly with a

degreasing agent and wipe it off.
2. Spray the threads, guide and contact

surfaces with slide lacquer Molykote 321 R.
Let the lacquer air-cure for about 15 minutes.
71
5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS) 5 SeNice Instructions
3. Use a fibre brush to polish the slide lacquer

into the surface. The black spray will look like
well-polished leather when properly done.
4. Spray the lock ring a second time and let it

dry for about 15 minutes.
;;;
~
~------------------------------~~~
5. Polish the slide lacquer to a black shiny
surface which can now last about a year.
Proceed in the same way with the threads of
the bowl body and with the guide surfaces of
the bowl hood and bowl body.
72
5.4.16 Lock ring; wear and damage

Same as described in section "5.3.1 0 Lock ring;
wear and damage" on page 58.
5.4.17 Oil paring disc; height

position
The height (A) of the oil paring disc (4) is
measured when the bowl is completely
assembled and the frame hood (3) is fixed in its
position with the hinged bolts.
• Measure the height according to the
illustration. The correct height is 1--~~~~~~~~
26,5 ±0,5 mm. 2 A
• Adjust the height by adding or removing 3

height adjusting rings (2) under the protecting
washer (1 ). 4
• When the height is correct, assemble the inlet

and outlet parts.
• When the inlet and outlet parts are fitted,

rotate the bowl by pushing the coupling drum
by hand. If it is heavy to turn or if a scraping A. Distance to measure
noise is heard, incorrect height adjustment or 1. Protecting washer
incorrect fitting of the inlet pipe can be the 2. Height adjusting rings
cause. 3. Frame hood
Pay attention to any scraping noise when the 4. Oil paring disc
separator is started up.
5.4.18 Operating mechanism

Same as described in section "5.3.11 Operating
mechanism" on page 60.
73
5.4.19 Operating paring disc;

height position
· .Incorrect ·height p.osition may cause the control
paring disc (4) to scrape against the paring
chamber housing.
If the bowl spindle has been removed or the bowl
has been replaced, the height position of the
operating device relative to the bowl body bottom
must be checked.
3
5
A. Distance to measure
1. Smaller holes
2. Screw holes
5. Height adjusting rings
• Before starting to measure the height

position, the following parts must be mounted
in the separator:
the operating paring disc device
the bowl body with mounted bottom
parts.
74
• Measure, through any of the three screw

holes (2), the distance between the surface
for the screw head to the upper surface of the
distributing ring (3). Use a sliding calliper.
NOTE
Measure through any of these holes (2) only
and not through the somewhat smaller holes
(1) for the closing water.
The height (A) must be 12 ±0,5 mm.

• Adjust the height by adding or removing
height adjusting rings (5) under the
distributing cover.
• After adjustment rotate the spindle. If a noise
is heard, readjust the height.
5.4.20 Operating slide

Same as described in section "5.3.12 Operating
slide" on page 60.
5.4.21 Sliding bowl bottom

Same as described in section "5.3.13 Sliding
bowl bottom" on page 61.
5.4.22 Springs for operating

mechanism
Same as described in "5.3.14 Springs for
operating mechanism" on page 62.

wear of teeth
Same as described in section "5.7.1 Worm wheel
and worm; wear of teeth" on page 82.
75
5.4 Check points at Major SeNice (MS) 5 Service Instructions

(option)
Same as described in "5.3.16 Cover interlocking
switch (option)" on page 62.

Same as described in "5.3.17 Vibration switch
(option)" on page 62.
76
5.5 Lifting instructions
5.5 Lifting instructions

Attach two endless slings or cables to the
separator frame as illustrated.
Length of each sling must be min. 1,5 metres.
NOTE
Machine weight without frame hood and bowl
is approx. 500 kg.
Do not lift the separator unless the frame hood

and bowl have been removed.
WARNING
Crush hazards
Lift the separator in no other way than

illustrated.
A falling separator can cause accidents
resulting in serious injury to persons and
damage to equipment.
Lift the separator with the frame hood and bowl

When lifting the bowl, use the special lifting tool removed
fastened on the bowl hood ..
NOTE
Check that the lock ring is properly tightened.
The height of the lock ring above the bowl
body must not exceed 6 mm, see illustration.
Weight to lift is approx. 70 kg.
When lifting the bowl out of the separator
frame, the cap nut fixing the bowl to the bowl
spindle and the screws fixing the bowl body
to the operating water device must first be
removed.
The lock ring must be properly tightened when lifting
the bowl
77
5.6 Cleaning 5 Service Instructions
5.6 Cleaning
5.6.1 External cleaning

The external cleaning of the frame and motor
should be restricted to brushing, sponging or
wiping while the motor is running or is still hot.
Never wash down a separator with a direct water
stream. Totally enclosed motors can be damaged
by direct hosing to the same extent as open I
motors and even more than those, because:
• Many operators believe that these motors are
'
L---------------------------------~11
sealed, and normally they are not.
• A water jet played on these motors will
produce an internal vacuum, which will suck Never wash down a separator with a direct water
the water between the metal-to-metal contact stream or playing a water jet on the motor
surfaces into the windings, and this water
cannot escape.
• Water directed on a hot motor may cause
condensation resulting in short-circuiting and
internal corrosion.
Be careful even when the motor is equipped with
a protecting hood. Never play a water jet on the
ventilation grill of the hood.
Use a sponge or cloth and a brush when cleaning
5.6.2 Cleaning agents

When using chemical cleaning agents, make sure
you follow the general rules and suppliers'
recommendations regarding ventilation,
protection of personnel, etc.
For separator bowl, inlet and outlet

A chemical cleaning agent must dissolve the
deposits quickly without attacking the material of
the separator parts.
78
5 Service Instructions 5. 6 Cleaning
• For cleaning of lube oil separators the most

important function of the cleaning agent is to
be a good solvent for the gypsum in the
sludge. It should also act as a dispersant and
emulsifier for oil. It is recommended to use
Alfa Laval cleaning liquid for lube oil
separators which has the above mentioned
qualities. Note that carbon steel parts can be
damaged by the cleaning agent if submerged
for a long time.
Before use, dilute the liquid with water to a
concentration of 3-5%. Recommended
cleaning temperature is 50-70 oc. I
L---------------------------------~
Alta Laval cleaning liquid for fuel and lube oil
li
CAUTION
separators
Skin irritation hazard
Read the instructions on the label of the

plastic container before using the cleaning
liquid.
Always wear safety goggles, gloves and
protective clothing as the liquid is alkaline
and dangerous to skin and eyes.
For operating mechanism

Use 10% acetic acid solution to dissolve lime
deposits. The acid should be heated to 80 oc.
For parts of the driving devices

Use white spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene or
diesel oil.
Oiling {protect surfaces against corrosion)

Protect cleaned carbon steel parts against
corrosion by oiling. Separator parts that are not
assembled after cleaning must be wiped and
coated with a thin layer of clean oil and protected
from dust and dirt.
79
5.6 Cleaning 5 Service Instructions
5.6.3 Cleaning of bowl discs

Bowl discs
Handle the bowl discs carefully so as to avoid
damage to the surfaces during cleaning.
NOTE
Mechanical cleaning is likely to scratch the

disc surfaces causing deposits to form
quicker and adhere more firmly.
A gentle chemical cleaning is therefore
preferable to mechanical cleaning.
1. Remove the bowl discs from the distributor

and lay them down, one by one, in the
cleaning agent.
2. Let the discs remain in the cleaning agent
until the deposits have been dissolved. This Put the discs one by one into the cleaning agent
will normally take between two and four
hours.
3. Finally clean the discs with a soft brush.
Clean the discs with a soft brush
80
5 Service Instructions 5.6 Cleaning
5.6.4 CIP-system
Alta Laval has developed a CIP (Cleaning-In-
Place) system specifically designed for cleaning
the bowl without the need of dismantling.
CIP Unit connected to separator
81
5. 7 When changing oil 5 Service Instructions
5.7 When changing oil

wear of teeth
To check at each oil change

Check the teeth of both the worm wheel and
worm for wear.
1
See the " Tooth appearance examples" on page
84. Examine the contact surfaces and compare
the tooth profiles. The gear may operate
satisfactorily even when worn to some degree. 2
• Replace both worm wheel and worm at the
same time, even if only one of them is worn.
• To avoid damaging the teeth when lifting the
bowl spindle: push the worm wheel to one
side first. 1 Worm wheel
2 Worm
Position the spindle in correct place before
fitting the worm wheel.
When replacing the gear, always make sure that

the new worm wheel and worm have the same
number of teeth as the old ones. See chapter "8.1
Technical data" on page 156 for correct number of
teeth.
DANGER
Check that gear ratio is correct for power

frequency used. If incorrect, subsequent
overspeed may result in a serious
breakdown.
Check the gear ratio (number of teeth) when replacing

the gear
82
5 Service Instructions 5. 7 When changing oil
NOTE
Presence of metal chips in the oil bath is an
indication that the gear is wearing
abnormally.
Important!
When using mineral-type oil in the worm gear
housing, the presence of black deposits on the
spindle parts is an indication that the oil base has
deteriorated seriously or that some of the oil
additives have precipitated. If pits are found on
the worm gear, the cause could be that the
additives are not suitable for this purpose.
In all these cases it is imperative to change to a
high-temperature oil.
For further information, see chapter "8.5
Lubricants" on page 165.
83
5. 7 When changing oil 5 SetVice Instructions
Tooth appearance examples

Satisfactory teeth:
Uniform wear of contact surfaces. Surfaces are
smooth.
Good contact surfaces will form on the teeth
when the gear is subjected to only moderate load
during its running-in period.
Satisfactory teeth
Worn teeth:
Permissible wear is as a rule 1/3 of the thickness
of the upper part of a tooth, provided that
• the wear is uniform over the whole of the
flank of a tooth
• and all teeth are worn in the same way. Worn teeth
Spalling:
Small bits of the teeth have broken off, so-called
spalling. This is generally caused by excessive
load or improper lubrication. Damage of this type ,_
need not necessitate immediate replacement, but jj
careful checking at short intervals is of imperative L_~--------------------------~--~18
importance. Spa fling
Pitting:
Small cavities in the teeth, so-called pitting, can
occur through excessive load or improper
lubrication. Damage of this type need not
necessitate immediate replacement, but careful
check at short intervals is of imperative
importance.
Pitting
84
5 Service Instructions 5. 7 When changing oil
5.7.2 Oil change procedure
NOTE
Before adding or renewing lubricating oil in
the worm gear housing, the information
concerning different oil groups, handling of
oils, oil change intervals etc. given in chapter
"8.5 Lubricants" on page 165 must be well
known.
1. Oil filling plug

2. Sight glass
3. Oil drain plug
1. Place a collecting tray under the drain hole,

remove the drain plug and drain off the oil.
CAUTION
Burn hazards
Lubricating oil and various machine surfaces

can be sufficiently hot to cause burns.
Burn hazards: The drained oil can be hot
2. Fill new oil in the worm gear housing. The oil

level should be slightly above the middle of
the sight glass.
Oil volume: approx. 4,1 litres.
For oil brands, see "8.5.2 Recommended
lubricating oils" on page 167.
NOTE
Oil level in sight glass
During operation the oil level is normally just
visible in the lower part of the sight glass.
Too much or too little oil can damage the
separator bearings.
85
5. 8 Vibration·. 5 Service Instructions
5.8 Vibration
5.8.1 Vibration analysis

Excessive vibration or noise indicates that
something is incorrect. Stop the separator and
identify the cause.
Use vibration analysis instrument to periodically
check and record the level of vibration. See the
illustration where to take measurements.
NOTE
The level of vibration should not exceed
7,1 mm/s at full speed.
Measuring points for vibration analysis
DANGER
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator

and keep bowl filled with liquid during
rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be identified
and corrected before the separator is
restarted. Excessive vibration can be due to
incorrect assembly or poor cleaning of the
bowl.
86
5 Service Instructions 5. 8 Vibration

Adjustment of setpoint
The vibration switch is adjusted with the separator
in operation. The cover must be removed to gain
access to the setpoint adjusting screw (1 ).
1. Back-off the setpoint adjusting screw counter-
clockwise (A) two or three turns. Press the
reset button. If the armature does not remain
in the reset position, turn the adjusting screw
another turn or two until the armature stays in
position when the reset button is pressed.
2. Now turn the adjusting screw slowly
clockwise until the armature rocks. Mark this
position with a line immediately in front-of the
adjusting screw pointer (2).
3. Back-off the adjusting screw counter-
clockwise a three-quarter turn. Press the
reset button. If the armature now rocks, turn
the adjusting screw counter-clockwise
another quarter turn and so on until the
armature remains in the reset position.
4. Refit the cap and fasten with the screws.
Setpoint adjustment
1. Adjusting screw
NOTE 2. Pointer
A. Direction of increased set point
Further adjustment may become necessary if
(admit higher vibration)
alarm occurs due to vibration from
surrounding equipment.
87
5.9 Common maintenance directions 5 Service Instructions
5.9 Common
maintenance
directions
5.9.1 Ball and roller bearings

Special-design bearings for the bowl spindle
The bearings used for the bowl spindle are
special to withstand the speed, vibration,
temperature and load characteristics of high-
speed separators.
Only Alta Laval genuine spare parts should be
used.
1. Outer race
A bearing that in appearance looks equivalent to 2. Ball/roller
the correct may be considerably different in 3. Inner race
various respects: inside clearances, design and 4. Cage
tolerances of the cage and races as well as
material and heat treatment.
NOTE
Using an incorrect bearing can cause a
serious breakdown with damage to
equipment as a result.
Do not re-fit a used bearing. Always replace
it with a new.
Dismantling
For bearings where no driving-off sleeve is
included in the tool kit, remove the bearing from
its seat by using a puller. If possible, let the puller
engage the inner ring, then remove the bearing
with a steady force until the bearing bore
completely clears the entire length of the
cylindrical seat.
The puller should be accurately centered during
dismantling; otherwise, it is easy to damage the
seating.
For bearings where no drMng-off sleeve is included in
NOTE the tool kit, use a puller when removing bearings
Do not hit with a hammer directly on the

bearing.
88
5 Service Instructions 5.9 Common maintenance directions
Cleaning and inspection

Check shaft (spindle) end and/or bearing seat in
the housing for damage indicating that the
bearing has rotated on the shaft (spindle) and/or
in the housing respectively. Replace the damaged
part(s), if the faults cannot be remedied by
polishing.
Assembly
• Leave new bearings in original wrapping until
ready to fit. The anti-rust agent protecting a
new bearing should not be removed before
use.
• Use the greatest cleanliness when handling
the bearings.
• To facilitate assembly and also reduce the
risk of damage, first clean and then lightly oil
the bearing seating on shaft (spindle) or
alternatively in housing, with a thin oil.
Clean and smear the bearing seating before assembly
89
• When assembling ball bearings, the bearings

must be heated in oil to max. 125 oc.
NOTE
Heat the bearing in a clean container.
Use only clean oil with a flash point above
250 °C.
The bearing must be well covered by the oil
and not be in direct contact with the sides or The bearing must not be in direct contact with the
the bottom of the container. Place the container
bearing on some kind of support or
suspended in the oil bath.
• There are several basic rules for assembling

cylindrical bore bearings:
Never directly strike a bearing's rings,
cage or rolling elements while
assembling. A ring may crack or metal
fragments break off.
Never apply pressure to one ring in order
to assemble the other.
Use an ordinary hammer. Hammers with
soft metal heads are unsuitable as
fragments of the metal may break off and
enter the bearing.
Make sure the bearing is assembled at a
right angle to the shaft (spindle).
• If necessary use a driving-on sleeve that
abuts the ring which is to be assembled with
an interference fit, otherwise there is a risk
that the rolling elements and raceways may
be damaged and premature failure may
follow.
Use a driving-on sleeve tor bearings that are not

heated
90
5 SeNice Instructions 5.9 Common maintenance directions
Angular contact ball bearings

Always fit single-row angular contact ball
bearings with the wide shoulder of the inner race
facing the axial load (upwards on a bowl spindle).
The wide shoulder of the inner race must face the
axial load
5.9.2 Before shutdowns
Before the separator is shut-down for a period of
time, the following must be carried out:
• Remove the bowl, according to instructions in
chapter "6 Dismantling/Assembly" on page
93.
NOTE
The bowl must not be left on the spindle
during standstill for more than one week.
Vibration in foundations can be transmitted to
the bowl and produce one-sided loading of
the bearings. The resultant indentations in
the ball bearing races can cause premature
bearing failure.
• Protect cleaned carbon steel parts against

corrosion by oiling. Separator parts that are
not assembled after cleaning must be wiped
and protected against dust and dirt.
• If the separator has been shut-down for more
than 3 months but less than 12 months, an
Intermediate Service (IS) has to be made. If
the shut-down period has been longer than
12 months, a Major Service (MS) should be
carried out.
91
92
6 Dismantling/Assembly
Contents
6.1 Introduction 94 6. 7 Horizontal driving device (MS) 134

6.1.1 General directions 94 6.7.1 Exploded view 134
6.1.2 References to check points 95 6.7.2 Dismantling 136
6.1.3 Tools 95 6.7.3 Assembly 140
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS) 96

6.2.1 Exploded view 96
6.2.2 Dismantling 97
6.2.3 Assembly 99
6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (IS) 101

6.3.3 Assembly 105
6.4 Bowl body and

operating mechanism (IS) 109
6.4.3 Assembly 112
6.5 Operating water device (IS) 116

6.5.3 Assembly 119
6.6 Vertical driving device (MS) 122

6.6. 1 Exploded view 122
6.6.3 Assembly 128
93
6. 1 Introduction 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.1 Introduction
6.1.1 General directions

The separator must be dismantled regularly for
cleaning and inspection.
The recommended intervals are stated in chapter
"5.1.2 Maintenance intervals" on page 37.
DANGER
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a

complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.
The revolution counter and the motor fan
indicate if separator parts are rotating or not.
The revolution counter indicates if the separator still is

The frame hood and heavy bowl parts must be rotating
lifted by hoist. Position the hoist directly above the
bowl centre. Use an endless sling and a lifting
hook with catch.
These parts must be handled carefully.
Do not place parts directly on the floor, but on a
clean rubber mat, fibreboard or a suitable pallet.
NOTE
Never interchange bowl parts
To prevent mixing of parts, e.g. in an
installation comprising several machines of
the same type, the major bowl parts carry the
machine manufacturing number or its last
tree digits.
94
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6. 1 Introduction
6.1.2 References to check points

In the text you will find references to the Check
Point instructions in chapter 5. The references
appear in the text as in the following example:
t/ Check point
"5;3.5 Disc stack pressure" on page 52.
In this example, look up check point Disc stack
pressure in chapter 5 for further instructions.
6.1.3 Tools
Special tools from the tool box must be used for
dismantling and assembly. The special tools are
specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue and are
shown as illustrations together with the
dismantling/assembly instructions.
NOTE
When lifting parts without weight
specifications, always use lifting straps with
the capacity of at least 500 kg.
95
6.2 Inlet/outlet,· frame hood (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame

hood (IS)
6.2.1 Exploded view

1. 0-ring 1
2. 0-ring
3. Inlet pipe
2
4. Screw
3
5. Washer
6. Connecting housing
7. Screw
4
B. Protecting washer
5
9. Height adjusting ring 6
10. Frame hood

7
8
96.
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS)
6.2.2 Dismantling
DANGER
Entrapment hazards
1. Make sure that rotating parts have come

indicates if separator parts are rotating or
not.
2. To avoid accidental start, switch off and
dismantling work.
The parts must be handled carefully. Don't place

parts directly on the floor, but on a clean rubber
mat, fibreboard or a suitable pallet.
1. Disconnect and remove the hose for
displacement/sealing water.
2. Unscrew the inlet pipe and lift it out carefully.
Left-hand thread!
97
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
3. Release the coupling nuts a few turns holding

the two elbow pipes at the pipe support (1 ).
4. Disconnect the elbow pipes from the
connecting housing (2).
5. Loosen the four screws (3) for the connecting
housing.
6. Rock up the connecting housing a bit and turn

the elbow pipes aside.
Take care of the washers and 0-rings fitted
onto the elbow pipes.
7. Remove the connecting housing.
8. Unscrew the four hinged bolts holding the

frame hood and lift if off. If necessary, use a
hoist.
98
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS)
6.2.3 Assembly
1. Put the frame hood in place and tighten it with
the four hinged bolts.
t/ Check point
"5.4.17 Oil paring disc; height position" on
page 73.
2. Lubricate the sealing rings for the inlet/outlet
device with silicone grease. Renew the
sealing rings at each Intermediate Service
(IS).
3. Fit the connecting housing. At the same time,
fit the elbow pipes into the connecting
housing. Check that the washers and 0-rings
are placed onto the elbows.
4. Fasten the four screws (3) for the connecting

housing.
5. Tighten the elbow coupling nuts at both the
connecting housing (2) and the pipe support
(1 ).
99
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6. Lubricate the 0-ring of the inlet pipe.

Fit the inlet pipe and tighten it firmly.
. Left-hand thread!
7. Connect the displacement/sealing water
hose.
DANGER

100
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (IS)
6.3 Bowl hood and disc

stack (IS)
6.3.1 Exploded view
1. Paring chamber cover (small lock ring) 8. Bowl discs

2. Oil paring disc 9. Wing insert
3. Lock ring 10. Distributor
4. 0-ring 11. Distnbuting cone
5. Bowl hood 12. Sliding bowl bottom
6. Seal ring 13. Rectangular ring
7. Top disc 14. Bowl body
101
6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.3.2 Dismantling
1. Unscrew the paring chamber cover using the
spanner.
Left-hand thread!
2. Remove the oil paring disc.
3. Apply the brake and unscrew the lock ring.

Left-hand thread!
NOTE
After removing the lock ring it must be kept
lying horizontally or it may become distorted.
Even slightest distortion could make it
impossible to refit.
102
4. Fit the lifting tool on the bowl hood.
5. Screw the spindle plate into the lifting tool.

Unscrew the spindle a few turns if the plate is
not in contact with the lifting tool.
6. Screw home the spindle with the wrench until

the bowl hood loosens from the bowl body.
7. Remove the spindle plate from the lifting tool.
8. Lift off the bowl hood by using a hoist. Be
careful not to scratch the bowl hood seal ring.
CAUTION
Crush hazards
If the top disc is stuck into the bowl hood,

remove it now before it accidentally falls out.
9. Remove the top disc.
103
10. Fit the lifting tool into the distributor and lift
the distributor with disc stack out of the bowl
body by using a hoist.
11. Fit the lifting tool into the distributing cone and
lift it out.
12. Fit the lifting tool onto the sliding bowl bottom
and lift it out by using a hoist.
13. Remove deposits and clean all parts

thoroughly in a suitable cleaning agent. See
chapter "5.6 Cleaning" on page 78.
104
6.3.3 Assembly
t/ Check point
"5.3.3 Corrosion" on page 48,
"5.3.4 Cracks" on page 51,
"5.3. 7 Erosion" on page 53,
"5.3.8 Guide surfaces" on page 55,
"5.3.1 0 Lock ring; wear and damage" on page
58'
"5.3.13 Sliding bowl bottom" on page 61.
1. Lubricate the guide surfaces of the bowl body
and sliding bowl bottom with lubricating
paste. See chapter "8.5 Lubricants" on page
165.
2. Fit the lifting tool to the sliding bowl bottom
and lift it into the bowl body by using a hoist.
3. Fit the distributing cone onto the sliding bowl

bottom.
Check that the guide pins on the underside of
the distributing cone enter the recesses in the
bowl body nave.
105
6.3 Bowl-hood and disc stack (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
4. Assemble the discs one by one on the

distributor. The distributor has one guide rib
for the correct positioning of the discs.
CAUTION
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the separator discs may

cause cuts.
For correct number of discs above and below

the wing insert when the machine was new,
see the Spare Parts Catalogue.
The number of bowl discs above the wing
insert may be increased to adjust the disc
stack pressure.
5. Fit the lifting tool to the distributor and lift the
distributor with disc stack into the sliding bowl
bottom by using a hoist.
Check that the guide pins in the distributing

cone fit into the recesses on the underside of
the distributor.
6. Fit the top disc onto the distributor. Lubricate

the Q-ring on the top disc.
V' Check point
"5.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring" on page 47.
106
7. Fit the lifting tool to the bowl hood and lift it by

using a hoist. Check that the seal ring of the
bowl hood are properly fitted and lubricated.
Lower the bowl hood straight down onto the

disc stack, otherwise it may get stuck. Be
careful not to scratch the bowl hood seal ring.
For correct position of bowl hood, see next
illustration.
8. Check that the guide recess on the bowl hood

enters the guide lug in the bowl body.
0
9. Remove the lifting tool.
10. Lubricate the lock ring threads, contact and
guide surfaces with lubricating paste.
II' Check point
"5.4.16 Lock ring; wear and damage" on page
73 (only at Major Service).
107
11. Tighten the lock ring.

Left-hand thread!
I~
\HJ ~
L-----------~'------------------~0
12. Tighten until the assembly marks are at least
in line.
V' Check point

"5.3.5 Disc stack pressure" on page 52
I
I
NOTE
I
The assembly marks must never pass each
other more than 25 o which corresponds to I I
A=60 mm on LOPX 705SFD-30.
L__....:.___________:____ _ _ _____Jii
13. Fit the oil paring disc.

V' Check point
"5.3.9 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc" on page
57.
14. Fit and tighten the paring chamber cover

using the spanner.
Left-hand thread!
~0_.::-_o-~
108
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.4 Bowl body and operating mechanism (IS)
6.4 Bowl body and

operating
mechanism (IS)
6.4.1 Exploded view
1. Capnut
2. Bowl body
3. 0-ring
4. 0-ring
5. Valve plug ~--3

w-----4
6. Operating slide
~~e~~-5
7. Spring )lhl---6
8. Spring support lm--+----7

9. Screw ~~~~--8
10. Dosing ring J!==-4·~=--r--9
11. Screw
12. Nozzle
lt----11
r-----------~12
109
6.4 Bowl body and operating mechanism (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.4.2 Dismantling
1. Unscrew and remove the cap nut.
left-hand thread!
2. Unscrew the three screws in the bottom of the

bowl body.
3. Fit the lifting tool onto the bowl body bottom.

If necessary, unscrew the central screw.
"'
0
L-------~~------~·~
Release the bowl body from the spindle by

using the lifting tool as a puller. Turn the eye
of the central screw at top of the lifting tool
until the bowl body comes loose from the
spindle taper. Turn the eye two more turns in
order to avoid damaging the paring disc
device.
110
4. Lift out the bowl body by using a hoist.
5. Turn the bowl body upside down.

6. Loosen the screws for the spring support
successively a little at a time. Remove the
screws.
7. Remove the spring support and the springs.
8. Unscrew the screws for the dosing ring.
111
9. Lift the dosing ring and operating slide with

two of the dosing ring screws (1 ). If
necessary, prize loose the dosing ring as
shown in the illustration.
10. Remove the operating slide and place it with

the valve plugs facing upwards.
11 . Remove any thick deposits in the frame hood

and clean all other parts thoroughly in a
suitable cleaning agent. See chapter "5.6
Cleaning" on page 78.
The surfaces of the sludge space (shown with
a thick line in the illustration) must not be
damaged. Be cautious when cleaning. Do not
use a steel toll but the sludge scraper of
brass included in the set of tools.
6.4.3 Assembly
t/ Check point
"5.3.3 Corrosion" on page 48,
"5.3.4 Cracks" on page 51,
"5.3.6 Dosing ring" on page 53,
"5.3.7 Erosion" on page 53,
"5.3.8 Guide surfaces" on page 55,
"5.3.12 Operating slide" on page 60, "5.3.13
Sliding bowl bottom" on page 61,
"5.3.16 Cover interlocking switch (option)" on
page 62.
112
1. Lubricate the guide surfaces of the bowl body,

operating slide and dosing ring with
lubricating paste. See chapter "8.5
Lubricants" on page 165.
2. Fit the operating slide onto the bowl body.
Check that the guide pin in the bowl body
enters the hole in the operating slide.
3. Fit the dosing ring.
Check that the guide pin in the bowl body
enters the hole in the dosing ring.
4. Apply only a thin film of lubricating paste on
the screws for the dosing ring.
NOTE
If there is too much lubrication paste applied,
the surplus will collect between the operating
slide and bowl body with risk for malfunction.
Tighten the dosing ring screws to a torque of

7 Nm. The screws should first be tightened
diametrically, then tightened symmetrically
around the bowl.
If torque is too low, there is a risk that the

bolts will loosen by themselves when the
separator is in operation. If torque is too high,
the dosing ring as well as the bolts will be
deformed. This may lead to sticking of the
operating slide which moves inside the
dosing ring.
113
5. Lubricate the screw threads and the guide

surfaces of the spring support. See chapter
"8.5 Lubricants" on page 165.
Fit springs and support.
6. Tighten the three screws for the spring
support successively by hand a little at a time.
7. Wipe off the spindle top and nave bore in the

bowl body. Lubricate the tapered end of the
spindle and wipe it off with a clean cloth.
V' Check point
"5.3.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl body nave"
on page 48.
8. Turn the bowl body and fit the lifting tool onto
the bowl body bottom.
Turn the handle at the top of the lifting tool so
that the central screw is home.
~
L-------~------~w
9. Lower the bowl body by using a hoist until the

central screw rests on the spindle top. Then
screw up the central screw so that the bowl
body sinks down onto the spindle.
Remove the tool.
114
10. Rotate the bowl body and align it so that the

three screw holes in the bowl body bottom
are exactly above the three holes in the
distributing ring.
Tighten the three screws firmly.
11. Screw on the cap nut and tighten firmly.

Left-hand thread!
115
6.5 Operating water device (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.5 Operating water

device (IS)
6.5.1 Exploded view

1. 0-ring
4. Gasket
5. Cover
6. Gasket
7. Distributing cover
B. Height adjusting ring
116
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.5 Operating water device (IS)
6.5.2 Dismantling
1. Unscrew the two cap nuts holding the clamp
washer and then pull out the operating water
inlet tubes.
2. Screw out the screws for the distributing

cover and remove the cover ( 1) together with
the paring disc device.
117
3. To take apart the paring disc device, first

remove it from the distributing cover by
screw.ing out the screws.
4. Turn the paring disc device upside down and
remove the screws on its underside.

thoroughly in a suitable cleaning agent. Pay
special attention to the channels. See chapter
"5.6 Cleaning" on page 78.
6. Check the parts for damage and corrosion.
118
6.5.3 Assembly
1. Assemble the control paring disc device. Do
not forget the gasket on its underside.
"'
k-------------------------------~
I~
2. Align the four holes in the paring disc (1) with

the four holes in the distributing cover (2).
3. Tighten the screws of the control paring disc.

Note: Do not tighten too hard, as the threads
may be damaged.
119
4. Put the distributing cover in place. Do not

tighten the screws before the operating water
inlet tubes are fitted.
5. Fit the operating water inlet tubes.
6. Fasten the distributing cover.
120
121
6.6 Vertical driving device (MS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.6 Vertical driving device

(MS)
6.6.1 Exploded view
: --zc±)
7 1-
B~l~-<''·-:=
u I ~.:. .,.\&1~14
1
9~~~ ·~~fT\.--15
"
20
10------$ ~16 ~ 21
11 ~ ~ 22
~ 23
12_ft--f~
13 ~~
®----25
9
c::b
24
26
D ~---------- ~
@
""
27
8 I
28
;~
:~
15
122
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.6 Vertical driving device (MS)
1. Screw
2. Protecting plate
3. Screw
4. Protecting guard
5. 0-ring
6. Protecting collar
7. Screw
8. Spring washer
9. Spring casing
10. Deflector
11. Ball bearing
12. Ball bearing housing

13. Axial buffer
13A. Split pin
13B. Wear ring
13C. Spring
130. Spring support

14. Buffer
15. Screw plug
16. Spring
17. 0-ring
18. 0-ring
19. Bowl spindle
20. Worm
21. Spacing washer
22. Ball bearing
23. Lock washer
24. Round nut
25. Bushing
26. 0-ring
27. Lock washer
28. Round nut
123
6.6.2 Dismantling
NOTE
Clean the space in the bowl casing
thoroughly before starting to dismantle the
bowl spindle to prevent contaminations
falling down into the oil gear housing.
1. Drain the oil from the worm gear housing.
CAUTION
Burn hazards

can be hot and cause burns.
2. Unscrew and remove the protecting plate and

the protecting guard.
3. Remove the 0-ring and unscrew the
protecting collar with e.g. a drift.
Left-hand thread!
4. Unscrew the screw plugs a little, not

completely.
124
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.6 Verlical driving device (MS)
5. Unscrew the screws of the spring casing.
6. Remove the bearing shield and gasket.
7. Remove the revolution counter (1 ). Apply the

brake (2).
8. Remove the round nut and lock washer at the

worm wheel shaft.
125
9. Remove the ball bearing and worm wheel

fitted on the shaft.
10. Lift out the bowl spindle by using the special

lifting tool.
11 . If a 50 Hz separator, remove the axial buffer 50Hz 60Hz

from the frame.
For 60 Hz separators, the buffer can be
removed from the spindle after the worm has
been knocked off. 1:]
126
12. Clamp the bowl spindle in a screw vice,

protected with copper liners.
13. Remove the round nut and lock washer for
the bottom bearing on spindle.
14. Pull off the ball bearing together with the

spacing washer.
15. Knock off the worm using a hammer and a

soft drift.
16. If a 60Hz separator, remove the axial buffer.
17. Remove the screw plugs, springs and buffers.

Then remove the spring casing.
127
18. Unscrew the deflector and remove the ball

bearing housing.
Left-hand thread!
19. Knock off the ball bearing.
[ ·-- _-- =?D ~

g
~------------~0
20. Clean all dismantled parts thoroughly in a

degreasing agent and check for damage and
corrosion.
6.6.3 Assembly
When mounting ball bearings on the spindle as
described below, the bearings must be heated in
oil to max 125 oc.
WARNING
Burn hazards
Use protective gloves when handling the

heated bearings.
NOTE
If any doubt how to mount roller bearings in a
correct way, see the detailed description in
chapter "5.9.1 Ball and roller bearings" on
page 88.
128
V' Check point

"5.4.5 Buffer springs and ball bearing
housing" on page 65.
1. Mount the upper ball bearing (6) onto the 1
spindle. Make sure it enters its seat.
2. Fit the bearing housing (7) and tighten the
deflector (5).
left-hand thread!
3. Fit the spring casing (1 ), buffers (2),
springs(3) and plugs (4).
Make sure the buffers come to rest against
the flats of the ball bearing housing.
The final tightening of the plugs is preferably
done when the spindle has been placed in the
frame.
4. Fit the worm (8), spacing washer (9) and
bottom ball bearing (1 0).
Note: For 60 Hz separators, the axial buffer
must be mounted on the spindle before the
worm and ball bearing are mounted, see next
illustration.
5. Finally fit the lock washer (11) and tighten the
round nut (12).
6. For 50 Hz separators, fit the axial buffer in the

frame.
129
7. Carefully lower the spindle into the frame.

Guide the bearing into the bottom bushing. If
it does not completely enter its seat, tap the
spindle top with a tin hammer.
8. Tighten the screws of the spring casing.
9. Tighten the buffer plugs.
130
10. Screw the protecting collar onto the spindle.

Left-hand thread!
Fit its 0-ring, guard and protecting plate.
11 . Fit the worm wheel with ball bearing onto the

shaft. Match the worm wheel with the teeth in
the worm of the bowl spindle.
12. Fit the ball bearing and lock washer onto the
shaft and tighten the round nut.
' ,
V' Check point

"5.4.25 Vibration switch (option)" on page 76,
"5.4.3 Bowl spindle; radial wobble" on page
63.
13. Fit the revolution counter.

14. Fit the gasket and bearing shield. The parts
can be fitted only in one position because of
the asymmetrical positioned screw holes.
131
15. Pour oil into worm gear housing. The oil level
should be slightly above the middle of the
sight glass.
For correct oil volume and recommended oil
brands, see chapter "8.5 Lubricants" on page
165.
V" Check point
"5.4.4 Brake" on page 64.
I
~-----===----------------------~~~
132
133
6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6. 7 Horizontal driving
device (MS)
6. 7.1 Exploded view

14
I
I
I
I
4 I
I
I
I
-----
~/
-----------------~
19 20
1718
15
134
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6. 7 Horizontal driving device (MS)
1. Screw
2. Coupling nave
3. Coupling disc
4. Elastic plate
5. Coupling disc
6. Friction block
7. Friction pad
B. 0-ring
9. Round nut
1o. Lock washer
11. Ball bearing
12. Spacing ring
13. Ball bearing
14. Nave
15. Worm wheel shaft
16. Frame
17. 0-ring
18. Sealing washer
19. Seal ring
20. Ball bearing
21. Worm wheel
22. Ball bearing
23. Lock washer
24. Round nut
135
6.7.2 Dismantling
DANGER
Entrapment hazards
1. Make sure that rotating parts have come

indicates if separator parts are rotating or
not.
2. To avoid accidental start, switch off and
dismantling work.
'
L----------------=~------------~
II
The parts must be handled carefully. Don't place
parts directly on the floor, but on a clean rubber
mat, fibreboard or a suitable pallet.
If the bowl spindle has been removed according
to earlier description, points 1-5 below are already
done. Proceed then with point 6.
1. Drain the oil from the worm gear housing.
CAUTION
Burn hazards

can be hot and cause burns.
2. Remove the bearing shield and gasket.
136
3. Remove the revolution counter (1 ).

Apply the brake (2).
L-----------------~------------~
II
4. Remove the round nut and lock washer at the
worm wheel shaft.
5. Remove the ball bearing and worm wheel

fitted on the·shaft.
6. Pull off the ball bearing from the worm wheel.

Use a washer as a support for the puller.
137
6. 7 Horizontal driving device (MS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
7. Remove:
the electric motor (1)
the elastic plate (2)
the friction blocks (3).
If disconnecting the motor cables, note the
positions of cables in the terminal box to
reconnect correctly (for correct direction of
rotation).
8. Lift out the worm wheel shaft.
138
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS)
9. Dismantle the nave in the following way:

remove the screws (1) and then the
coupling disc (2)
unscrew the round nut (3) and remove
the lock washer
put the coupling disc in place (4) again
and pull off the nave with a 3/8"- 16 UNC
screw (5).
10. Remove the sealing washer using two screws

with threads 1/4"-20 UNC screw.
139
11. Remove the seal ring by using a drift.

thoroughly in a suitable cleaning agent. See
chapter "5.6 Cleaning" on page 78.
6.7.3 Assembly
1. Lubricate the 0-ring on the sealing washer
periphery and the sealing ring with silicone
grease. Fit the sealing washer in frame and
check that the sealing ring is fitted in the
correct direction, as illustrated.
v' Check point

"5.4.6 Coupling friction pads" on page 66.
2. Apply ball bearing grease into the bearings
(fill about 1/3 of the free volume in each
bearing). Note that no grease must be
packed in the nave proper, as superfluous
grease might ooze out of the nave and
adhere to the friction blocks.
3. Fit the nave, bearings and spacing sleeve,
lock washer and the round nut.
4. Fit the 0-ring onto the nave and fasten the

coupling disc. Put the friction blocks in place
inside the coupling drum.
140
5. Fit the worm wheel shaft.
NOTE
Before fitting the worm wheel, mount the
bowl spindle into the separator frame if
removed (see separate description).
t/ Check point
"5.4.24 Cover interlocking switch (option)" on
page 76.
6. Heat the ball bearing and fit it on the worm
wheel.
When mounting the ball bearings on the
worm wheel and shaft, the bearings must be
heated in oil to max. 125 oc.
WARNING
Burn hazards
Use protective gloves when handling the

heated bearings.
NOTE
If any doubt how to mount roller bearings in a
correct way, see the detailed description in
chapter "5.9.1 Ball and roller bearings" on
page 88.
141
The remaining description in this section implies

that the bowl spindle is mounted in the frame. If
not, proceed with the assembly instruction for the
vertical driving device in chapter "6.6.3 Assembly''
on page 128.
7. Fit the worm wheel with the ball bearing onto
the shaft. Match the worm wheel with the
teeth in the worm of the bowl spindle.
8. Fit the ball bearing and lock washer onto the
shaft and tighten the round nut.
V' Check point
"5.4.25 Vibration switch (option)" on page 76,
"5.4.3 Bowl spindle; radial wobble" on page
63.
9. Fit the revolution counter.

10. Fit the gasket and bearing shield. The parts
can be fitted only in one position because of
the asymmetrical positioned screw holes.
11. Pour oil into worm gear housing. The oil level
should be slightly above the middle of the
sight glass.
For correct oil volume and recommended oil
brands, see chapter "8.5 Lubricants" on page
165.
V' Check point
"5.4.4 Brake" on page 64.
142
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS)
12. Fit the elastic plate.

t/ Check point
"5.4.12 Flexible plate in coupling" on page 68.
13. Fit the electric motor.
DANGER

143
144
7 Trouble-tracing
Contents
7.1 Mechanical functions 146

7.1.1 Separator vibrates 146
Trouble-tracing
7.1.2 Smell 147
7.1.3 Noise 147
7.1.4 Speed too low 147
7.1.5 Starting power too high 148 Study the
System Manual's
7.1.6 Starting power too low 148
Trouble-tracing
7.1.7 Starting time too long 148 chapter first
7.1.8 Retardation time too long 149 (if applicable).
7.1.9 Water in worm gear housing 149
7.2 Separating functions 150

7.2.1 Liquid flows through the bowl
casing drain and/or sludge outlet 150
7.2.2 Bowl opens accidentally during If the problem is not solved
operation 151 in the System Manual's
7.2.3 Bowl fails to open for sludge Trouble-tracing, continue
discharge 151 with this chapter.
7.2.4 Unsatisfactory sludge discharge 152
7.2.5 Unsatisfactory separation result 152
7.2.6 High pressure in oil outlet 152
7.3 Vibration switch (option) 153

7.3.1 Vibration switch does not reset 153
7.3.2 Impossible to adjust setpoint setting
to obtain tripping 153
7.3.3 Vibration switch does not reset 153
145
7. 1 Mechanical functions 7 Trouble-tracing
7.1 Mechanical functions
7.1.1 Separator vibrates
NOTE
Some vibration is normal during the starting and stopping sequences when the separator
passes through its critical speed.
DANGER
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep bowl filled with liquid during rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be identified and corrected before the separator is restarted.
Excessive vibration may be due to incorrect assembly or poor cleaning of the bowl.
Cause Corrective actions Page
Bowl out of balance due to: Dismantle the separator and check the 105
- poor cleaning assembly and cleaning
- incorrect assembly
- incorrect disc stack compression
- bowl assembled with parts from other
separators
Uneven sludge deposits in the sludge Dismantle and clean the separator bowl 102
space
Height adjustment of the oil paring disc or Stop the separator, measure and if 73
bowl spindle is incorrect necessary adjust the height(s)
Bowl spindle bent (max 0,04 mm) Renew the bowl spindle 63
Bearing is damaged or worn Renew all bearings 122, 134
Vibration damping rubber cushions are Renew all rubber cushion 46

worn out
Spindle top bearing spring broken Renew all springs 122
146
7 Trouble-tracing 7. 1 Mechanical functions
7.1.2 Smell
Normal occurrence during start while the None -

friction blocks are slipping
Brake is applied Release the brake -

Oil level in gear housing too low Check oil level and add oil if necessary 30
7.1.3 Noise
Oil level in gear housing too low Check oil level and add oil if necessary 30
Height adjustment of the oil paring disc or Stop the separator, measure and adjust 73
bowl spindle is incorrect the height(s)
Worm wheel and worm are worn Renew worm wheel and worm 82
Incorrect play between coupling pulley Adjust the play 68

and elastic plate
7. 1.4 Speed too low

Coupling friction pads are oily or worn Clean or renew friction pads 66
Bowl is not closed or leaking Dismantle the bowl and check 101
Motor failure Repair the motor -

Bearing is damaged Renew all bearings 122, 134
Incorrect gear transmission (60 Hz gear Stop and change the gear transmission 82, 122,
for 50 Hz power supply) to suit the power supply frequency 134
147
7. 1 Mechanical functions 7 Trouble-tracing
7.1.5 Starting power too high
Incorrect friction blocks (50 Hz blocks for

60 Hz power supply)
~ DANGER
Stop immediately and change the friction 66
blocks to suit the power supply frequency
Wrong direction of rotation Change electrical phase connections to the -

motor
7 .1.6 Starting power too low
Incorrect friction blocks (60 Hz blocks for Stop immediately and change the friction 66
50 Hz power supply) blocks to suit the power supply frequency
Friction pads are oily or worn Clean or renew friction pads 66
7.1.7 Starting time too long
Friction pads are oily or worn Renew or clean friction pads 66
Height position of oil paring disc or Stop, check and adjust the height 66, 74
operating device is incorrect

148
7 Trouble-tracing 7. 1 Mechanical functions
7.1.8 Retardation time too long
Brake friction pad is worn or oily Renew or clean brake friction pad 64
7.1.9 Water in worm gear housing
Bowl casing drain obstructed Clean worm gear housing and 82

change oil
Leakage at top bearing Renew seal ring and change oil 122,85
Condensation Clean worm gear housing and 85
change oil
149
7.2 Separating functions 7 Trouble-tracing
7.2 Separating functions
7.2.1 Liquid flows through the

bowl casing drain and/or
sludge outlet
Sludge discharge or water draining in None (normal) -

progress
Strainer in operating water line is clogged Clean the strainer and check water -
or water pressure/flow is too low pressure/flow:
Closing water pressure, 20-30 kPa
Opening water flow, min.18 litres/minute
Channels in operating water device are Clean the operating water device 116
clogged
0-ring at the paring chamber cover Renew the 0-ring 101

(small lock ring) defective
Paring chamber cover (small lock ring) Renew the paring chamber cover 101
defective
Seal ring in oil paring disc device Renew the seal ring 101
defective
Oil paring disc defective Renew the paring disc 101
Seal ring in the bowl hood defective Renew the seal ring 101
Sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom Smoothen sealing edge of the sliding bowl 61
defective bottom or renew it
Valve plugs defective Renew all valve plugs 60
Bowl speed too low See section "7.1.4 Speed too low'' on page -
147 in this chapter
150
7 Trouble-tracing 7.2 Separating functions
7.2.2 Bowl opens accidentally

during operation
Strainer in the operating water supply is Clean the strainer -

clogged
No water in the operating water system Check the operating water system and -
make sure the valve(s) are open
Water connections to the separator are Correct -

incorrectly fitted
Upper nozzle in the dosing ring is Clean the nozzle. Carry out an Intermediate 53
clogged Service (IS)
Square-sectioned ring in sliding bowl Renew the square-sectioned ring. Carry out 61
bottom is defective an Intermediate Service (IS)
Valve plugs are detective Renew all plugs. Carry out an Intermediate 60
Service (IS)
Supply valve for opening water is leaking Rectify the leak -
7.2.3 Bowl fails to open for sludge

discharge
Strainer in the operating water supply is Clean the strainer -

clogged
Seal rings in operating device defective Renew the seal rings 116
Water flow too low Check the opening water flow; -

min.18 litres/minute
Dosing ring too firmly tightened Check the tightening torque 113
Lower nozzle in the dosing ring is Clean the nozzle. Carry out an Intermediate 53
clogged Service (IS)
Seal ring in the operating slide is Renew the seal ring. Carry out an 109
defective Intermediate Service (IS)
151
7.2 Separating functions 7 Trouble-tracing
7.2.4 Unsatisfactory sludge

discharge
Dosing ring too firmly tightened Check the tightening torque 113
Valve plugs in the operating slide too high Renew with correct valve plugs 60
Sludge deposits in the operating system Check and clean the operating system 109, 116
7.2.5 Unsatisfactory separation

result
Incorrect separation temperature Adjust -

Throughput too high Adjust -
Disc stack is clogged Clean disc stack 80
Sludge space in bowl is filled Clean and reduce the time between sludge 80
discharges
Bowl speed too low Examine the motor and power transmission 82, 134
including the gear ratio
7.2.6 High pressure in oil outlet

Throughput too high Adjust -
Valve(s) in oil outlet line closed Open the valve(s) -
152
7 Trouble-tracing 7.3 Vibration switch (option)
7.3 Vibration switch

(option)
7.3.1 Vibration switch does not

reset
Dirt or iron chips on magnets Clean magnets -

Leaf spring broken Return to Alfa Laval for repair -
Reset coil open Check for continuity and proper coil -
resistance
7.3.2 Impossible to adjust

setpoint setting to obtain
tripping
Incorrect air gap between hold-down Readjust the air gap with the stop pin screw -
magnet (lower) and armature in switch
7.3.3 Vibration switch does not

reset
Defective switch Replace and verify by manually moving the -

armature to the latched (tripped) position
and listen for an audible click. Verify contact
by performing a continuity check
Incorrect position Check that the switch plunger is just free of -

the armature when in the set {un-tripped)
position
153
7.3 Vibration switch (option) 7 Trouble-tracing
154
8 Technical Reference
Contents
8.1 Technical data 156
8.2 Connection list 158
8.3 Interface description 160

8.3.1 General 160
8.3.2 Definitions 160
8.3.3 Component description and signal
processing 161
8.3.4 Function graph and running limitations
163
8.4 Water quality 164
8.5 Lubricants 165

8.5.1 Lubrication chart, general 165
8.5.2 Recommended lubricating oils 167
8.5.3 Recommended oil brands 168
8.5.4 Recommended lubricants 171
8.6 Drawings 174

8.6.1 Basic size drawing 174
8.6.2 Dimensions of connections 175
8.6.3 Foundations 176
8.6.4 Electric motor 177
8.6.5 Machine plates and safety labels 180
8.6.6 Vibration sensor (option) 182
8.6.7 Cover interlocking switch (option) 182
8.7 Storage and installation 183

8.7.1 Storage and transport of goods 183
8.7.2 Planning of installation 185
8.7.3 Foundations 188
155
8.1 Technical data 8 Technical Reference
8.1 Technical data
A/fa Laval ref. 557548
NOTE
The separator is a component operating in an integrated system including a monitoring
system. If the technical data in the system description does not agree with the technical
data in this instruction manual, the data in the system description is the valid one.
Product number 881149-02-02

Separator type LOPX 705SFD-30
Application Continuous clarification of lubricating oil.
The flash point of the oil to be separated must be
min. +60 ac.
Density of operating water, max. 1 000 kg/m 3
Density of sediment/feed, max. 1 531/1 100 kg/m 3
Hydraulic capacity, max. 4 500 litres/hour
By-pass treatment, optimum:
R & 0 type:
- Crosshead diesel engine 1 700 litres/hour
Detergent:
- Crosshead diesel engine 1 500 litres/hour
-Trunk piston diesel engine 1 100 litres/hour
Feed temperature, min./max. 0/100 oc

Ambient temperature, min./max. 2-5/45-65 ac The min. and max. temperatures
are dependent of the used oil type.
See "8.5.2 Recommended
lubricating oils" on page 167.
Bowl speed, max. 7607/7540 r.p.m., 50/60Hz
Motor shaft speed, max. 1500/1800 r.p.m., 50/60Hz
Revolution counter 118-125 I 142-150 r.p.m., 50/60Hz
No. of teeth;
- on worm, 50 Hz 14
- on worm, 60 Hz 16
- on worm wheel, 50 Hz 71
- on worm wheel, 60 Hz 67
Lubricating volume approx. 4,1 lit res
156
8 Technical Reference B. 1 Technical data
Motor power rating 4 kW

Power consumption, max. 5,9 kW (at starting up)
Power consumption, normal 2,2/3,6 kW (idling/at max. capacity)
Discharge volume, min./max. 0,8/1,3 litres variable discharge volume
Discharge interval, min./max. 1/240 minutes
Bowl volume 3,1 lit res
Starting time 1,5-3,5 minutes
Stopping time with brake 2-4 minutes
Max. running time without flow;
-empty bowl 180 minutes
- filled bowl 180 minutes
Sound power level Bel( A} ISO 37 44, 4,5 m 3 /h
Sound pressure level 75 dB(A} ISO 3744, 4,5 m 3/h
Vibration level, separator in use, max. 7,1 mm/s (RMS)
Weight of separator (without motor) 400 kg
Weight of bowl 60 kg
Weight of motor 31 kg
The materials in contact with process fluid (excluding seals and 0-rings) are brass, bronze and
stainless steel. Cast iron frame. Intended for both land and marine applications.
157
8.2 Connection fist 8 Technical Reference
8.2 Connection list

Alta Laval ref. 557541 rev. 2
Connection No. Description Requirements/limits
201 Inlet for product
- Allowed temperature Min. 0 oc, max. 100 oc

206 Inlet of conditioning/displacement liquid (water) Fresh water
- Instantaneous flow 0,9 litre/minute
- Pressure (Min./Max.) 200/600 kPa
220 Outlet for light phase (oil)
- Counter pressure Max. 300 kPa
222 Outlet for solid phase The outlet after

theseparator should be
installed in such a way
that you can not fill the
frame top part with sludge.
(Guidance of sludge pump
or open outlet)
(221) Outlet for heavy phase (water)
372 Inlet of discharge liquid See demand in chapter

"8.4 Water quality" on
page 164
- Instantaneous flow 11 litres/minute
- Time 3 seconds/discharge
376 Inlet for make-up liquid See demand in chapter

"8.4 Water quality" on
page 164
372 + 376 Discharge and make-up liquid
- Consumption 0,8 litres/discharge
(463) Drain of frame top part, upper
462 Drain/ventilation of frame top part, lower
158
8 Technical Reference 8.2 Connection list
Connection No. Description Requ i rementsllim its
377 Outlet for operating liquid (discharge and make-up

liquid)
(463)
462 Drain of frame top part, lower
701 Motor for separator
- Max. deviation from nominal frequency ± 5% (momentarily 10%

during a period of
maximum 5 seconds)
753 Vibration sensor (delivered as option) See "8.3 Interface

Mechanical switch description" and "8.6.6
Vibration sensor (option)"
on page 182
- Type Mechanical switch
- Vibration measurement range 0 to 4,5 g from 0 to 300Hz
- Switch rating, resistive load max. 5A 12 V DC

2A 24 V DC
1A 48V DC
0,5A 120 V DC
7A 460 V AC
50/60Hz
- Reset coil power supply max. 14 W 48V DC
760 Cover interlocking switch (delivered as option) See "8.3 Interface

description" and "8.6.7
Cover interlocking switch
(option)" on page 182
- Type Mechanical switch
- Switch rating, resistive load max. 3 A 500 V
159
8.3 Interface description 8 Technical Reference
8.3 Interface description

A/fa Laval ref. 557138, rev 3
8.3.1 General
In addition to the Connection List this document
describes limitations and conditions for safe
control, monitoring and reliable operation.
At the end of the document a function graph and
running limitations are found.
8.3.2 Definitions
Stand still (Ready for start) means:
• The machine is assembled correctly.
• All connections are installed according to
Connection List, Interconnection Diagram
and Interface Description.
Start means:
• The power to the separator is on.
• The acceleration is supervised to ensure that
a certain speed has been reached within a
certain time. See technical data.
The start procedure continues until full speed has
been reached and a stabilization period has
passed (about 1 minute).
Normal stop means:
• Stopping of the machine at any time with feed
brake applied.
• The bowl must be kept filled.
160
8 Technical Reference 8.3 Interface description
Safety stop means:

The machine must be stopped in the quickest and
safest way due to vibrations or process reasons.
Comply to following conditions:
• The bowl must be kept filled.
• Sludge ejection must not be made.
• The machine must not be restarted before the
reason for the safety stop has been
investigated and action has been taken.
• In case of emergency condition in the plant,
the machine must be stopped in a way that is
described in EN 418.
8.3.3 Component description and

signal processing
Separator motor 701

The separator is equipped with a 3-phase DOL-
started (direct on line) motor. The separator can
also be started by a Y/D starter, but then the time
in Y-position must be maximized to 5 seconds.
Vibration sensor 753 (option)

The vibration sensor is an acceleration sensitive
instrument with a mechanical switch.
Signal Processing
The vibration sensor gives an open contact when
the vibration exceeds the preset value.
If too high vibration occurs the separator must be
stopped with automatic Safety Stop.
161
8.3 Interface description 8 Technical Reference

(option)
The cover of the separator can be equipped with
an interlocking switch as option.
When the cover is closed the interlocking circuit in
the control system is closed and the separator
could be started.
Signal Processing
The circuit is closed when the frame hood of the
separator is closed.
The interlocking switch should be connected so
that starting of the motor is prevented when the
separator hood is not closed.
Discharge
Signal processing
The control system shall contain a memory
function for registration of the number of initiated
discharges.
At indication of the absence of a discharge, the
operator or the control system must initiate a new
discharge. At indication of the absence of two
consecutive sludge discharges, an alarm must be
given and action must be taken.
162
8 Technical Reference 8.3 Interface description
8.3.4 Function graph and running

limitations
--
A H
, --
B
-.... ,,
c ,
-
.... ,,
D
...... ,, ......
E
A. Stand still
-...
B. Starting mode
C. Running mode
D. Stopmode
E. Safety stop mode
163
8.4 Water quality 8 Technica/ Reference
8.4 Water quality

Alta Laval ref. 553406
General Specific requirements regarding the purity of water are necessary.

- Deposits must not be allowed to form inside the separator.
- Erosion and corrosion of the PX mechanism must also be prevented.

The four requirements below are of fundamental importance.
For test methods, contact an Alta Laval representative.

If these demands cannot be met, the water should be pre-treated in
accordance with Alta Laval's recommendations.
Alta Laval accepts no liability for consequences arising from

unsatisfactory purified operating water supplied by the customer.
Suspended particles Content of suspend substances: Less than 0,001 percentage of volume.
Turbidity-free water, solids content< 0,001 percentage of volume. Due

to the centrifugal force, any suspended particles present in the water will
separate out in the operating mechanism, causing the valves to clog
and the system to breakdown. A mere 0,001 percentage of volume
solids content in the operating water produces 1 0 ml of precipitate in two
days when using as little as 20 lit/h of operating water.
Max. particle size: 50 J.Lm.
Total hardness Less than 1 oo dH (180 mg CaC03/Iit).

If the water is hard (i.e. 1oo dH or 12,5° E), in time chalk deposits build
up around the operating mechanism including the valves. The build-up
of deposits accelerates with increased operating temperature and low
discharge frequency.
The harder the water is, the more severe these effects become.
Chloride content Less than 1 00 ppm NaCI (60 mg Cl/lit).

Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on the separator surfaces in
contact with the operating water, including the spindle. Corrosion is a
destructive process that is accelerated by increased separating
temperature, low discharge frequency, low pH and high chloride ion
concentration. A chloride concentration above 60 mg/lit is definitely not
recommended.
pH value pH >6
Increasing acidity (lower pH) increases corrosion; this is accelerated by
increased temperatures, low discharge frequency an~ high chloride ion
content.
164
8 Technical Reference 8.5 Lubricants
8.5 Lubricants
8.5.1 Lubrication chart, general

Alta Laval ref. 553216-01
Lubricating points Lubricants
Bowl spindle ball bearings and buffers are Lubricating oil as specified in "8.5.2
lubricated by oil mist Recommended lubricating oils" on page 167
Bowl spindle taper Lubricating oil (only a few drops for rust
protection)
Buffers of bowl spindle Lubricating oil
Bowl: Pastes as specified in "8.5.4 Recommended

lubricants" on page 171
Sliding contact surfaces and pressure loaded
surfaces such as lock rings, threads of lock rings, If not specified otherwise, follow the supplier's
bowl hood, and cap nut recommendation about method of application
Rubber seal rings Grease as specified in "8.5.4 Recommended

lubricants" on page 171
Friction coupling ball bearings The bearings are packed with grease and
sealed and need no extra lubrication
Electric motor (if nipples are fitted) Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Alfa Laval Lubricating Oil Groups:

• Group A oil: a high quality gear oil on
paraffin base with stable AW (anti wear)
additives.
• Group B oil: a high quality gear oil on
paraffin base with stable EP (extreme
pressure) additives.
• Group D oil: a synthetic base oil with
additives stable at high operating
temperatures.
Do not mix different oil brands or oils from
different oil groups.
Always use clean vessels when handling
lubricating oil.
165
8.5 Lubricants 8 Technical Reference
Great attention must be paid not to contaminate

the lubricating oil. Of particular importance is to
avoid mixing of different types of oil. Even a few
drops of motor oil mixed into a synthetic oil may
result in severe foaming.
Any presence of black deposits in a mineral type

oil is an indication that the oil base has
deteriorated seriously or that some of the oil
additives have precipitated. Always investigate
why black deposits occur.
If it is necessary to change from one group of oil

brand to another it is recommended to do this in
connection with an overhaul of the separator.
Clean the gear housing and the spindle parts
thoroughly and remove all deposits before filling
the new oil.
NOTE
Always clean and dry parts (also tools)
before lubricants are applied.
NOTE
Check the oil level before start. Top up when
necessary. Oil volume see "4.1.1 Ready for
start" on page 30.
It is of utmost importance to use the lubricants

recommended in our documentation. This does
not exclude, however, the use of other brands,
provided they have equivalently high quality
properties as the brands recommended. The use
of oil brands and other lubricants than
recommended, is done on the exclusive
responsibility of the user or oil supplier.
Applying, handling and storing of lubricants

Always be sure to follow lubricants
manufacturer's instructions.
166
8.5.2 Recommended lubricating

oils
Three different groups of lubricating oils are

approved for this separator.
They are designated as Alta Laval lubricating oil
groups A, Band D.
The numerical value after the letter states the
viscosity grade.
The corresponding commercial oil brands are
found in chapter "8.5.3 Recommended oil
brands" on page 168.
Ambient temperature oc Alfa Laval lubricating oil Time in operation

group Oil change interval
between +5 and +45 A/220 B/220 1 000- 1 500 h
between +2 and +65 0/220 2 000 h
Note:
• In a new installation or after change of gear
transmission, change oil after 200 operating
hours.
• When the separator is operated for short
periods, lubricating oil must be changed
every 12 months even if the total number of
operating hours is less than stated in the
recommendations above.
• Check and prelubricate spindle bearings on
separators which have been out of service for
6 months or longer.
• In seasonal operation: change oil before
every operating period.
167
8.5.3 Recommended oil brands
Alfa Laval lubricating oil group A/220

Alta Laval ref. 553218-.01
Viscosity grade VG (ISO 3448/31 04} 220

Viscosity index VI (ISO 2909) >92
Manufacturer Designation
Castro I Alpha ZN 220
Esso Standard Oil/ Teresso 220

Svenska Statoii/Exxon Terrestic 220
Lubmarine/Beijer Polytelis 220

(ELF Brand designation
according to ELF)
Mobil DTE Oil BB
Nynas TO EX 220
Optimol Olwerke Ultra 220
Q8/Kuwait (Gulf) Harmony AW 220
Shell Tellus C 220

Tellus 220
Texaco/Caltex Regal R&O 220

Paper Machine H D 220
168
Alfa Laval lubricating oil group B/220
A/fa Laval ref. 553218-02
Viscosity grade VG (ISO 3448/31 04) 220

Bel Ray 100/06-220
BP Energol GR-XP 220
Castro I Alpha SP 220
Chevron Ultragear 220

(NL Gear Compound 220)
DIN 51517, part 3 CLP 220
Esso Standard Oil/ Spartan EP 220

Svenska Statoii/Exxon
Fina/Petrofina Giran 220
ISO/DIS 6743/6 L-CKC-220
Lubmarine/Beijer Epona Z 220

according to ELF)
Mobil Mobilgear 630

(Mobilgear SHC 220)
Nynas (GL 220)
Optimal Olwerke Optigear BM 220 (5150)
08/Kuwait (Gulf) Goya 220
Shell (Lorina 220)

Omala220
Delima HT 220
Texaco Meropa 220
Soviet (GHOST-) Standard IGP-152 according to TU 38.101413-90
( ) = available in a few countries
169
Alfa Laval lubricating oil group D/220
Viscosity grade VG (ISO 3448/31 04) 220

Alta Laval 542690-80 20 litres

542690-81 4 litres
542690-82 208 litres
542690-83 1 litres
BP Enersyn HTX 220
Castro I Alpha Syn T 220
Lubmarine/Beijer Epona SA 220

according to ELF)
Mobil SHC 630
Shell Delima HT 220

Paolina 220
170
8.5 Lubricants
8 Technical Reference
8.5.4 Recommended lubricants
Pastes and bonded coatings for non-food

applications
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No. Application
Gleitmolybdan Gleitmo 805 K or

805 K varnish 901
Gleitmo Paste G rapid 537086-04
Dow Corning Molykote paste 1000 537086-02 All pressure

spray D321 R 535586-01 loaded
varnish D321 R 535586-02 surfaces
Rocol Antiscuffing paste (ASP)
Klueber Wolfracoat C paste
Russian Standard VNII NP 232

Gost 14068-90
Silicone grease
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No.
Dow Corning Molykote 111 c_ompound

100 gr 539474-02
25 gr 539474-03
Gleitmolybdan Silicone paste 750
Wacker Silicone Paste P

(vacuum paste)
171
Greases for ball and roller bearings

A/fa Laval ref. 554900-01
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No.
BP Energrease MMEP2
Energrease LS2
Castro I Spheerol SW2 EP

Spheerol EPL2
Chevron Duralith grease EP2
Exxon Beacon EP2
Mobil Mobilith SHC 460

Mobilux EP2
Gulf Gulflex MP2
08 Rembrandt EP2
Shell Cailithia EP Grease T2

Alvania EP Grease 2 or R.A
SKF LGEP2 or LGMT2
Texaco Multifak AF 82
Multifak premium 2,3
Russian Standard Fiol 2M, Litol 24

TU 38.201.188
172
173
8~6 Drawings 8 Technical Reference
8.6 Drawings
8.6.1 Basic size drawing

1050
65
A. Maximum horizontal B. Maximum vertical C. Tigthening torque 20 Nm.

displacement at the in/outlet displacement at the sludge Secured with counter nut.
connections during connection during
operation ±20 mm. operation ±10 mm.
174
8 Technical Reference 8.6 Drawings
8.6.2 Dimensions of connections

Data for connections, see chapter
L
"8.2 Connection list" on page 158.
All connections to be installed non-loaded and
flexible.
~ ~
ISO-G"~
a ~~
ISO-GT~
I_
II
175
8.6 Drawings 8 Technical Reference
8.6.3 Foundations
I
I
I
i
M I
/
--------------------,
I
c
150 min.
I
2200 I
I
~ ---------------. -------------.--- ... --.- ~ I
1000 1000 E
I I
.L.___.___+ - - - _ - - . - - - . - - - - - - - I_
I~
360
23oo
L_--------------------------------------~============================~----~G
A Min. lifting capacity required when ---·-- Recommended free floor space for unloading
doing service: 100 kg when doing service
Recommended speed for lifting:
Low speed 0,5-1,5 mlmin. ----- No fixed installations within this area.
High speed 2-6 m/min.
B. Max. height of largest component incl. s Center of gravity (without motor)
lifting tool
c.
D.
4 holes 0 18 for anchorage
Center of separator bowl
B Vertical force not exceeding 10 kN/foot
E. Service side
w Horizontal force not exceeding 10 kN!foot
176
8.6.4 Electric motor

A/fa Laval ref. 552810
372
4 312
8h9
c;;~-w ~~!;., ,....

(\J
(\J
"&"&
M10
A. Max. cable diameter is 21 mm
Manufacturer ABB Motors
Manufacturers drawing MK20-92S
Standards IEC 34-1, IEC 72
Size 112M
Type MBT 112M
Weight 31 kg
Poles 4
Insulation class F
Bearings DE 6206-Z/C3 - NDE 6205-Z/C3
Method of cooling IC 41 (IEC 34-6)
Specification Totally enclosed three-phase
motor for marine service 3 l
Type of mounting Degree of

protection
0 IM 1001
0 IM 3001 IP 55
0 IM 3011 IP 55
0 IM 3031 IP 55
177
Article No Output Speed Freq Voltage Current Pow.fac 1st I 11) Therm 2l Note
kW RPM Hz v A cos <p "C
552810-01 4 1425 50 200 D 17 0,83 5,6
552810-02 4 1425 50 220 D 16 0,83 5,6
552810-03 4 1425 50 380 D 9 0,83 5,6
552810-04 4 1425 50 415 D 8,2 0,83 5,6
552810-05 4 1425 50 440 D 7,8 0,83 5,6
552810-Q6 4 1425 50 500 D 6,8 0,83 5,6
552810-07 4,6 1725 60 220 D 18 0,83 5,6 D-par

440 D 9 D-ser
552810-08 4,6 1725 60 230 D 18 0,83 5,6 D-par

460 D 8,6 D-ser
552810-09 4,6 1725 60 575 D 6,9 0,83 5,6 GSA-

plated
552810-10 4 1425 50 380 D 9 0,83 5,6

4,6 1725 60 440 D 9 5,6
1) 1st ll=starting current /rated current at direct

on line starting.
2) Thermistors tripping temperature if applicable
3l The motors can be designed to fulfill requirements of
following Classification Societies:
Lloyds Register of shipping (LRS) (Essential Service)
Det Norske Veritas (DnV) (Essential Service)
Germanischer Lloyd (GL) (Essential Service)
Bureau Veritas (BV) (Essential Service)
American Bureau of shipping (ABS) (Essential Service)
Registro Italiano Navale (RINA) (Essential Service)
USSR Register of Shipping (RSU) (Essential Service)
Japanese Classification
Society (NKK) (Essential Service)
Required classification society must always be specified

when ordering. Factory test certificate to be enclosed at the
delivery.
Rated output (kW) valid for temp-rise max. 90 "C.
178
179
8.6.5 Machine plates and safety

labels
8 ___j
1
1. Machine plate
• k Alfa Laval •
Separator LOPX 705SFD-30
·~~~"""$16.0#1-~1111
::::::::::::::
Manufacturing serial No. I Year xxxx
::.:.::m::m::~;
§§i§i#i~~g§~r· Product No. 881149-02-02
:=::::::::::::::::;;.
Machine top part 548665-03
• •
Bowl 549304-02
Machine bottom part 540224-13/14 (50/60 Hz)
Max. speed (bowl) 7607 r/min. (50 Hz), 7540 r/min. (60 Hz)
Direction of rotation (bowl)

Speed motor shaft 1500 r/min. (50 Hz), 1800 r/min. (60Hz)
El. current frequency 50/60Hz
Recommended motor power 4kW

Max. density of feed 1100 kg/m 3
Max. density of sediment 1531 kg/m 3

Max. density of operating liquid 1000 kg/m 3
Process temperature min./max. 0/100 oc
180
3. Safety label
Text on label:
DANGER
Read the instruction manuals before installation,
operation and maintenance. Consider inspection
intervals.
•
Failure to strictly follow instructions can lead to
fatal injury.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and
keep bowl filled with liquid during rundown.
Out of balance vibration will become worse if bowl
is not full.
Separator must stop rotating before any
dismantling work is started.
4. Name plate
r.~ Alfa Laval
6. Arrow
Indicating direction of rotation of horizontal driving
device.
8. Power supply frequency
50Hz
I 60Hz
181
8.6.6 Vibration sensor (option)

A/fa Laval ref. 557311, rev. 1
Type: Mechanical velocity

®
Switch rating, voltage: Max. 460 V AC
Reset coil: 24 V DC, 48 V DC,
117 V AC 60Hz
Interconnection diagram
For other technical information see chapter
1-2 Reset coil
"8.2 Connection lisr' on page 158 and "8.3 3 No
Interface description" on page 160. 4 Common
5 NC
6-8 Heater
R Reset button

(option)
Alta Laval ref. 557311, rev. 1
Switch rating, voltage: Max. 500 V -~
current: Max. 3 A 13 0 'S. 0 14 l

i
For other technical information see chapter

"8.2 Connection lisr· on page 158 and
"8.3 Interface description" on page 160.
21 0 u 22
1---0 I
182
8 Technical Reference 8. 7 Storage and installation
8.7 Storage and

installation
8.7.1 Storage and transport of

goods
Storage
Specification
Upon arrival to the store, check all components
and keep them:
1. Well stored and protected from mechanical
damage and theft.
2. Dry and protected from rain and humidity.
3. Organized in the store in such a way that the
goods will be easily accessible when
installation is about to take place.
A separator can be delivered with different types

of protection:
• Fixed on a pallet.
The separator must be stored in a storage
room well protected from mechanical damage
and theft and also dry and protected from rain
and humidity.
Fixed on a pallet
.-
• In a wooden box which is not water tight.
• oy,~
The separator must be stored dry and i,r------~

¥ ~~
protected from rain and humidity.
\~
i~
~-----------------~~
In a wooden box which is not water tight
183
8. 7 Storage and installation 8 Technical Reference
• In a special water-resistant box for outdoor

storage.
The separator and its parts have been treated
with an anti-corrosion agent. Once the box
has been opened, store dry and protected
from rain and humidity.
The packaging for outdoor storage is only to
special order.
In a special water-resistant box tor outdoor storage
184
Transport
Specification
• During transport of the separator, the frame
hood and bowl must always be removed
from the machine.
• When lifting a separator it must always be
hung securely. See chapter "5.5 Lifting
instructions" on page 77.
WARNING
Crush hazards
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.
• During erection, all inlets and outlets to

separators and accessories must be covered
to be protected from dirt and dust.
8.7.2 Planning of installation
Introduction
The space required for one or more separators
can be calculated by consulting the drawings in
the chapters "8.6.1 Basic size drawing" on page
17 4, "8.6.3 Foundations" on page 176 and
instructions for ancillary equipment, electrical and
electronic equipment and cables.
Check the drawings when planning the installation
185
Important measurements
Important measurements are the minimum lifting
height for lifting tackle, shortest distance between
I
driving motor and wall, free passage for
dismantling and assembly, maintenance and
operation.
' I
~~~l1
Plan your installation with sufficient room for the
controls and operation so that instruments are
easily visible. Valves and controls must be within
convenient reach. Pay attention to space Suitable space must be obtained for the maintenance
requirements for maintenance work, work work
benches, dismantled machine parts or for a
service trolley.
Space for separator

The separator shall be placed in such a way that
suitable space for maintenance and repair is
obtained.
Specification
• See chapter "8.6.3 Foundations" on page 176
for the service space required with the
separator installed.
Recommendation
• The spanner for the large lock ring should
have sufficient space to make a complete
turn without touching any of the ancillary
equipment surrounding the separator.
Lifting height for transport of bowl

Specification
• A minimum height is required to lift the bowl,
bowl parts and the bowl spindle, see chapter
"8.6.3 Foundations" on page 176.
Recommendation
• When two or more separators are installed,
the lifting height may have to be increased to
enable parts from one separator to be lifted
and moved over an adjoining assembled
separator.
186
Space for oil changing

Specification
The plug for gearbox oil draining must not be
blocked by floor plate arrangement, etc.
Recommendation
• It should be possible to place a portable
collecting tray under the gearbox drain plug
for changing oil.
Place the separator in such a way that makes the oil

change easy
187
8.7.3 Foundations
NOTE
When lifting a separator it must always be
hung securely. See chapter "5.5 Lifting
instructions" on page 77.
Specification
• The separator should be installed at floor F
level, see chapter "8.6.3 Foundations" on
page 176.
• When a separator is installed on a ship, the
separator should be installed in such a way
that the centre line of the electric motor is
parallel with the centre line of the ship. The A
electric motor should preferably be pointing
aft.
A
• The separator must be installed on a strong
F =Forward
and rigid foundation to reduce the influence of A =Aft
vibrations from adjacent machinery.
• The foundation should be provided with a
cofferdam.
• Fit the separator frame on the foundation as
follows: 4
3 1
Place the separator frame without
cushions in position.
Check that the bolts do not press against
the edges of the holes, otherwise the
elasticity of the mounting of the separator 2
frame will be impeded.
Fit height adjusting washers required.
Check that the separator frame is
horizontal and that all feet rest on the
L---------------------------------~
li
1. Vibration damper, upper
foundation. 2. Vibration damper, lower
Lift the separator frame, fit the vibration 3. Nut
4. Lock nut
dampers (1, 2), lower and check that the
bolts do not press against the edges of
the holes.
Tighten nut (3) with 20 Nm. Hold firmly
and secure with the lock nut (4). Repeat
for the other frame feet.
188
Reader's Comment Form
Dear reader,
It is our ambition to produce as useful and instructive manuals as possible. Should you have any
comments (positive or negative) regarding this manual, please note them down and send them to
us. You can do this by copying this page and sending it by fax, or you could mail it, or hand it over
to your local Alta Laval representative.
Alta Laval Separation AB, Separator Manuals, dept. SKL, S-147 80 Tumba, Sweden.
Fax: +46 8 53065029.
Your name: Company:
Address: City:
Country:
Product: LOPX 705SFD-30 Book No.: 1270717-02 V1
Date:
Yes No
Is it easy to find what you are looking for by using the table of contents? 0 0
Are the chapter and section headings clear and adequate? 0 0
Is the information presented in the correct order for your purposes? 0 0
Does the information in the manual cover your needs? 0 0
Is it easy to understand the instructions in the manual? 0 0
Is the terminology sufficiently explained? 0 0
Are the illustrations easy to understand? 0 0
Your comments:
189
190
Order Form
If you wish to order extra copies of this manual, please copy this page and give it to your local
Alta Laval representative, who will advise you of current prices.
Your local Alta Laval representative will also be able to help you with information regarding any
other manuals.
Your name: Company:
Address: City:
Country:
Product: LOPX 705SFD-30 Book No.: 1270717-02 V1
Quantity: Date:
Comments:
191
192
Index
A External cleaning 78
Flexible plate in coupling 68
Assembly Guide surfaces 55, 70
Bowl body and operating mechanism 112 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc 57
Bowl hood and disc stack 105 Lifting instructions 77
General directions 94 Lock ring- priming 71
Horizontal driving device 140 Lock ring- wear and damage 73
lnleUoutlet, frame hood 99 Oil change procedure 85
Operating water device 116 Oil paring disc- height position 73
Tools (special) 95 Operating mechanism 60
Vertical driving device 128 Operating paring disc- height position 74
Operating slide 60
B Repair of galling 56
Bearings Sliding bowl bottom 61
Maintenance directions 88 Springs for operating mechanism 62
Replacement on bowl spindle 122 Vibration analysis 86
Replacement on horizontal driving device 134 Vibration switch - adjustment of set point 87
Bowl 47 Vibration switch -function check 62
Assembly 105,112 Worm wheel and worm - wear of teeth 82
. Dismantling 102, 110 Clarifier
Bowl discs Definition 28
Cleaning 80 Description 25
Disc stack pressure 52 Cleaning
Bowl spindle CIP-system 81
Assembly 128 Cleaning agents 78
Dismantling 124 Cleaning of bowl discs 80
Brake External cleaning 78
Design and function 18 Connection list 158
Renewing of friction pad 64 Connections
Description 160
c Dimensions
Corrosion
175
48
Centrifugal separation 16 Coupling
Check points Function 19
Ball and roller bearings 88 Renewing of friction pads 66
Before shutdowns 91 Cover interlocking switch (option)
Bowl hood seal ring 47 Design and function 20
Bowl spindle - radial wobble 63 Drawing 182
Bowl spindle cone and bowl body nave 63 Cracks 51
Brake 64
Buffer springs and ball bearing housing 65 D
Cleaning agents 78
Cleaning of bowl discs 80 Daily checks 41
Corrosion 48 Density of feed 156
Coupling friction pads 66 Disc 52
Cover interlocking switch 62 Disc stack pressure 52
Cracks 51 Dismantling
Disc stack pressure 67 Bowl body and operating mechanism 110
Dosing ring 53 Bowl hood and disc stack 102
Erosion 53 General directions 94
193
Horizontal driving device 136
Inlet/outlet, frame hood 97
Operating water device 117 Installation 185
Tools 95 Interface
Vertical driving device 124 Definition 28
Description 26
Drawings
174 Interface description 160
Basic size drawing
Cover interlocking switch (option) 182 Intermediate service 37.42
Dimensions of connections 175
Electric motor 177 L
Foundations 176 Lifting instructions 77
Machine plates and safety labels 180 Lock ring
Vibration sensor (option) 182 Priming 71
Wear and damage 58
E Lubricants
Lubrication chart, general, oil groups 165
Electric motor
Oil change interval 167
Drawings. See Motor 177
Oil change procedure 85
Emergency stop. See Safety stop
Oil level 85
Erosion 53
Recommended greases 172
Exploded views
Recommended lubricating oils 167
Bowl body and operating mechanism 109
Recommended oil brands 168
Bowl hood and disc stack 101
Recommended pastes and bonded coatings 171
Horizontal driving device 134
Volume of lubricating oil 157
Inlet/outlet, frame hood 96
Operating water device 116
Vertical driving device 122 M
Machine plates and safety labels 180
F Main parts 18
Maintenance intervals 38
Foundations
176 Maintenance logs
Drawing 46
188 3-year Service (3S)
Installation 41
Daily checks
Frame feet 42
188 Intermediate Service (IS)
Installation 44
46 Major Service (MS)
Replacement 41
Oil change
Friction coupling
Maintenance, general information
Function 19
Ball and roller bearings 88
Before shutdowns 91
G Cleaning 78
Gear Lifting instructions 77
Number of teeth 156 Maintenance intervals 37
Wear of teeth 82 Maintenance procedure 39
Guide surfaces Oil change procedure 85
Intermediate Service 55 Service kits 40
Major Service 70 Vibration analysis 86
Repair of galling 56 Major service 37.44
Materials 156
H Metal surfaces
Cleaning and cleaning agents 78
Horizontal driving device Corrosion 48
Assembly 140 Cracks 51
Dismantling 136 Erosion 53
Motor
Cleaning 78
Coupling 68
Drawing 177
194
Power consumption 156 Start 31
Stopping procedure 33
N Storage 183
Noise 156
T
0 Technical data 156
Throughput
Oil. See Lubrication Capacity 156
Operation 30 Definition 28
Transport 183
p
Trouble tracing- mechanical functions
Power consumption 156 Noise 147
Power transmission 19 Retardation time too long 149
Process capacity 156 Separator vibrates 146
Purification Smell 147
Definition 28 Speed too low 147
Starting power too high 148
R Starting power too low 148
Starting time too long 148
Ready for start 30 Water in worm gear housing 149
Revolution counter Trouble tracing- separating functions
Design and function 20 Bowl fai Is to open 151
Number of revolutions 156 Bowl opens accidentally 151
Unsatisfactory separation result 152
s Trouble tracing- vibration switch
Safety Instructions Impossible to adjust setpoint to obtain tripping 153
9
Separation Vibration switch does not reset 153
Basic principles 16
Process main parts 22
v
Separating function trouble tracing 150 Vertical driving device
Separation temperatures 17 Assembly 128
Separator Vibration
Basic size drawing 174 During start 31
Brake 19 Safety stop 34
Connection list 158 Trouble tracing 146
Foundations 176 Vibration analysis 86
Installation planning 185 Vibration switch (option)
Interface description 160 Adjustment of setpoint 87
Lifting instructions 77 Description and signal processing 161
Main parts 22 Drawing 182
Mechanical power transmission 19 Function check 62
Normal stop 33 Trouble tracing 153
Overview 18
Ready for start
Running
30 w
33
Safety stop 34 Warning signs 13
Sensors and indicators 20 Water
Separating function 25 Water quality specifications 164
Sludge discharge cycle 26 Weight 156
Start 31 Worm gear
Storage and transportation 183 Function and description 19
Technical data 156 Number of teeth 156
Service instructions. See Check points Wear of teeth 82
Service kits 40
Shutdown 91
195
196
ALFA LAVAL TUMBA AB
LOPX 705SFD-30
Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio

Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas
Ersatzteilkatalog sobressalentes
Catalogue de pieces de Varaosaluettelo
rechange KaTaA.oyoa
QVTQAAOKTLKWV
Catalogue de piezas de
recambio Reserveonderdelen-
KaTanor 3anacHbiX
catalogus
YaCT9111 Reservedelskatalog
Product No. 881149-02-02/1

Book No. 1270718-02 Rev. 5
Alfa Laval
A L F A L A V A L
LOPX 705SFD-30
Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio

Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas
Ersatzteilkatalog sobressalentes
Catalogue de pieces de Varaosaluettelo
rechange KaTaAoyocr
GVTGAAGKTlKWV
Catalogue de piezas de
recambio Reserveonderdelen-
KaTanor 3anacHbiX
catalogus
~acTeVI Reservedelskatalog
Product No. 881149-02-0211

Book No. 1270718-02 Rev. 5 Alfa Laval
Alta Laval Tumba AB
Separator Manuals, dept. PPDM
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
Printed in Sweden, 01-07
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2001

This publication or any part thereof may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 Read this first 5
1.1 General information 7
1.2 Translation list 19
2 Machine bottom part 22

2.1 Driving device 24
2.2 Revolution counter 28
2.3 Guard 30
3 . Separator bowl 32
4 Machine top part 34

4.1 Paring disc device 36
4.2 Feed and discharge device 38
4.3 Feed and discharge piping 40
4.4 Connection hose 42
5 Parts for motor mounting, 0 180 mm 44
6 Parts for motor mounting, NEMA standard 46
7 Set of tools 48
8 Vibration monitoring unit 50
9 Lock switch 52
10 Intermediate service kit 54
11 Major service kit 56
12 Service kit for foundation feet 58
13 Toolbox 60
14 Cross reference list 63
3
4
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
Alfalaval
r:=-1 The name plate- the guide for finding the correct spare part numbers.
L:.::.J See also Warnings in chapter "1.1 General information" on page 7.
r::-1 Maskinskylten- en guide till det ratta reservdelsnumret.
L.::.J Se aven Varningar i kapitel "1.1 Allman information" pa sidan 8.
~ Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer.
L..::.J Siehe auch Warnhinweise in Kapitel "1.1 Allgemeine lnformationen" auf Seite 9.
r-;:--) La plaque de Ia machine - un guide pour trouver le numero de piece de rechange correct.
~ Voir ace propos les mises en garde du chapitre "1.1 Informations generales" en page 10.
r-::1 La placa-marca de Ia maquina- gula del numero correcto del repuesto. Consulte tambien las
L..::...J Advertencias del capitulo "1.1 lnformaci6n General" en Ia pagina 11.
r.::J <l>111pMeHHaA Ta6111!1YKa MaWI!1Hbl - yKa3aTellb npaBI!111HOrO HOMepa 3anaCHOIII YaCTI/1.
L.::.J CM. TaiOKe npeAynpe>KAeHI!1A B mase "1.1 06ll.ll!1e cseAeHI!1A" Ha cTpaHII1t..te 12.
(""";"! La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi.
~ Vedere anche le Avvertenze nel capitola "1.1 lnformazioni generali" a pagina 13.
r::;--) A placa do fabricante da maquina- urn guia do numero correto das partes sobressalentes.
L..!:.J Consultar tambem os Avisas no capitulo "lnformac;ao Geral 1.1" da pagina 14.
~ Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon.
~ Katso myos kappaleessa 1.1 sivulla 15 olevaa kohtaa "Yieiset tiedot ".
r-:;-) H mvaK((Sa TllC: llllXOVi}c; e:ivm 0 o<Snyoc; TOU OWOTOU OVTOAAQKTlKOU. ~E:(TE; e:n(OllC: nc;
~ npOE:l<SOnOli}OE:lC: TOU KE:<paAa(ou "1.1 rENIKEI: n/\HPO<l>OPIEI:", OTll m;A.((Sa 16.
r-:;-1 Het gegevensplaatje- een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer.

~ Zie oak Waarschuwingen in hoofdstuk "1.1 Algemene informatie", op biz. 17.
~ Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer.
~ Se ogsa under Advarsler i kapitel "1.1 Generelle oplysninger'' pa side 18.
5
LOPX 705SFD-30
6
1 Read this first
1.1 General information
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alta Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alta Laval cannot accept responsibility for the failure of a
separator equipped with non-original spare parts. We guarantee the
quality and reliability of our products.
6 WARNINGB
When changing certain parts in the separator bowl assembly, the

vibration level may increase. This can result in shorter life time of
components like rolling bearings and gears. If severe unbalance
occurs, the rotating bowl assembly can come into contact with the
frame causing damage to equipment and injuries to personnel.
It is strongly recommended that the exchange of parts is
supervised by an Alfa Laval service engineer. Alta Laval
assumes no liability for damage to property or injury to personnel
resulting from unauthorized installation of those parts.
6 WARNINGC
Certain bowl parts carry milling marks from the balancing of the
complete separator bowl. These parts must not be replaced
without rebalancing the complete bowl. The rebalancing should
be made by an Alfa Laval service shop.
7
LOPX 705SFD-30
Folj ditt kvalitetsUinkande genom att endast anvanda Alta Laval

originalreservdelar. ·
Kom ihag att Alta Laval inte tar nagot ansvar tor fel pa en separator
som innehaller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar kvaliteten och
driftsakerheten hos vara egna produkter.
.6. VARNING B
Om vissa delar i separatorkulan byts ut, kan vibrationsnivan

komma att oka. Oetta kan i sin tur leda till fOrkortad livslangd pa
t.ex. lager och vaxlar. Om kraftiga vibrationer uppstar, kan den
roterande kulan komma att sla i stativets delar, vilket kan medtora
allvarlig maskin- och personskada. Detar dartor av .stor vikt att
utbyte av kulans delar overvakas av en serviceingenjor fr~n
Alfa laval. Alta Laval tar inget ansvar tor maskin- eller
personskador som kan uppkomma pa grund av att delar bytts ut
av icke auktoriserad personal.
.6. VARNING C
Vissa av separatorkulans delar har urfrasta spar som resultat av

balansering av hela kulan. Dessa delar kan inte bytas ut utan att
en ombalansering av kulan gors. For att basta resultat ska
uppnas, ska den kompletta kulan sandas till en Alta Laval
serviceverkstad tor ombalansering.
8
1 Read this first
Sichern Sie sich lhren Anspruch auf Qualitat durch ausschlieBiiche

Verwendung von original Alta Laval Ersatzteilen.
Beachten Sie bitte, daB Alta Laval keine Verantwortung fUr den
Ausfall eines Separators ubernimmt, der mit Nicht-Originalteilen
ausgestattet ist. Wir garantieren tor die Qualitat und Zuverlassigkeit
unserer Produkte.
~ WARNUNGB
Durch den Austausch bestimmter Teile in der Separatortrommei-

Baugruppe, kann ihr Schwingungspegel steigen. Dies kann zu
einer kurzeren Lebensdauer von Teilen, wie z.B. Walzlagern und
Getrieben, tuhren. Bei einer schweren Unwucht kann die
rotierende Trommelbaugruppe in Kontakt mit dem Gestell kom-
men, was zu Beschadigungen der Ausrustung oder Personenver-
letzungen fUhren kann. Es wird dringend empfohlen, den
Austausch von einem Alfa Laval Service-lngenieur beauf-
sichtigen zu lassen. Alta Laval ubernimmt keine Haftung tor
eine Geratebeschadigung oder Personenverletzung aufgrund
einer ungenehmigten Montage dieser Teile.
~ WARNUNGC
Bestimmte Trommelteile haben Frasmarken vom Auswuchten

der kompletten Separatortrommel. Diese Teile durfen nicht ohne
eine Neuauswuchtung der kompletten Trommel ausgetauscht
werden. Die Neuauswuchtung sollte in einer Alta Laval Service-
werkstatt erfolgen.
9
LOPX 705SFD-30
Respectez votre engagement de qualite en utilisant toujours des

pieces de rechange d'origine Alta Laval.
Attention, Alta Laval decline toute responsabilite en cas de panne
d'un separateur equipe de pieces de rechange qui ne sont pas
d'origine. Nous garantissons Ia qualite et Ia fiabilite de nos produits.
6 AVERTISSEMENT B
Le remplacement de certaines pieces du bol du separateur risque

d'augmenter le niveau de vibrations, et done de reduire Ia duree
de vie des composants tels que les paliers a roulements et les
engrenages. En cas de desequilibre trop important, le bol en
rotation risque d'entrer en contact avec des pieces du bati,
provoquant ainsi des deteriorations de l'equipement et des
blessures du personnel. Nous vous incitons tortement a faire
realiser le remplacement sous Ia surveillance d'un technicien
de maintenance Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval n'assume aucune
responsabilite en cas de deterioration du materiel ou de blessure
du personnel resultant d'une installation non approuvee de ces
pieces.
6 AVERTISSEMENT C
Certaines pieces du bol presentent des marques de reperage

effectuees lors de l'equilibrage du bol du separateur. II ne taut
pas remplacer ces pieces sans a voir au prealable procede a un
nouvel equilibrage de !'ensemble du bol. Cet equilibrage doit etre
realise dans un atelier de reparation Alta Laval.
10
1 Read this first
Proteja su compromise con Ia calidad utilizando siempre repuestos

originales Alta Laval.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta ninguna responsabilidad por el
fallo de una separadora equipada con repuestos no originales.
Alta Laval garantiza Ia calidad y Ia fiabilidad de sus productos.
~ ADVERTENCIA B
Cuando se cambian ciertas piezas del conjunto del rotor de Ia

separadora, puede que se produzca un aumento del nivel de
vibraciones, lo que puede provocar un desgaste de algunos com-
ponentes, como los rodamientos de rodillos y los engranajes. Si
se produce un desequilibrado importante, el conjunto del rotor en
movimiento puede rozar con el bastidor, causando serios dai'ios
al equipo y al personal. Se recomienda encarecidamente que el
cambio sea supervisado por un tecnico de mantenimiento de
Alfa Laval. Alta Laval nose hace responsable de los dai'ios
materiales o dai'ios personales provocados por Ia instalaci6n no
autorizada de esas piezas.
~ ADVERTENCIA C
Algunas piezas del rotor llevan marcas estampadas para el

equilibrado del rotor complete de Ia separadora. Siempre que se
cambien estas piezas se debe equilibrar de nuevo todo el rotor,
operaci6n que debe ser realizada por un experto de un centro de
servicio Alfa Laval.
11
LOPX 705SFD-30
,O,nR o6ecne'-leHit1R Ka'-leCTBa pa6oTbl sawero o6opyAoBaHit1A

HCnOflb3YHTe TOflbKO nOAfllt1HHble 3anaCHble AeTanlt1 KOMnaHit11t1
Alta Laval..
noMHit1Te: KOMnaHit1R Alta Laval He HeCeT OTBeTCTBeHHOCTb 3a

HapyWeHit1R pa60Tbl cenapaTopa, Ha KOTOpOM ycTaHOBneHbl He
noAnlt1HHble 3anacHble AeTanlt1. Mbl rapaHT1t1pyeM Ka'-!ecTso 1t1
HaAe>KHOCTb Hawe171 npOAYK~It11t1.
nPE.QYnPE>K.QEHHE B
B cny'-lae 3aMeHbl HeKoTopbiX '-!acTeiA ycTpo171cTsa 6apa6aHa

cenapaTopa MO>KeT nOBbiCit1TbCR ypoBeHb Blt16pa~lt11t1.3TO MO>KeT
nplt1BeCTit1 K COKpauteHit110 CpOKa cny>K6bl KOMnOHeHTOB, TaKit1X
KaK noAwlt1nHit1Kit1 111 nplt1BOA. B cny'-lae 3Ha'-llt1TenbHoro
Alt1c6anaHca, ycTpo171cTso spautaiOu..terocR 6apa6aHa Mo>KeT
B0171Tit1 B KOHTaKT CO CTaHit1H0171, '-ITO nplt1BeAeT K cepbe3HOMY
nospe>KAeHIIIIO o6opyAoBaHit1R 1t1 TpasMaM o6cny)f(lt1Bal0u..tero
nepcoHana. HacTORTenbHO peKoMeHAyeTCR, '-IT06bl 3aMeHa
6bma npoKOHTponMposaHa MH>KeHepoM no o6cny>KMBaHMtO
KOMnaHMM Alfa Laval. KoMnaHit1R Alta Laval He HeceT Hlt1KaKo171
OTBeTCTBeHHOCTit1 3a nospe>KAeHIIIR C06CTBeHHOCTit1 lt1fllt1
TpaBMbl nepCOHana B pe3ynbTaTe Hepa3peweHH0171 ycTaHOBKit1
3Tit1X AeTane171.
nPE.QYnPE>K.QEHLIIE C
Ha HeKoTopbiX '-!acTRX 6apa6aHa nocTasneHbl OTMeTKit1 nocne

6anaHclt1pOBKit1 6apa6aHa cenapaTopa nonHOCTbiO. 3Tit1 4aCTit1
He MOryT 6b1Tb 3aMeHeHbl 6e3 OOBTOpH0171 6anaHCit1pOBKit1 BCero
ycTpoiAcTsa 6apa6aHa cenapaTopa. nosTopHaA 6anaHclt1posKa
AOfl)f(Ha 6b1Tb npolt13BeAeHa s peMOHTHOM ~eHTpe Alta Laval.
12
1 Read this first
Salvaguardate Ia qualita del vostro separatore utilizzando sempre

ricambi originali Alta Laval.
Ricordate che Ia Alta Laval non accetta alcuna responsabilita in caso
di difetti al separatore dovuti all'utilizzo di ricambi non originali. La
Alta Laval garantisce Ia qualita e l'affidabilita esclusivamente dei
propri prodotti.
~ AVVERTENZA B
In seguito alia sostituzione di alcune parti del tamburo del separa-

tore, il livello di vibrazioni puo aumentare. Questo puo compor-
tare Ia riduzione della vita utile di componenti quali cuscinetti a
rulli ed ingranaggi. In caso di elevato spostamento, il tamburo puo
entrare a contatto con le parti del telaio provocando seri danni
all'attrezzatura e lesioni aile persone. Si raccomanda caldamente
di far controllare Ia sostituzione da un tecnico di assistenza
Alfa Laval. La Alta Laval non assume alcuna responsabilita per
danni aile cose o lesioni al personale dovuti all'installazione non
autorizzata delle suddette parti.
~ AVVERTENZA C
Alcune parti del tamburo dipendono dal bilanciamento comples-

sivo del tamburo del separatore. Le suddette parti non possono
essere sostituite senza procedere ad un nuovo bilanciamento.
Per ottenere i migliori risultati, rivolgersi ad un centro assistenza
Alta Laval peril ribilanciamento dell'intero gruppo.
13
LOPX 705SFD-30
Preserve o seu compromisso com a qualidade utilizando sempre

peQas originais Alfa Laval.
Nao se esquec;;a de que a Alta Laval nao assume quaisquer
responsabilidades pela avaria dum separador que nao esteja
equipado com pec;;as originais. Por isso, asseguramos a garantia da
qualidade e fiabilidade dos nossos produtos.
6 AVISOB
Ao mudar determinadas peQas no con junto do rotor da separa-

dora, podera provocar urn aumento da vibrac;;ao. Tal podera origi-
nar a reduc;;ao do tempo de durac;;ao dos componentes, tais como
rolamentos de roletes e engrenagens. Caso se verifique urn
desequiHbrio acentuado, o con junto do rotor girat6rio podera
entrar em contacto com a estrutura, vindo a provocar danos no
equipamento e ferimentos pessoais. Recomenda-se vivamente
que a substituic;;ao de pec;;as seja vistoriada por um tecncico de
servi~o da Alta Laval. A Alfa Laval nao assume qualquer
responsabilidade por danos em bens ou ferimentos pessoais
resultantes da instalayao nao autorizada daquelas peQas.
6 AVISOC
Determinadas partes do rotor contem marcas de atrito do bal-

anceamento do rotor do separador completo. Estas pec;;as nao
devem ser substituidas sem reequilibrar o rotor completo.
0 reequilibro deve ser executado por uma centro de assistencia
Alfa Laval.
14
1 Read this first
Varmista kayttamiesi tuotteiden laatu kayttamalla aina aitoja ja

alkuperaisia Alta Laval -varaosia.
Muista, ettei Alta Laval voi vastata sellaisen separaattorin
toimintahairiosta, jossa on kaytetty muita kuin alkuperaisia varaosia.
Me takaamme omien tuotteidemme laadun ja luotettavuuden.
~ VAROITUSB
Kun separaattorin kuula-asennelman tiettyja asia vaihdetaan, sen

tarinan taso voi kasvaa. Tama voi johtaa joidenkin osien, kuten
vierintalaakereiden ja hammasvaihteiden, kayttoian lyhenemi-
seen. Jos asennelma joutuu pahasti epatasapainoon, pyoriva
kuula-asennelma voi koskettaa runkoa ja aiheuttaa laite- ja henki-
lovahinkoja. Suosittelemme, etta Alfa Lavalin huoltoinsinoori
valvoo vaihtoa. Alta Laval ei ota vastuuta omaisuudelle tai henki-
lokunnalle aiheutuneista vahingoista, mikali ne johtuvat naiden
osien vaarin suoritetusta asennuksesta.
~ VAROITUSC
Tietyissa kuulan osissa on merkinnat koko separaattorikuulan

tasapainotuksesta. Naita osia ei saa vaihtaa ilman, etta koko
kuula tasapainotetaan. Tasapainotus on annettava Alfa Laval-
korjaamon hoidettavaksi.
15
9~
"IBABl BJI'V'
:,1..u Odll\;1>1 Q>lllDOn3>101113 Ol 9110 01011Q>I 3D 131\JA. 01\
1311;ld11 Llmrl91)nDoA.n]oAo113 H ·odl,uDld(T)XDlQ no1. nOAQ11rlnl
no1. ::,olorll,uDnD no1. nodll'(>~9'(0 LlmrleQlDoA.n] 13AJA.OI\O~
01\ :,)d(T)X l\(l090lDOlO>Illi\O 01\ 1311;ld11 I\3Q OlOril,Ud0~3
01. Qln';f ·odl,umd(T)XDlQ no1. noAQ11rlnl no1. ::,olorll,uDno
no1. nodlly>'9'(0 llDlrlet;nDoA.n] l.u 9110 ::,olor1DJd0)3d<b
ltAXJ Anod;3<b noAQ11rlnl no1. o1.orll,udo~3 OA;lrlDldQ
0 HXO~OdU
w
·oriOlQ OA;lriUlOQ01Dn0~3 l.lrl
911 D J$T)lQrlltld0~3 1\(T)l /\(~UnO ::,Ltoltljl90110l (T)A.9'( (lO>Illl(T)DOd11
nol 9rlDuorlnod1. mA. l,t :,;Jlrlll] :,jl>l1'(n mA. UA(l9n3 o)rlrlo>~
13d;J<b A3Q IBAel BJIV H ·leAB1 BJIV ~lu ~Oli1ADXI..u1luh3'l9JU3
1\lU 9un 1D~I\OAJA Dl\ 13U~du l\00~'9r11.&~dD33 ~~AD'{'{D
3~0U\IQD310UO 10 ·(lO>Ill1(T)DOd11 no1. 9rlouorlnod1. 10>1
orlltAQXltrl OlD ::,;31rllt) ::,Oli\~'(O>IOd11 '010)0'(11 Ol 3r1 l,td>0113 3D
139'(jl OJ\ pdo11rl noAt;>11rlnl no1. orllilD(lD OA3r19<b3dlD1d3IJ 01.
·::,uD1r19QlDoA.n'2 ::,Ltrh13'('(;J ::,l,tdogoo ltD(T)l11Jd3u 3:r ·m]QAodA.
10)1 I\Qr13'(nOd ::,(T)U9 'J\(T)lt;>rlltld0~3 1\(T)l ::,l,t(T)) D13>1dt;>1Q
l.td31.9d>11rl OrlD3'(;1l0lJO 1\0D 13Xjl 01\ pdourl 91.n';t "J39U~no
01\ pdoUrll\~rlDOQOd>l ltr19QlD Ll 'odl,UDld(T)XDlQ nOl nOI\QUrlnl
nol orlltlD(lD OlD OlOril,tld0~3 01\;lrlDldO 3l3JQ'('(O 1\01.0
8 HXO~OdU
w
·:,orl I\(T)li\9).0d11
1\(T)l. O)l.DlllOl~O 1\Ul. 10>1 Ol.Ul910ll 1\Ul. 31.DOrl~nA.A.3 "Q>Ill>IO'('(Ol.l\0
Q>IUA39no 3rl ::,oA;JrlD1'(110~3 101$3 A3Q noiJ odl,tJ.Dld(T)XDlQ ltgQ'(g Lll
mA. ltA(l9n3 131\t;>grlo'(oAo A3Q IBAel BJ.IV Lt 119 3rlno]JrlneA311n ::,o:r
"jBI\Bl BJI'V' Q>lll>IO'('(Ol.l\0 DlDI,tAA. 3l0li\Q11
::,ol.I\~10IJOr11DltdX Ollt1.91011 mA. :,no l,tDn3r1DjlQ lt1. 31.D)'(OIDDD1V
0
Ot-O::JS90L Xd07
1 Read this first
Doe geen concessies aan kwaliteit en gebruik altijd originele

Alfa Laval-reserveonderdelen.
Wij wijzen u erop, dat Alfa Laval geen verantwoordelijkheid kan
aanvaarden voor defecten aan een separator die is uitgerust met niet-
originele reserveonderdelen. Wij garanderen de kwaliteit en de
betrouwbaarheid van onze producten.
~ WAARSCHUWING B
Als er bepaalde onderdelen van de separatortrommel worden

vervangen, kan het trillingsniveau veranderen. Dit kan leiden tot
een verkorte levensduur van onderdelen als rollagers en tandwie-
len. Als er sprake is van een ernstige mate van onbalans, kan de
roterende trammel in contact komen met het frame, wat kan lei-
den tot ernstige schade aan goederen of tot persoonlijk letsel.
Het is dan ook ten sterkste aan te raden om onderdelen te Iaten
vervangen onder supervisie van een onderhoudstechnicus
van Alfa Laval. Alta Laval aanvaardt geen enkele aansprakelijk-
heid voor schade aan goederen of persoonlijk letsel als gevolg
van onoordeelkundige installatie van die onderdelen.
~ WAARSCHUWING C
Op bepaalde onderdelen van de trammel zitten freesmarkeringen

van het uitbalanceren van de gehele separatortrommel. Deze
onderdelen mogen niet worden vervangen zonder dat de gehele
trammel opnieuw wordt uitgebalanceerd. Het opnieuw uitbal-
anceren moet gebeuren in een onderhoudswerkplaats van
Alfa Laval.
17
LOPX 705SFD-30
Beskyt din investering i kvalitet ved altid at anvende originale

reservedele tra Alfa Laval.
Husk at Alta Laval patager sig intet ansvar for tejl i separatorer, der er
udstyret med uoriginale reservedele. Vi indestar for vore produkters
kvalitet og driftssikkerhed.
~ ADVARSELB
Ved udskiftning at visse dele i separatorkuglen, kan vibrations-

niveauet blive fon~get. Dette kan forkorte levetiden for komponen-
ter som kuglelejer og tandhjul. I tilfrelde at kraftige vibrationer kan
den roterende separatorkugle komme i kontakt med rammedele,
hvilket kan medfme alvorlig beskadigelse af udstyr og person-
skade. Det anbefales pa det kraftigste, at udskiftningen sker
under tilsyn af en servicetekniker fra Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval
patager sig intet ansvar for ting- eller personskade som telge af
ikke-autoriseret montering at disse dele.
~ ADVARSELC
Visse kugledele er torsynet med mrerker fra afbalanceringen af

den samlede separatorkugle. Ved udskiftning at disse dele skal
der foretages en ny afbalancering af den samlede kugleenhed.
Afbalanceringen ber foretages at et Alta Laval-servicecenter.
18
1 Read this first
1.2 Translation Iist

Oversattn ingslista
Obersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
8 8
Reservdelsnummer Teii-Nr. Numero de piece Pieza No.
Antal Anzahl Quantile Cantidad
Benamning Bezeichnung Denomination Descripci6n
Anmarkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Netas
Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de maquina
Produktnr Produktnummer Numero de produit Numero de producto
Maskinblocksbenamning Bezeichnung des Denomination de partie Descripci6n de secci6n

Maschinenblocks de machine de Ia m.9quina
Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine n£ No. de secci6n de

maquina
Undergruppsbenamning Bezeichung der Denomination de Descripci6n de

Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. N£ de sous-ensemble Numero de subconjunto
Se sidan Siehe Seite Voir page Vease Ia pagina
Figurhanvisning Bildhinweise Ref. de fig. Referenda de figura
Produktnamn Produktname Nom du produit Nombre del producto
Utbyte nodvandiggor Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el

ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der necessite le reequilibrado del rotor
Tremmel reequilibrage du bol
Se separat Siehe separate Voir liste separee des Vease Ia lista de piezas
reservdelslista ErsatzteiUiste pieces de rechange separada
Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non livre comme piece No se entrega como
reservdel geliefert de rechange pieza de recambio
19
LOPX 705SFD-30
Translation list
Cnoaapb nepea.qa
lista traduzioni
lista para tradu~ao
Kaannosluttelo
0 0 0 0
AeTanbN!I Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Kon-so Quantita Quantidade Lukumaara
Ha~MeHosaH~e Descrizione Descricao Nimitys
np~Me\.laHIIIR Note Notas Huomatuksia
Maw~Ha THna Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi
ApT~Kyn No Nr.produtto No. do produto Tuotteen no
Hai!IMeHoBaH~e 6noKa Descrizione unita Descricao da unidade da Koneenosan nimitys

MaW~Hbl macchina maquina
6noK MawiiiHbl No Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no

maquina
Hai!IMeHoBaHIIIe rpynnbl Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhman nimitys
rpynna Nil Nr. sottogruppo Numero de subconjunto Alaryhman no
CM. CTpaH~~y Vedi pagina Vease Ia pagina Ks sivu
CcblnKa Ha 3CK~3 Rif. fig. Referenda de ligura Kuvaviite
Hai!IMeHOBaH~e Nome prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi

apTIIIKyna
3aMeHa Tpe6yeT La sostituzione comporta El racmbio requiere el Vaihdettaessa kuula

6anaHC111pOBKIII 6apa6aHa Ia iequilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapa inoitettava
tamburo uudelleen
CM. OTAellbHbl~ Vedi lista separata delle Vease Ia lista de piezas Katso erillista
nepel.leHb 3anacHbiX parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
l.lacTe~
He nocTasneHa sMecTe c Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como Ei loimiteta varaosana
3anaCHbiM~'-laCTRMIII ricambio pieza de recambio
20
1 Read this first
Translation list
rACI:I:API
Vertaallijst
Oversa!ttelseliste
0 0
/\pt8j..i6<; OVTaAl\QKllKoU Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer
LUvOAO H oeveelheid Antal
nt:ptypaq>ij Beschrijving Betegnelse
napaT!lpJionc; Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger
Tunoc; j..ifJXOvtlj..ICITO<; Machinetype Maskintype
Apt8jJ6c; npoi6VToc; Produktnr. Produklnr.
nt:ptypaq>ij Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse

OU'{KpoTftj..iOTO<; j..lfJXGvtl<;
Apt8J.16c; OUVKpoTftj..iOTO<; Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.

j..ITJXGvtl<;
nt:ptypmpiJ Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse

unoouyKpoTI'jJ.IGToc;
Apt91J6c; Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.

unoouyKpoTI'jj..iaToc;
Bll.tn£ O£A[~a Zieblz. Se side
napanoj..inl'j 0£ £lKOVQ Afb. ref. Figurhenvisning
Ovoj..laoia npoi6vToc; Produklnaam Produklnavn
AvTaAll.ayij anmT£l Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever ny

£navappli9J.!LOTJ herbalanceren van de afbalcering at kuglen
toopponiac; TOU kogel
Tlij..inavou
Bll.tn£ £t~LKtl 1\ioTa Vervangning vereist van Se spaat reservedelsliste

QVTaAAGKTlKWV de kogel
.l!J.t:v napa~i~£Tm we; Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som

QIHOAAQKTLKO reserveonderdeel reservedel
21
LOPX 705SFD-30
2 Machine bottom part
or
Subassembly description
540224-
Ref Part No Description -13 -14 Notes
22
A B D
~
~
® 7
@-------6
'~1
5
((p) 13
~-.4 I 14
~3 c
e·---15
E
®1---2
J<-€)
16
0 8
G
B
G
20
I
I
A
c
1
23
LOPX 705SFD-30
2.1 Driving device
or
537211-
24
------28
~6-.lA.
27~,,__ _ _ _ _ 24
23-----+ ~.:
26 ~j:
25----
1-
20 vub ~-~~~~-
-i-4~- I• :ct··l
~~----;;:),'.{·<~~ 16
~ w~tlf\-- 18
14-----4~ ~17
13--------'~
12-----
~~ 110
~118 11
g '
~~~
19---c------~~~
- ,-1 _ ____,_,~---- 22
5------
1/i~---------- 6
7-----"'""CC"~~~
~+-------8
9------~
~~~~------10
c:b-------2
~\
3 -----------'~
~....__-----4
I
25
LOPX 705SFD-30
Machine unit number or

537211-
26
2. 1 Driving device 2 Machine bottom part
54 53 51 48 46 47 44 43 42 41 40
55 52 49 45
39 38 29 36
31 30 32 34 33 35 37
I 50AA
I
! 50A
I
50
27
LOPX 705SFD-30
2.2 Revolution counter
Machine or
526712-
Ref Part No Description -81 Notes
28
2.2 Revolution counter 2 Machine bottom part
,--------1
~---4
1+----2
f-----4=~5
111111111----6
29
LOPX 705SFD-30
2.3 Guard
Machine number or
518475-
30
2.3 Guard 2 Machine bottom part
7--------------~
31
LOPX 705SFD-30
3 Separator bowl
Slotted disc stack, caulks 0,5 mm
unit number or
549304-
~=
B+C
32
3 Separator bowl
1-----20
21
1-----18
27 16
15
26
13
14
24
25
23
lA
22 9
4
3
2
~----J
5
6
7
12
10
11
33
LOPX 705SFD-30
4 Machine top part
or
548665-
34
4 Machine top part
25-------~J::'---
24 _ _ ______,.~::!:..
22 29
8
17------
14 ----~-.~~
19,-~---n<---
20
18--...J
16--..L
15--...:::::::::'....J
35
LOPX 705SFD-30
4.1 Paring disc device
or
537137-
Ref Part No Description Notes
1
2
36
4. t Paring disc device 4 Machine top part
37
LOPX 705SFD-30
4.2 Feed and discharge device
unit or
549303-
1
2
5 223406 28 0-ring
8 549266 02 Connecting housing
38
4.2 Feed and discharge device 4 Machine top part
~~-----3
-1--------1
39
LOPX 705SFD-30
4.3 Feed and discharge piping
i or
548652-
40
4.3 Feed and discharge piping 4 Machine top part
9 8
--- ·-- 1'~~~-- 7

c-e.sr---8
~~---9
'---------6
~-------- 2
41
LOPX 705$FD-30
4.4 Connection hose

524016-
42
4.4 Connection hose 4 Machine top part
-+----5
43
LOPX .705SFD-30
5 Parts for motor mounting, 0 180 mm
unit or
537295-
44
5 Parts for motor mounting, 0180 mm
5 6
3 4
45
LOPX 705SFD-30
6 Parts for motor mounting, NEMA standard

541428-
1
2
46
6 Parts for motor mounting, NEMA standard
7 5 4 3
6 2
47
LOPX 705SFD-30
7 Set of tools
or
555535-
519293 02
22 Frame hood
48
7 Set of tools
1 2 3
l- . ::-.'·ll,l'!~'h:; ·I)
[ -·
---
--=·:=-]
4 5 6
~
7 9 10
{8 J ()J • 0
11 12 13
14 15 16/17
18 19 20
21 22 23
~
·Q
,,
i
'
49
LOPX 705SFD-30
8 Vibration monitoring unit
number or
536498-
Ref Part No Description ·80 Notes
50
8 Vibration monitoring unit
1C ---------'w
51
LOPX 705SFD-30
9 Lock switch
unit number or
535874-
52
9 Lock switch
12 13
4 3 6
<-----
53
LOPX 705SFD-30
10 Intermediate service kit
i or
549321-
54
10 Intermediate service kit
55
LOPX 705SFD-30
11 Major service kit
ne unit number or
548978-
Frame top part/Frame hood

546229 01 Height adjusting ring/ Paring disc device
56
11 Major service kit
57
LOPX 705SFD-30
12 Service kit for foundation feet
or
548542-
58
12 Service kit for foundation feet
59
LOPX 705SFD-30
13 Toolbox
r--
558533-
Quantity
7 558533 10 Padlock 11 I I I I I I
60
13 Toolbox
61
LOPX 705SFD-30
62
14 Cross reference list
1104 56 2 67472 26 43 221585 05 46 7

1104 22 11 67477 24 4 221585 05 26 55
8115 30 5 67542 28 3 221706 10 32 7
8132 56 12 67844 52 2 221706 20 36 5
8132 26 34 68085 40 9 221711 13 50 5
8859 22 12 70492 44 6 22213701 34 4

S175 22 13 70915 50 1 D 223101 30 52 4
9684 56 8 70940 56 10 223101 34 34 19
9684 24 13 70940 26 31 223101 50 46 4
9699 24 11 c 71123 22 2 223101 50 34 31
20758 22 19 71126 58 6 223404 22 34 17

20758 22 23 71126 22 7 223404 22 56 20
20758 34 27 71276 36 8 223406 05 54 7
22405 34 10 71433 54 3 223406 05 34 12
27509 40 2 71433 32 10 223406 05 54 15
38159 56 13 72474 34 5 223406 29 54 11

38159 26 36 72719 48 9 223412 02 56 4
38159 26 42 72933 22 18 223412 02 24 19
38723 24 3 72933 34 26 223412 04 56 3
39518 56 17 72946 44 3 223412 04 24 22
64702 26 44 73467 42 5 223521 15 26 32

64706 56 5 74067 38 3 225304 05 48 22
64706 24 26 74067 54 12 225415 04 34 3
65232 58 74067 34 15 226214 13 24 17
65232 22 3 74067 56 19 260083 26 32 5
63
LOPX 705SFD-30
518348 01 24 16 526686 02 22 15 539030 80 48 11

518349 01 24 18 526692 02 28 2 539474 03 54 19
518431 02 24 1 526693 01 28 4 540215 01 34 25
518435 02 24 12 526694 02 28 1 541276 01 52
518436 02 24 14 526712 81 22 16 541407 02 46
518446 02 26 54 526761 01 30 546230 01 40 3

518447 80 26 52 526764 01 26 30 546949 02 36
518449 02 44 1 527981 83 26 50 548652 80 34 29
518457 01 24 23 528920 07 40 4 548695 02 34 6
518459 01 24 7 528927 01 48 10 548746 02 56 7
518470 01 54 18 535851 02 52 12 549269 80 38

518475 81 22 17 536469 80 50 1 549273 01 38 4
518476 81 30 2 536470 01 50 1A 549275 01 22 24
518478 82 30 2A 536471 01 50 1B 549303 81 34 28
.518478 82 56 18 536704 02 34 7 549308 80 48 3
518488 01 22 20 537121 02 32 6 557417 80 48 2
519293 02 48 537123 02 32 8 557423 80 48 21

519563 01 30 7 537131 02 40 7 557427 80 48 6
519607 03 34 24 537137 81 34 9 558533 10 60 7
519619 83 56 15 537139 01 24 27 558544 01 42 3
521863 01 32 14 537144 01 36 7 1760699 01 48 19
521875 01 54 8 537144 01 54 17 2210941 08 34 11
521875 01 32 25 537156 01 34 18 2210941 17 22 22
521876 01 32 27 537161 01 24 25 2210941 17 26 46
521887 02 34 22 537162 02 40 2210947 04 24 20
64
14 Cross reference list
2211725 06 26 48
2212601 06 24 28
2216241 20 34 14
2216261 01 44 2
2216261 02 46 3
65
LOPX 705SFD-30
66
b~
Alta laval
LOPX 705 Separation System
Component Description
Control Unit EPC-400

Emergency Stop
Water Transducer
Soleniod Valve Block, Water
Soleniod Valve Block, Air
Pressure Pipe Assembly
Flow Indicator
Change Over Valve
Regulating Valve
Flexible Hose, Oil
Flexible Hose, Water
Flexible Hose, Water
·· Alfa Laval Marine & Power

Printed Jul 1995
Book No. 1810197-02 V1
b~
Alfalaval
EPC-400
Control Unit
Product No. 31830-6149-1

31830-6149-2
31830-6149-3
31830-6228-1
31830-6228-2
31830-6228-3
Printed Nov 2000

Book No. 1818053-02 V4
prior notice.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your iocal Alta
Laval company.
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Contents
1 Overview 1 6.3 Location of Cable Entries 20
2 Function Description 3 6.4 Terminal Protectors 21
2.1 Application 3 7 Spare Parts 23
2.2 Working Principle 3

2.3 Design 4
2.3.1 Front Panel 4
2.3.2 Label Inside the Front Panel 5
2.3.3 Control Module 5
2.3.4 Power Supply 6
3 Operation 7
3.1 Process Operation 7

3.2 Parameter Setting 7
3.2.1 Overview 8
3.2.2 Setting Procedure 8
4 Maintenance 11
4.1 Preventive Maintenance 11
4.1.1 Lamp Test 11
4.2 Corrective Maintenance 12
4.2.1 Fuses and
Related Functions 12
4.3 Replacement of
Control Module 13
5 Technical Data 15
5.1 Specification 15
5.2 Dimensions 16
5.3 Circuit Diagram 17
6 Installation 19
6.1 Mounting 19
6.2 Cable Routing 20
1818053-02
-----· --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1818053-02
1 Overview
EPC-400 control unit is used within a

separation system for automatic control of the
separation process.
The unit is microprocessor based and
comprises output functions for control of
ancil1ary equipment and input functions for
monitoring and alarm. The EPC-400 is
programmable to suit different separator
systems and different operation conditions.
The programming can easily be adjusted to
new conditions or new experience.
1818053-02
1
! Overview EPC-400
·--------·---·------------------------------
2 1818053-02
2 Function Description
2.1 Application
The EPC-400 control unit is used in ALCAP
separation systems.
2.2 Working Principle

The EPC-400 is used for monitoring and
control of the separation process. It controls
starting, separation, sludge discharge and
stopping sequences.
The process is monitored via input signals

from sensors, etc., and an alarm is given if
preset values are exceeded.
The unit also contains a PI -controller for

temperature control which can operate ah Alfa
Laval Heatpac electric heater or a steam
heater or any other heater with control valve
(for steam I hot water /thermal oil).
The control unit can be progranuned for
different separator systems and for different
conditions within the system. The
progranuning is made by setting parameters,
such as type of equipment, temperature limits,
times, etc. Some parameters are set at
installation whilst process parameters are
easily accessible for adjustment during
operation.
1818053-02
3
2 Function Description EPC-400
2.3 Design
2.3.1 Front Panel

The front panel of the EPC-400 control unit
provides a display and LEDs (light emitting
diodes) for alarm and process information,
and push-buttons for on/off and manual 0
process control.
Four push-buttons are located to the right on

the panel. The upper three ( 1-3) are used for
process functions and the lower ( 4) is used for
alarm reset. The push-buttons are also used for
parameter selection and setting. 12 13 8 7 6
\ \ \ \ _l
On and off functions corresponding to the

push-buttons are indicated on the LEDs (6-8)
above the display. The LEDs under the display
(9-1 0) are used for alarm indications.
The five digit display (11) shows process

information during operation and alarm codes _
at certain alarms. It is also used for parameter : I I I I I I
14 15 11 9 10 5
selection and setting.
1. Heater on/off push-button
2. Control program on/off push-button
The left pan of the front panel contains two
3. Sludge discharge push-button
rows of LEDs. The upper row (12) indicates 4. Alarm reset
alarms. The alarm source is indicated on the 5. Function symbols
6. LED for heater (green)
upper schematic diagram (13).
7. LED for control program running (green)
8. LED for stop sequence running (yellow)
The LEDs in the lower row (14) indicate when 9. LED for discharge failure (red)
an output from the control unit is active. The 10. LED for common main alarm {red)
valve or other unit connected to each output is 11. Display
12. LEDs for alarm inputs (red)
indicated on the lower schematic diagram 13. Schematic diagram, alarm inputs
(15). 14. LEDs for output functions {green)
15. Schematic diagram. outputs
The schematic diagrams can be replaced in 16. Door lock
case of system changes or updates.
The front panel can be swung open like a door

by opening the lock (16) to the left.
4 1818053-02
EPC-400 2 Function Description
An on/off switch combined with a fuse is

located behind the front panel. The power is
intended to be permanently on. When work is
to be carried out in the control unit the mains
supply should be externally switched off.
2.3.2 Label Inside the Front Panel

~~!.I i i h~li
A label on the inner side of the front panel, :Pc:o!i~
serves as a quick reminder for parameter
setting in the EPC. It shows:
• the positions of the mode switch
I
'
, ~
@-t>-e)-<>- eH:~
~~
@ i
• the connection between the display and r•~
f€ir·~
~<I> 8 c~(!)
the push buttons
~· ~.bj I
• the meaning of some parameters (P)
To make use of the label you must be familiar

with parameter setting, see section
"Operation" in this manual, and parameter
values, see the "Parameter List" manual._
2.3.3 Control Module

All electronic components are grouped on two
XC
circuit boards which are mounted in a hinged
aluminium frame, forming an easily
accessible control module ( 1) inside the
X1-X3A-f~H~~r=
cabinet. The module is fastened by two
screws, making it easy to remove and service. X3B, C -+§c-1---.i'r~E~"""'~_,_~,I"'r""?~~n=;:::;
XD
X4-X6 -ti~~~~i=:==~f=!!:-~4jg
Electrical output and input connections to the
module is made by cables terminated with
5 6
multi-plugs that fit into sockets on the circuit
1. Control module
board. 2. Front circuit board
3. Mode switch
The front circuit board controls the operating 4. Display
sequences. It holds the operating push-buttons 5. Push buttons (for parameter setting)
(5, 6), mode switch (3) and display segments 6. Push buttons (for parameter selection)
F1-F3 Fuses
(4). F11.Main switch/main fuse
X-. Terminals
1818053-02 5
2 Function Description EPC-400
It also contains built-in relays, which are used

e.g. for the output signals to ancillary
components, stop signal to the separator motor
sta1ter and control signals to an optional
heater.
The rear circuit board (2b) monitors the water

transducer and coordinates the monitoring
with the operating sequences for the ALCAP
functions.
2.3.4 Power Supply

Inside the cabinet, behind the control module,
there is a mounting plate with terminals (XA), 1. Control module (folded out)
2b. Rear circuit board
power line filter (Zl) and a transformer (Tl). F1, F2 fuses
F11 Main switch/main fuse
T1 Transformer
Z1 Power line filter
XA Terminals
1818053-02
6
3 Operation
3.1 Process Operation

The process operation is described in the
"'Operating Instructions" manual.
3.2 Parameter Setting

The parameter setting is performed initially at
installation, and also when required during
operation.
How to set parameters is described below,

whjJe the meaning and values of the
parameters are described separately in the
Parameter List for each system.
The parameters are divided into two gr<?ups.

Each group begins with a code; Cl and C2.
• Process parameters (C 1): 1 - 19
• Installation, timer sequence and service
mode parameters (C2):
- Installation parameters: 20- 49
- Timer sequence parameters: 50 - 89
- Service mode parameter: 90- 95
The settings of process, installation and timer

sequence parameters are similar and are
described together, while the handling of the
service mode parameter is somewhat
different, and is described separately.
1818053-02 7
3 Operation EPC-400
3.2.1 Overview
I
The principle of parameter setting is: \
I. Set the mode selector in position P

(programming).
\
2. Select parameter number or code with the
two upper push buttons ("1" for increasing
and "2"for decreasing the number). The
number or code is shown in the left part of
the display (7).
3. Set the desired value for each parameter i
with the two lower push buttons ("3" for I l
increasing and "4" for decreasing the 7 6 :l L!.
value). The value is shown in the right part 1 Parameter selection - increase number
of the display (6). 2. Parameter selection - decrease number
3. Parameter setting - increase value
4. Parameter setting- decrease value
3.2.2 Setting Procedure 5. Mode selector
6. Parameter value indication
7. Parameter number indication
Setting of parameters is described below.
The installation parameters must be set before

the process parameters. If the installation
parameters are OK, and you just want to
change process parameters, follow the
sequence:l-3, 9, 6-7, 11-12.
m ·~
I. Open the front panel. ~~ ,. i

[!
J [ sill:!! I
...u
·~
2. Tum the mode selector to P I
(programming) position.
"Pro" flashes on the display.
"
f I I'IPJrlo;-
'
Iii
. I
i
;
'
'
/
,
~Q
/ I
"
I
3. Press the upper selection push button.

The code C 1 1 is displayed. This indicates ( ! !\P(,- ioi
process parameters.
• m
8 1818053-02
EPC-400 3 Operation
3 Operation EPC-400
10. Set rhe process parameters in the same

way as the installation parameters, see
points 6 and 7.
End of Parameter Setting

11. When all parameters are appropriately
~
adjusted, switch the mode selector to L
(local). !i I
~------------------~----------~
12. Close the front panel.
10 1818053-02
4 Maintenance
The EPC-400 has a test program for self

testing and separation system testing. For
more information, see the ''Alarms and Fault
Finding" manual.
4.1 Preventive
Maintenance
It is recommended to carry out a lamp (LED)
test once a month. No other regular
maintenance is required.
4.1.1 Lamp Test

• Press the alarm reset button for five-
seconds. (This can be done during ·
operation.)
• Check that all LEDs are lit.
1818053-02
11
4 Maintenance EPC-400
4.2 Corrective
Maintenance
4.2.1 Fuses and Related Functions

Fuses are located on the front board, the rear
board and the power terminal.
~0
0 0
G)
F13=:e;:s
F12
G~xz
cc 0
;, 0
~---48\f
~---24V
31830-6077-J
Front board (A 1)
Fuse Functions influenced Alarm
F1 10 V AC supply to the board Remote alarm
Display black (A4 when new fuse installed)
F2 20 V AC supply to the board A1-4

Analog/digital conversion A2-6
Pt-1 oo inputs C/F EEE
F3 All outputs PS42
Rear board (A2)

F2 1o V AC supply to the board A1-4
F3 20 V AC supply to the board A1-4

At restart with new fuse,
switch power ON-OFF-ON
Power terminal
F12,F13 Power to the EPC-400 Display black
12 1818053-02
EPC-400 4 Maintenance
4.3 Replacement of
Control Module
If a persistent fault is found in the control
module it must not be repaired, but must be
replaced and sent to an Alfa Laval
representative for repair.
1. Make a note of all the actual parameter
settings.
2. Switch off the power to the EPC by the
main switch on the starter.
3. Open the panel door.
4. Pull out the wire terminal sockets by hand
Remove terminals XC and XD using a
screwdriver.
Note: both terminal and sockets are marked
with terminal numbers.
):,.....
/ ---~'T!
~ ~</~:.,_·
_...--;.--- ~
-· "\
5. Remove the two screws holding the

module and fold the module out.
1818053-02 13
4 Maintenance EPC-400
6. PnU out the wire terminal sockets by hand

on the rear circuit board.
7. Lift off the control module from the

cabinet and replace it with a spare module.
+
tf+~-~- . ··-·=-a
8. Fit the spare module in reverse order.
9. Switch on the power.
10. Set the parameters to the values noted.
11. Fill in the report form on the rear of the

faulty module and send it for repair.
14 1818053-02
5 Technical Data
5.1 Specification
Mains voltage 48VAC +10%
-15%
Total power requirement During separation: max. 110 VA
During sludge discharge: max. 200 VA
Power requirement for outputs Inrush: max. 5 x 45 VA
Continuous: max. 5 x 23 VA
Frequency 50160 Hz ±5%
Max. cable area 1.5 mm2
Outputs for valves Five relays, connected for 48 V AC at delivery
Outputs for oil heater Three potential-free relays: max 0.5 A
One triac: max. 100 rnA
(If the steam control valve is applicable, two
relays are used for increase/decrease signals 24
VAC)
Motor stop function One potential-free relay: max. 50 V, l A
Alarm inputs Five potential-free contacts
One Pt -1 00 temperature sensor
One WT 200 water transducer
Temperature control inputs One for Pt -1 00 temperature sensor
Remote input signals Six potential-free contacts
Remote alarm output One potential-free relay: max. 50 V, 0.5 A
Communication One current loop, 20 rnA, one RS232 C
Fuses Built-in automatic fuse 3.0 A for power supply
combined with power switch
Fuse 1.6 A for 24 V AC supply to external
electronic units, max. total load 0.5 A
Glass fuses 250 rnA, 500 rnA, 2.5 A, 5 A
Weight 21 kg
1818053-02 15
5 Technical Data EPC-400
Ambient temperature Max. 55 oc

Degree of protection IP 65
Ref. 1762575 Rev. 11
5.2 Dimensions
nr:
-~------------------~~~-------------~~; C\ 0 ,._,.., 0
i i
I
I I
,-------------,
ir. v~
r--------------,
o
!I 0j
~·
!
r
;
I
I
I
I
II
I I
1:
i!
t c_ c...; o r : : ;
======:__==========-===:;:::-.j__j.
J
H
~~ '
~==============~.
1
'I
one
Cl
-.!
·I
-!
I i
c! )0 -~
! I ..o!
I
ooooooool.-----=. ~1I ..,,
OOOOOOOOL______J lo
I! I
I
0
'
o! ; i
oLJo I
Wi
l
[
I
-~
Ref. 1762575 Rev. 11
Article No. Type Separator type

31830-6149-1 EPC-400 FOPX
31830-6228-1
31830-6149-2 EPC-400 LOPX

31830-6228-2
31830-6149-3 EPC-400 MFPX

31830-6228-3
16 1818053-02
~
())
0
::0
(!)
:-.. 1"1-oc:e.s.sor board '-10 <AZ)
.CJ1w m
-o
(J1
w w
->.
.p:bTc. ()
I
6
X.):41 ~ ,l::.
0)
N w 10V"'C. 0
a
w )(.3:5 ,
0 0
<o F11 x.:!l:~ j
.....,
.f
10VAC
0)
Z1 I
I (")
";->
a .~ c
::0
(!)
...----,
L--------QxiA•}3y--~ 1
X3A.-4,
-·
.-+
:c:::: ~ ~ C = I 10V c
Ol .~
2~/l.aV~
A(
::;
~-r-t---+---------t----------~X~A~·~:Jr-
l
I X8X823 X3A 1 -·
Q,)
~ -::!:- xs:~o
(C
c : l2ov X.3A:2
Q1
l--81x~A:jsB==~24~V[J., ![1•2-4-V-~·....ELL..
X( (COHHON 21.VA( IN 211
3
XA: 6 48V t I
~ XB.6 .Q]:ill AC IN
•,:.
xo 1Cll'f'tON em J I
"'Proce .:S.sor boprd
-....-
( AZ.) 1 X3: B I
Xl: C l
'Proce .:s.sor bonrd (A 1)
I
~~-·1~;~-~~:~~~----------------------------l~a~~
~~-~.x~k~:s~----------------------------r_~_
~~~-------F-1_2 _________ ~-;
~~
~ILL
E3
F13
EJ
X007201A
5 Technical Data EPC-400
18 1818053-02
6 Installation
The installation instructions contain

specifications, which are compulsory
requirements, and recommendations, which
are guidelines indicating ways of improving
installation quality.
NOTE
If the specifications are not followed,

Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible
for any malfunction of the
installation.
6.1 Mounting
Recommendation
The EPC is wall-mounted by means of two
keyhole lugs and two fastening lugs. For hole
dimensions, see dimensioned drawing.
• Do not use rubber dampers when
mounting the EPC. The vibration may be
amplified instead of damped.
1818053-02
19
6 Installation EPC-400
6.2 Cable Routing
Recommendation
Correct routing inside the EPC cabinet:
• Keep cables short inside the cabinet.
• Keep signal and power cables separate.
6.3 Location of Cable

Entries
Specification
To prevent the reception of electrical noise
inside the cabinet it is essential that all cables
are routed correctly.
Cables that are to be connected to the left-

hand terminals must enter from the LEFT.
Cables that are to be connected to the right-

hand terminals must enter from the RIGHT.
Any other way of routing or mixing cables is

completely unacceptable.
20 1818053-02
EPC-400 6 Installation
-6.4 Terminal Protectors
-Specification
The terminal protectors must NOT be
removed until the separator system is about to
be commissioned.
During installation, terminal protectors shield

the EPC's circuit board against possible
damage from welding currents, etc.
Cables entering the cabinet can still be

connected to their plugs, whilst the terminal
protectors prevent the plugs being connected
to the circuit-board.
To connect the EPC control unit: Cl 10
• Remove the plugs (green) from the

terminal protectors (red).
0]
• Remove the terminal protectors. 01 10

rn
Jl~
i.<l!.
f I:
!11
I
~
'"
;r----""":
!~ !1
!I
~Om
-
c::IDJ
I:!J
8
! I
r-:
I!I ~•
J
I
I
. ,u
.,
r
I
I-
u;
•
i • ~.,
II ~J1lr
I
I !i :b
I! G
.J.J
I
-
lD
:
-- ---
OJ l 0
• Fit the plugs, with cables, on the

terminals.
1818053-02 21
6 Installation EPC-400
1818053-02
22
7 Spare Parts
;:::.,g---,loooooooJ
~ .000000001
n
<!dl
0 0
A-A
A
_,__,___
~ 0
n I I
II
I
II
II I I
I
II
II
II
I I
I
c II I
II
II
I I
I
I
II
II I I
I
II
II
u I :
0 0
! ~ B-B
Item Qty Article No. Description Remarks

1 1 31830-4553-1 Control module 1)
2 1 4900795-18 Transformer 21-48 V/10-20-24 V
3 1 31830-6431-1 Circuit breaker 3.0 A with push-pull
4 1 4901008-02 Rubber push button extension

5 1 4901156-03 Screw terminal
1 31830-5021-2 Spare parts kit, including: 1) 2)
6:1 5 4900850-21 Fuse, slow acting 2.5 A, 5x20
6:2 5 4900850-14 Fuse, slow acting 500 rnA, 5x20
6:3 5 4900850-24 Fuse, slow acting 5 A, 5x20
6:4 5 4900850-17 Fuse, slow acting 1 A, 5x20
1. Parts recommended for 3 years of operation

2. Included in delivery
1818053-02 23
7 Spare Parts EPC-400
·----------------------------------------------------------
24 1818053-02
b~
Alfalaval
Emergency Stop
Printed Jun 1997

Book No. 1818003-02 V2
,< .> ·;- · -. · .,_ ·. ·. · ,. Alta Laval Marine & Power ·· · .· -. -· I

prior notice.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local Alfa
Laval company.
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alta Laval Separation AB 1995. Printed in Sweden.
Contents
1 Operation 1
2 Installation 3
3 Technical Data 5
3.1 Specification 5
3.2 Dimensions 6
1818003-02 V2
1818003-02 V2
1 Operation
• Push the red button to disconnect the

electrical system~
• Push the red button lightly and tum

clockwise to reset the emergency stop.
The knob will then be released.
1818003-02 V2
1
1 Operation Emergency Stop
2 1818003-02 V2
2 Installation
Place the emergency stop outside the risk area

for the separator. In case a breakdown occurs
it must be possible to reach the emergency
stop without risk.
A protection device that prevents

unintentional pressing the button can be
mounted on the emergency stop.
1818003-02 V2 3
2 Installation Emergency Stop
4 1818003-02 V2
3 Technical Data
3.1 Specification
Yellow plastic enclosure and red push button

Degree of protection IP 65 to IEC 529
Ambient temperature -25 to +60°C
Nominal operating voltage 660 V AC
Nominal operating current 2.5 A at 380 V AC
Cable gland 2 connections min. 07 mm, max. 017 mm
Approvals Complying with Classification Societies/
requirements
Ref. 1763946 Rev. 2
1818003-02 V2 5
3 Technical Data Emergency Stop
3.2 Dimensions
~-~
~ l
ff I
L _j
0l7<t
<D
n
I
i
J
~I
(-$-
1
I
fh
~ ,, N
r--
~
14-
! '
$-I
i
,I..
~----------------~GL~--------------------------~:~
!i
Ref. 1763946 Rev. 2
6 1818003-02 V2
b~
Alfal.aval
WT200
Water Transducer
Product No. 31830-1770-3

31830-1770-4
Printed Aug 1997

Book No. 1818002-02 V3
· · .· · . ; A.lfa Laval Marine & Power . · · - · ·

prior notice.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local Alta
Laval company.
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
©Copyright Alta Laval Separation AB 1997.
Contents
1 Function Description 1
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Design 1
2 Fau It Finding 3
3 Maintenance 5
3.1 Cleaning the

Water Transducer 5
3.2 Replacing Ule
Oscillator Unit 6
3.3 Checking the
Transducer Value 6
4 Technical Data 7
4.1 Specification 7
4.2 Dimensions 8
5 Installation 9
5.1 Specification s 9
5.1.1 Location 9
5.1.2 Connection 9
5.1.3 Oscillator Box 9
s- Spare Parts 11
1818002-02
1818002-02
1.1 Application
The WT 200 water transducer is used to
monitor the change of water contents in the
processed oil leaving a separator. The signal
from the water transducer is processed in the
EPC control unit, and appropriate action is
initiated, depending on the status in the
separation system.
1.2 Design
The water transducer consists of two
concentric pipes (4, 5) and a box fitted ~o the
outer pipe. The box contains an oscillator unit
(2), a test circuit board (1) and connections.
The two pipes are insulated from each other
and form a circular capacitor. The transducer
is mounted in the oil pipe by flanges on the
outer pipe, and the full oil flow passes through
-e....-.- IJ ----.\.------r-rlI
,-.'\ \ \ I
3+
3 4 5
the capacitor.
1. Test circuit board
2. Oscillator unit
8. Insulators
4. Electrode (inner pipe)
5. Transducer housing (outer pipe)

The EPC supplies direct current (DC) to the
transducer. The oscillator converts the DC to a
high frequency alternating current (AC) which
is fed to the capacitor. Changes of capacitance
are detected and continuously transmitted to
and interpreted by the EPC.
1818002-02 1
1 Function Description WT200
The capacitance of the transducer capacitor

varies with the dielectric constant of the liquid
flowing through it. As the water content in the
oil increases, so does the dielectric constant,
and consequently its capacitance.
There is a large difference between the

dielectric constant of water and oil. Hence
fluctuations in dielectric constant is a very
sensitive measure of changes in water content.
Both free and emulsified water contamination
is measured.
2 1818002-02
2 Fault Finding
The EPC checks the signal from the

transducer and gives alarm if there is a fault.
The fault fmding is described in the section
"Alanns and Fault Finding".
3
1818002-02
2 Fault Finding WT200
4 1818002-02
3 Maintenance
3.1 Cleaning the Water

Transducer
If the transducer value is high, the cause can
be that dirt has clogged between the inner and
outer pipe of the transducer. Then you must
remove and clean the transducer.
1. Remove the transducer from the pipe

system preferably whithout disconnecting
the signal cable.
2. Apply suitable detergent to the transducer

electrode and housing.
3. Flush with freshwater.
4. Before remounting the transducer check

that no solids or other matter that can
cause short-circuit is stuck between the
transducer electrode and housing.
1818002-02 5
3 Maintenance WT200
3.2 Replacing the

Oscillator Unit
The oscillator unit must be replaced when the
EPC detects a transducer fault and the voltage
test indicates faulty oscillator unit (see Alarms
and Fault Finding).
The oscillator unit with test circuit board are
replaced together as a complete unit.
1. Disconnect the cables from the oscillator
terminals.
2. Loosen the centre screw and lift out the
complete unit.
3. Assemble the complete oscillator spare
part unit and reconnect the cables to the
terminals.
4. Fill in the report form and return it with
the faulty oscillator unit to Alfa Laval.
3.3 Checking the

Transducer Value
If the transducer is connected to an EPC-400,
the EPC can display the transducer value. The
value should be 120- 130 for the transducer
in air.
6 1818002-02
4 Tech·nical Data
4.1 Specification
BQdy.
Media Mineral oil
Media temperature Max. ll0°C
Max. working pressure 600 kPa (6 bar)
Max. testing pressure 1000 kPa (10 bar)
Material
Body Pressure vessel steel
Electrode Stainless steel
0-rings Viton
Insulators ~
Flanges according to DIN 2633 and JfS B2213
Connection box
Ambient temperature Max. 70°C
Enclosure IP65
Material Aluminium
Cable connection Pr 22.5/Pg 13.5 for cable 0 12.5 -15.0
Approvals applied for LR, DNV, GL, BV
Weight ?kg
Ref. 1761263 Rev. 3
1818002-02 7
4 Technical Data WT200
4.2 Dimensions
150
rp120
D"' ""'
,
0
1"'---
2
(4x) c ""o -f,r
fr
rv•
~
,__,
I
1-f
1'\
,-
~
.... /
.~
I
.J
n
u
<(
\~ 0
"'¢
'S.
-
~
300 R
~
Rei 1761263 Rev. 3
Article No. ON A B c Oscillator

(mm) (mm) (mm)
31830-1770-3 ON 40 /DIN 0150 0110 018 1 MHz
31830-1770-4 ON 40 /JIS 0140 0105 019 1 MHz
8 1818002-02
5 Installation
5.1 Specification s
NOTE
If the specifications are not followed,

Alpha Level can not be held
responsible for any malfunction
L
related to the installation.
5.1.1 Location 2
Air in the transducer will disturb the I
measurement and can cause alarms. The water
transducer should therefore be kept filled with
oil. For this purpose, it must be installed
1 Water transducer
vertically in an upstream direction, sited in a 2 Pipebend
low position, and with an upward pipe l)end
installed between the transducer and the
service tank.
5.1.2 Connection
• The cable shield must be spread out
evenly around the cable connection inside
the box and secured by means of screws
from outside and a collar inside.
• Connections to the terminals must be in
accordance with the interconnection
diagram for the appropriate system.
5.1.3 Oscillator Box

• Make sure the oscillator box is firmly
R
attached to the transducer bracket. ~--------------------~=-------~~
1818002-02 9
5 Installation WT200
10 1818002-02
6 Spare Parts

1 1 31830-5933-1 Oscillator unit, complete
1818002-02 11
6 Spare Parts WT200
12 1818002-02
Alta Laval
Solenoid Valve Block,

Water

1763455-88
1763455-90
1763455-91
1763455-92
1763455-93
Printed Mar2000
Book No. 1818005-02 V4
Alta Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Laval company.
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden·



under divider 1.
Contents
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Design 1
2 Fault Finding 5
3 Maintenance 7
3.1 Periodic Maintenance 7
3.2 Disassembly and Cleaning 8
3.3 Replacing a
Constant Flow Valve 8
4 Technical Data 9
4.1 Specification 9
4.2 Dimensions 10
5 Spare Parts 11
1818005-02
1818005-02
1.1 Application
The solenoid valve block supplies water for
different functions in a separator controlled by
a program unit.
1.2 Design
The valve block consists of four solenoid
valves assembled together in a block. The
solenoid valve (9) is a N.O. valve and used for
drainage.
The two solenoid valves (3) and (4) have a

common water supply channel connected to a
high pressure water supply (B) via a strainer
(6). A vacuum breaker (2) protects the supply
line from negative pressure.
The outlet flow is controlled by a constant

flow valve and a non-return valve mounted
inside the solenoid valves (3) and ( 4).
The solenoid valve (5) is connected to a low

pressure water supply (A) via a strainer (6), 1. Coil
and does not require a constant flow valve and 2. Vacuum breaker
3. Solenoid valve, including constant flow valve
a non-return valve in the valve outlet. 4. Solenoid valve, including constant flow valve
5. Solenoid valve
6. Strainer
7. Over-ride for manual operation
8. AC solenoid indicator
9. Solenoid valve for drain N.O.
10. Manual shut-off valve
A Water inlet, low pressure
8 Water inlet, high pressure
1818005-02
1
1 Function Description Solenoid Valve Block, Water
1 I I ~
rl~'
~:
MV16
Water inlet
I 1
10
Low pressure
+ ' I
06 I Os I DRAIN 10
High
Wo<ocpressure
'"'"'
A plate mounted on the valve block shows the

valve functions. Indicator (8) rotates when the
solenoid is energized, i.e. the valve is open.
The valves (3), ( 4) and (5) in the common
(~
block can be opened and closed manually by
pushing and turning the lever (7).
Vertical position: Automatic operation

Horizontal position: Manually opened valve

When a solenoid is energized, it lets water out
through the valve outlet. The indicator (8)
rotates. The flow of the outgoing water is
determined by the constant flow valve (3) and
( 4), and is kept constant even at large
variations in water supply pressure.
When the control unit switches off the voltage

to the solenoid, the diaphragm goes down and
closes the valve outlet. The AC indicator (8)
stops rotating.
The vacuum breaker (2) lets air in if the
pressure in the supply line is lower than
outside. This is to prevent water being sucked
in from the valve outlet and pol1uting the
supply water line.
2 1818005-02
Solenoid Valve Block, Water 1 Function Description
The solenoid valve (9) is used for drain of

water when leakage in valve (3). When the
solenoid valve (3) is open, the drain valve is
closed, and water is supplied to the separator.
When the solenoid valve (3) closes, the drain
valve opens for drainage. The manual shut-off
valve at the drain outlet is used only for
manual operation of the solenoid valve block.
1818005-02
3
1 Function Description Solenoid Valve Block, Water
1818005-02
4
2 Fault Finding
Fault Probable cause Remedy

Insufficient water Valves in supply line closed or partly Check the supply line and open the valves.
flow closed.
Clogged strainers. Remove and clean the strainers.
Excessive water Damaged (or missing) constant flow valve. Replace constant flow valve.
flow
Leakage Broken diaphragm or sticking parts. Disassemble and clean. Replace worn parts
Dirt affecting the solenoid parts. from spare parts kit and re-assemble.
Noise Unsatisfactory movement of solenoid core Disassemble, clean and re-assemble.

due to dirt.
Valve does not Solenoid core stuck due to dirt. Disassemble, clean and re-assemble.
open
Open circuit due to loose connections or Examine the electrical system and correct the
blown fuses (Indicator stops rotating). fault.
Low voltage (less than 85% of name plate Examine the power supply to the solenoid
rating). valve and correct the fault.
Coil burned out due to too_high voltage Replace the coil. Examine the power supply
(Indicator stops rotating). · and correct the fault.
1818005-02 5
2 Fault Finding Solenoid Valve Block, Water
1818005-02
6
3 Maintenance
3.1 Periodic Maintenance

• Clean the strainers regularly in order to
obtain trouble-free operation.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
If the strainers are clogged, water is

not supplied to the separator bowl for
conditioning of the sludge. This can
lead to breakdown and fatal injury.
• Disassemble and clean the solenoid valve

at regular service intervals or when
required, see below.
• Measure the water flows occasionally to

check if the constant flow valves are worn.
(Manually open the valve for e.g. one
minute and measure the amount of water
flowing out. See the spare parts list for
flow values.)
1818005-02
7
3 Maintenance Solenoid Valve Block, Water
3.2 Disassembly and

Cleaning
NOTE
Switch off electrical power and

depressurize the valve block before
disassembly.
• Make sure the lever for manual operation

is in the vertical position. Otherwise the
diaphragm spring could be damaged.
• Take care not to drop and lose the core

spring when removing the core/diaphragm
subassembly.
• Place the core spring with its wide end

first into the core when assembling the
solenoid. The dosed end should protrude
from top of the core.
• Make sure the 0- rings are properly placed

in their grooves before assembly.
3.3 Replacing a Constant

. Flow Valve
• Lubricate the 0-rings with silicon grease.
• Place the constant flow valve in the

housing without the use of any tool. Make
sure the valve is inserted in the correct
position, with the attached non-return
valve downwards.
• Apply Loctite 542 on the hose nipple

before fitting it.
1818005-02
8
4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
Media Fresh water, max. 10°dH
Media temperature
Water pressure 150 - 700 kPa (1.5 - 7 bar)
Ambient temperature Max. 75 oc
Cable connection Pgll (forcab1e09-011)
Material
Body/bonnet Brass
Electrical data
Supply voltage 48 V, 50/60Hz
Power consumption Holding: 23 VA
Inrush: 45 VA
Enclosure IP 65
Mounting style Upright
Ret. 1763449 Rev. 5
1818005-02
9
4 Technical Data Solenoid Valve Block, Water
4.2 Dimensions
133
I 73
lf)
0>
340
Drain n
013
nf lnf
T T
AO
97 73
Ref. 1763449 Rev. 5
A Water inlet, low pressure

8 Water inlet, high pressure
Article No. Type
1763455-87 MOPX 205
1763455-88 MOPX 207
1763455-90 MOPX 213,309, 310
1763455-91 LOPX 705
1763455-92 LOPX 707, 709, 710
1763455-93 LOPX 713
10 1818005-02
5 Spare Parts

1 1 1762826-01 Solenoid valve
1763459-03 Spare parts kit, including: Recommended for 3 years of

operation
1 1762691-01 Kit tor solenoid valve Kits for solenoid valve include:
6 1 1762702-01 Kit for solenoid valve Core/diaphragm, core spring,
gaskets, 0-ring, pin, spring
1 1763458-03 Spare parts kit, including:
2b 1 Vacuum breaker
2d 2 0-ring
2e 2 Washer
3 1 1762894-80 Constant flow valve, 0.9 1/min LOPX 705

1 1762894-81 Constant flow valve, 1.8 1/min LOPX 707,709,710
1 1762894-82 Constant flow valve, 2.8 1/min LOPX 713
1762894-83 Constant flow valve, 5.5 1/min MOPX 205
1762894-84 Constant flow valve, 11 .o 1/min MOPX207
1762894-86 Constant flow valve, 23.0 1/min MOPX 213, 309,310
4 1 1762894-84 Constant flow valve, 11 .0 1/min MOPX 205,207, LOPX 705

1 1762894-85 Constant flow valve, 18.0 1/min LOPX 707,709, 710, 713
1762894-86 Constant flow valve, 23.0 1/min MOPX 213, 309, 310
5 1 1763444-01 AC solenoid indicator
7 1 1763907-01 Strainer insert
8 1 1763907-02 0-ring
1818005-02 11
5 Spare Parts Solenoid Valve Block, Water
1818005-02
12
·~~
Alta Laval
Solenoid Valve Block, Air

1763524-80
Printed Jun 1995

Book No. 1818009-02 V2:
Alta Laval Marine:& Power .

prior notice.
Laval company.
S -147 80 Tumba
Sweden
©Copyright Alta Laval Separation AB 1995. Printed in Sweden;
Contents
1.1 Application 1
2 Fault Finding 3
3 Maintenance 5
3.1 Replacement of Solenoid

Valve 5
4 Technical Data 7
4.1 Specification 7
4.2 Dimensions 8
5 Spare Parts 9
1818009-02 V2
1818009-{)2 V2
1 Function Description·
1.1 Application
The solenoid valve block supplies compressed
air to the pneumatically operated valve(s) in a
separation system.
1.2 Working Principle 1 3

Compressed air comes in to the valve block at
the shut -off valve (2). The air pressure is
indicated on the pressure gauge (1). 2 5
The valve block comprises one or two
6
solenoid valves ( 4), depending on the
application. When voltage is supplied to a
Valve block with two-solenoid valves
solenoid valve, it opens, and air is supplied
· t. . Pressure gauge
through its outlet. When the ~oltage goes off, · 2. Shut-off valve
the valve closes. The quick de-aerator (6) 3. Drain port
ensures a fast evacuation of air from the 4. Solenoid valve
5. Override for manual valve operation
pneumatically operated valve, when the 6. Quick de-aerator
solenoid valve closes.
The valve has a lever for automatic or manual

operation. When the lever is turned to
horizontal position, the valve is operated
automatically, i.e, it is nonnally closed and
opens when the solenoid is energized. When
the solenoid is non energized, the valve can be
opened manually by turning the levet to the
vertical position.
Valve block with one solenoid valve

Automatic operation; lever in horiz?ntal position.
181 MOQ..O? V') 1

1 Function Description sorenoid varve Block, Air
2 1R1ROO~?W.
2 Fault Finding

No metallic click Open circuit due to loose connection or Examine the electrical system and correct the
when energized. blown fuses. fault.
Low voltage (less than 85% of name plate Examine the power supply to the solenoid
rating). valve and correct the fault
Too high voltage, coil burned-out. Replace the solenoid valve. Examine the pow-
er supply and correct the fault.
Leakage Faulty solenoid valve. Replace the solenoid valve.
181MO~? V') 3
2 Fault Finding Solenoid Valve Block. Air
4 1R1ROO!+-O' V?.
3 Maintenance
3.1 Replacemen~ of
Solenoid Valve
NOTE
Switch off electrical power and close

the shut-off valve to depressurize the
valve block before disassembly.
• Mark each pipe before dismantling to

make sure the inlets and outlets are
connected correctly when the '_'alve is
remounted.
181 ROO!+(!? V'J 5

3 Maintenance Solenoid Valve Block, Air
6 1R1 ROOR-0? \/?.

4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
Valve housing material Brass
Seals Vi ton
Air/gas pressure 0-lObar
Ambient temperature 50°C
Cable gland PG 11 for cable 0 9 - 0 11
Protection class IP65
Voltage 48 V 50/60Hz
Power consumption, holding 2.5W
Power consumption, inrush 10.4 VA
Mounting Valve may be mounted in any position
Continuous duty moulded coil class F
Ref. 1763253 Rev. 3
181 R00!+-0? V? 7
4 Technical Data Solenoid Valve Block, Air
4.2 Dimensions
85
-
0
co
1763524-80 1763498-80
Ref. 1763253 Rev. 3
8 1 B 1 R00!+-0:7 V?.
5 Spare Parts

1 , 1763889-01 Solenoid valve
9
5 Spare Parts Solenoid Valve Block. Air
10 1R1M09-0? V?.
b~
Alfalaval
Pressure Pipe
Assembly
Product No. 176478()...80 to -85

1765780-80 to -81
Printed Aug 1997

Book No. 1818029-02 V2
Alta Laval Marine & Power

prior notice.
Alta Laval company.
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Contents
1 Technical Data 1
1.1 Specification 1
1.2 Dimensions 2
2 Maintenance 5
2.1 Pressure Switch

(Low Pressure) 5
2.1.1 Working Principle 5
2.1.2 Adjusting the
Pressure Setpoint 5
3 Spare Parts 7
1818029-02
1818029-02
1 Technical Data
1.1 Specification
High pressure switch
Pressure Factory set, see table
Cable gland Pg 11 (cable 0 9.5- 12)
Low pressure switch
Pressure Adjustable 0-4 bar
Cable gland Pg 13.5 (cable 0 9- 13)
Pressure gauge
Pressure range 0-6bar
Colour Munsell 7.5 BG 7/2
(on flange connection pipe)
Weight Appr. 6.5 kg (for size 25)
Appr. 7.0 kg (for size 40)
Ref. 1765026 Rev. 1
1818029-02 1
1 Technical Data Pressure Pipe Assembly
1.2 Dimensions
Pipe Assembly art. no.

1764780·80 to ·85
0 0
{\)
F ¢Dh
.371
1 High pressure switch

2 Low pressure switch
3 Pressure gauge
Article No. Pressure Corresponding D Dh F

setting flange size (mm) (mm) (mm)
1764780-80 2.0 bar JIS 25A 10K 125 90 14
1764780~81 2.5 bar JIS 25A 10K 125 90 14
1764780~82 3.5 bar JIS 25A 10K 125 90 14
1764780~83 2.0 bar JIS 40A 10K 150 105 16
1764780~84 2.5 bar JIS 40A 10K 150. 105 16
1764780-85 3.5 bar JIS 40A 10K 150 105 16
2 1818029-02
Pressure Pipe Assembly 1 Technical Data

1765780-80 to -81
0 0
®
11~11
0
1"--
N
-~-
0,0
370 0150
Ref. 1765780 Rev. 0
1 High pressure switch

2 Low pressure switch
3 Pressure gauge
4 Flange connection
1818029-02 3
1 Technical Data Pressure Pipe Assembly
4 1818029-02
2 Maintenance
2.1 Pressure Switch

(Low Pressure)
2.1.1 Working Principle

When oil enters the chamber ( 1), the pressure
is transmitted through a spring-loaded transfer
mechanism (2) to the micros witch (3). The
rnicroswitch contact opens when the pressure
is below the setpoint.
The pressure setpoint is indicated on the

graduated dial. It can be adjusted, see below.
1. Chamber
2. Transfer mechanism
3. Microswitch
2.1.2 Adjusting the Pressure

Setpoint
• Untighten the stop screw (I) a few turns.
• Tum the adjustment screw (2) until the red
indicator points at the desired switching
pressure on the graduated dial.
• Lock the adjustment screw by tightening
the stop screw.
1 Stopscrew
2 Adjustment screw
1818029-02 5
2 Maintenance Pressure Pipe Assembly
6 1818029-02
3 Spare Parts

176478o-SO to -85
I
1 1 1762771-01 Pressure switch (high) 2.5 bar
1762771-02 3.5 bar
1762771-05 2.0 bar
2 1 1763736-01 Pressure switch (low) o -4 bar

3 1 543054-01 Pressure gauge o -6 bar
1818029-02 7
3 Spare Parts
Pressure Pipe Assembly

1765780.80 to -81
'~'

1 1 1764781-80 Pressure switch (high) 2.0 bar. For pipe assembly
1765780-80
1764781-81 2.5 bar. For pipe assembly
1765780-81
2 1 1764782-80 Pressure switch (low) 0-4 bar
3 1 1764783-80 Pressure gauge o -6 bar
8 1818029-02
Flow Indicator
:!
....i

1761974-82
Printed · Jun 1995

Book No. 1818013-02 V2
prior notice.
Laval company.
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alta Laval Separation AB 1995. Printed in Sweden.
Contents
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Deslgn 1
2 Maintentance 3
2.1 Cleaning 3
2.2 Replacement of the Glass or
Needle 3
3 Technical Data 5
3.1 Specification 5
3.2 Dimensions 6
4 Spare Parts 7
1818013-02 V2
1818013-02 V2
1.1 Application
The Flow indicator is used for approximate
indication of oil or water flow.
1.2 Design
The flow indicator is contained in a housing
with threaded connections.
The gauge dial can be turned to be in proper

position for reading.

Incoming oil flows against a spring-loaded
2 3
flap which turns along a fixed curve segment.
As the flap moves, the distance to the curve 1
segment is expanding according to the flow ..." ________
,......,
ratio. , __ ~ ..... .
.••
t
t
The indicating needle moves around the dial

t
by the aid of a magnet mouted on the flap. •
1. Spring
2. Flap
3. Magnet
4. Curve segment
5. Indicator housing
1 81 F\01 :ul? V? 1
1 Function Description Flow Indicator
2 1 R1 R013-0? V~
2 Maintentance
2.1 Cleaning
If magnetic particles from the oil stick to the
sutfaces inside the flow indicator, it will affect
the indication, and cleaning is required.
• Dismantle the flow indicator:
• Apply the special tool in the outer holes of
the dial insert.
• Tum the tool to remove the spring wire
inside the housing which holds the entire
indicator insert.
• Clean the inside of the flow indicator.
2.2 Replacement of the

Glass or Needle
• Remove the glass by applying the special
tool in the holes next to the glass and
turning.
• After replacing the needle adjust its zero
position.
"'
L_------~====~--------~i
181 R01 ::l--0? V? 3

2 Maintentance Flow Indicator
4 1R1A01~? V?.
3 Technical Data
3.1 Specification
Media
1761974-80 Oil, 0-8 m3/h, 10-48 CSt, max. ll0°C
1761974-82 Water, 0- 12 m3/h
Max. operating pressure 0.6 MPa (6 bar)
Mounting style Any position
Accuracy (full scale) ±15%
Weight ::::: 1.4kg
Ref. 1762197 Rev.4
181 R01 ::Hl? V? 5

3 Technical Data Flow Indicator
3.2 Dimensions
30 39
G, 2
1761974-80 17611174-52
¢95 tl91
Ref. 1762197 Rev.4
6 1R1R013-0~ V?.
4 Spare Parts

1 , 1762196-01 Spare parts kit, including: Recommended for 3 years of
operation
4 1 1762181-01 Protection glass 1)
5 1 1762188-80 Needle
7
8 ,
1 1761482-04
260104-69
0-ring
0-ring
1
> The kit also includes a lock ring, which is used only for older versions
181R01~? V? 7
4 Spare Parts Flow Indicator
8 1818013-02 V2
b.:_
AlfaLaval
Pneumatic Change Over

Valve

748393-83
748393-84
748393-85
Printed Jan 1996
Book No. 1818015-02 V3
·· . Alfa Laval Marine & Power

prior notice.
Laval company.
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Separation AB 1996.
warnings before Installation, operation,

In order to make the infonnation clear only foreseeable conditions have

A summary of the safety information is found in the Safety chapter .
under divider 1.
Contents
1.1 Application 1

1.2.1 Activated Valve 2
1.2.2 -Deactivated Valve 2
1.2.3 Manual Change-over 2
2 Fault Finding 3
3 Maintenance 5
3.1 Diaphragm Replacement 5
3.2 Spindle Seal Replacement 6
3.3 Disassembling the Change
Over Valve 7
4 Technical Data
. 9
4.1 Specification 9
4.2 Dimensions 10
5 Spare Parts 11
1818015-02
1818015-02
1.1 Application
The pneumatic change-over valve is used in
the oil supply line to a separator. Oil fed to the .~
valve goes either straight through the valve to
the separator or down to a recirculation Jine.
A B
A. Out, when activated

B. In
C. Out, when deactivated
CAUTION
Entrapment hazard
Do not touch the valve spindle. It

may go down and cause injury to
your fingers.
A. Deactivated valve
B. Activated valve
1818015-02 1
1 Function Description Pneumatic Change OverValve
1.2.1 Activated Valve 1

The valve actuator is pressurized by
compressed air (2). The diaphragm (4) and
piston rod (6) are pressed downwards and 2
opens the valve for flow straight through. 3 """"~EAlr__,
4-...=-M
1.2.2 Deactivated Valve

When the valve actuator is depressurized to
atmospheric pressure, the diaphragm is
pushed up by the spring (5). The piston rod 6
also goes up, which closes the valve for
straight through flow and opens for flow down
through the bottom valve port. 1. Hand wheel
2. Airinlet
3. Piston plates
1.2.3 Manual Change-over 4. Diaphragm
5. Spring
By screwing the hand whee) down, the piston 6. Piston rod
is forced down and the valve opens for
straight-through flow.
2
2 Fault Finding

No change-over or sluggish Diaphragm broken. Fit a new diaphragm.
operation of the change over
valve. Air supply inadequate. Examine 1he solenoid valve block {air) and
the air supply line. and correct the fault.
Air pressure too low. Adjust the air pressure.
Air leakage. Fit a new seal.
Hand wheel screwed down. Turn the hand wheel to top position.
1818015-02 3
2 Fault Finding Pneumatic Change Over Valve
4 1818015-02
3 Maintenance
CAUTION
Burn hazard
Shut off the process oil before

dismantling or making any repairs.
The oil may be hot and cause skin
bum.
NOTE
Make sure air pressure is released

before dismantling.
1
3.1 Diaphragm
Replacement
I. Remove the hexagon bolts and the cover
with the hand wheel.
2
2. Remove the screws to the piston plates
and the seal washer (3) and gasket (6). iL_:_.. ____ __,
3. Remove the upper piston plate and the (§)
diaphragm.
4. Reassemble in reverse order to
disassembly.
1.
2.
Cover
Body
® . ..
3. Seal washer
4 Piston plate, upper
5 Diaphragm
6. Gasket
7. Piston plate, lower
8. Piston rod
1818015-02
5
3 Maintenance Pneumatic Change Over Valve
3.2 Spindle Seal

Replacement 1-c::~o
l. Remove the pin (7) from the piston rod 2~

(6). 31~
l~
2. Disconnect the air connection to the 4--e:J

actuator. s--1 6
7
3. Loosen the screws (8) holding the actuator
to the valve and lift off the entire actuator 8
assembly.
4. Remove the seal sleeve (2) and lift it off

the spindle. Then replace the 0-ring (1)
seal rings (3) and spring (5) by new
spares.
s. Reassemble the spindle sea] in reverse

order to disassembly. Fit the actuator
assembly and reconnect the pin (7) to the
sleeve (6). Fit the air connection. Tighte~
the screws (8).
6 1818015-02
Pneumatic Change Over Valve 3 Maintenance
3.3 Disassembling the

Change Over Valve
The change over valve normally needs no
maintenance. If however, the valve has to be
disassembled, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the air connection and remove
the valve from the pipe flanges.
2. Screw down the hand wheel to its end
position and remove the pin (2) from the
rod (3).
3. Remove the flange (4) from the valve

body (1).
4. The valve spindle (5) can now be pulled

out for access to the valve cone.
5. Reassemble the valve in reverse order to
assembly.
1818015-02 7
3 Maintenance ·Pneumatic Change Over Valve
8 1818015-02
4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
Valve
. Media Mineral oil
Media temperature Max. 150°C
Operating pressure Max. 1.0 MPa (1 0 bar)
Valve housing test pressure Max. 2.0 MPa (20 bar)
Material valve body Spheroidal graphite iron
Pneumatic actuator
Media Air
Operating pressure Max. 1.0 MPa (10 bar)
Test pressure 1.6 MPa (16 bar)
Ref. 748393 Rev. 11
1818015-02 9
4 Technical Data Pneumatic "Change Over Valve
4.2 Dimensions
liJG
I
I
<
l
I
eOs
'
.
!
I
.~_o
-·
c
Ret. 748393 Rev. 11
Dimensions
Kv Weight Flanges
Conn. Article No. A B c D Dh Ds G (m 3/h) (kg) ace. to
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
40 . ~ 1/2" 748393-82 500. 125 200 150 110 18 208 24.5 18 DIN
25 1" 748393-83 475 105 170 115 85 15 142 10.5 9.8 DIN
40 1 112. 748393-84 500 125 200 140 105 19 208 - 18.5 JIS
25 ,.. 748393-85 475 105 170 125 90 19 142 -. 12.5. JJS
10 1818015-02
5 Spare Parts
'-r---r-'
-r---1
2
3
4

, 1 1761448.03 Spare parts kit for pneumatic ac- Connection 25 1>
1761448.04 tuator Connection 40 t)
Contents, see next page
2 1 748393-16 Yoke Connection 40
748393-17 Connection 25
3 1 748393-06 Sleeve Connection 40
748393-07 Connection 25
4 , 748393-05 Spare parts kit for spindle seal Contents. see next page 1)
5 , 748393-08 Flange with gasket Connection 40 DIN
748393-09 Connection 25 JIS
748393-12 Connection 40 DIN
748393-13 Connection 25 JIS
, 748393-10 Spindle with cone and pin Connection 40, L=155
748393-1, Connection 25. L= 147
1. Parts recommended for 3 years of operation
1818015-02 11
5 Spare Parts Pneumatic Change Over Varve

2
. Spare parts kit for pneumatic ac-
tuator includes:
a 1 .0-ring
b 1 Screw
c 3 Sealwash~r
d 3 Gasket
e 1 Diaphragm
f 2 Bearing
3 Spare parts kit for spindle seal in-
dudes:
a 1 Seal sleeve
b 1 0-ring
c 3 Sealing
e 1 Cu-washer
f 1 Spring
g 4 Screw
h 1 Pin
12 1818015-02
AHa laval
Regulating Valve

1762570-81
1762570-82 .
1762570-83
1762570-84
1762570-85
1762570-86
1762570-87
1762570-88
1762570-89
1762570-90
1762570-91
1762570-92
1762570-93
1762570-94
Printed Sep 1998

Book No. 1818012-02 V4
..
i"-'.~
•
":.;_..,
;
~- .
:'•.
~
... ' . . -.
I ._ ~
. ';-:·
'
~;·' .·
". ,· F • .
Alfa Lava I Manne
. & Power. ·,: . ·-· .-.:,.. ·.·>··:,. ·:' ·.' c•,-.-
"···~... ·. . ·. '
prior notice.
Laval company.
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alta Laval Marine & Power AB 1998.
1 Technical Data
1.1 Specification
Media Oil and water

Max. working pressure 1.6 MPa (16 bar)
*)for JIS 50 1.0 Mpa (1 0 bar)
Max. testing pressure 2.4 MPa (24 bar)
Material, valve body Spheroidal graphite iron
Flange standard DIN 2633 or JIS B2213 (16k)
*)for JIS 50 JIS B2213 (lOk)
Ret. 1762570 Rev. 3
1818012-02 1
1 Technical Data Regulating Valve
1.2 Dimensions
x
0
E
:r:
0
'&
l
Dt
!
~~
L 10
~----------------------------~==============~~-------------------~~~
Ret. 1762570 Rev. 3
Article No. Conn. L HL DL DhL DsL DtL Kv Weight Flanges

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (m 3/h) (kg) ace. to
1762570-80 25 100 150 125 85 14 - 6.1 3 DIN
1762570-81 32 110 160 140 100 18 - 9.6 4.4 DIN
1762570-82 40 120 170 150 110 18 - 12.7 6 DIN
1762570-83 50 140 185 165 125 18 - 18.6 8.4 DIN
1762570-84 25 100 152 125 90 19 - 6.1 3 JIS
1762570-85 40 120 168 150 105 19 - 12.7 6 JIS
1762570-86 25 100 150 125 85 14 G3/8 6.1 3 DIN
1762570-87 25 100 150 125 85 14 G1/4 6.1 3 DIN
1762570-88 25 100 152 125 90 19 G1/4 6.1 3 JIS
1762570-89 40 120 170 150 110 18 G1/4 12.7 6 DIN
1762570-90 40 120 168 150 105 19 G1/4 12.7 6 JIS
1762570-91 25 100 152 125 90 19 G3/8 6.1 3 JIS
1762570-92 40 120 170 150 110 18 G3/8 12.7 6 DIN
1762570-93 40 120 168 150 105 19 G3/8 12.7 6 JIS
1762570-92 50 140 185 165 120 19 - 18.6 8.6 JIS
2 1818012-02
2 Spare Parts
I
I
I~
12
L---~~------------~~----------------------------------------------~i6

2 1 1761731-80 Insert complete Conn. ON 25
1761731-81 Conn. ON 32
1761731-82 Conn. ON 40
1761731-83 Conn. ON 50
748393-05 Spare parts kit, including: Parts recommended for 3
years of operation
3a 1 Seal sleeve
3b 1 0-ring
3c 1 Sealing
3d 1 Sleeve
3e 1 Cu-washer
3f 1 Spring
1818012-02 3
2 Spare Parts Regulating Valve
1818012-02
4
r.~
Alfalaval
Flexible Hose,
Oil

537174-81
Printed Jun 1995

Book No. 1818043-02 V2
·Alfa Laval Marine & Power . ·

prior notice.
Laval company.
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Separation AB 1995. Printed in Sweden.
1 Technical Data
1.1 Specification
Max. parallel misalignment, D =12 mm
1.2 Dimensions
8 7 6 4 3 2 1 5
REF. 537174
Ret. 537174 Rev.6
1. Flexible hose 5. Braiding

2. Steel sleeve 6. Connecting hose, complete (items 1-5)
3. Sleeve 7. Packing
4. Union nut, G 1 114 8. Nipple, 0 34 x 2 (welding connection)
Article No. 537174-80 =Item 6
Article No. 537174-81 =Item 6, 7 and 8
1818043-02 V2 1
1 Technical Data Flexible Hose, Oil
2 1818043-Q2 V2
Flexible Hose~
Water
Product No. 1764007-o1

1764007-o2
1764007-o3
Printed Jun 1995
Book No. 1818034-02 V2
Alfa Laval Marine & Power

prior notice.
suggestions for Improvement of this publication would be
Laval company.
Published by: Alfa-Laval Separation AB
Marine & Power Oil Treatment Divi~ion
S- 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Separation AB 1995. Printed in Sweden.
1 Technical Data
1.1 Specification
·Media Water
Media temperature Max.sooc
Media pressure Max. 15 bar
Hose (inner diameter) 012
Material
Hose Nitrile rubber with hose braid of galvanized
steel wire
Connection Ni. plated brass
Gasket Fibre (2 gaskets included in delivery)
Ref. 1764007 Ffev.1
1.2 Dimensions
523
• •
A
Ref. 1764007 Rett 1
B.:Gasket
Article No.. A (length) mm

1764007-o1 1500±10
1764007-o2 2000±10
1764007-o3 3000±10
-
1818034-02 V2 1
1 Technical Data Flexible Hose, Water .
2
1818034-02VZ
b~
AHa Laval
Flexible Hose,
Water
Product No. 1763906-01 .

1763906-02
1763906-03
Printed Apr1996
Book No. 1818036-02 V3
prior notice.
Laval company.
S - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
1 Technical Data
1.1 Specification
Media Water
Media pressure Max. 15 bar
Hose (inner diameter) 012
Material
Hose Nitrile rubber with hose braid of galvanized
steel wire
Connection Ni. plated brass
Gasket Fibre
Ref. 1763906 Rev. 2
1.2 Dimensions
A ~
~----------------------------------------------------------------~~
Ref. 1763906 Rev. 2
Article No. A (length) mm B

1763906-01 2000 ± 10
1763906-02 3000 ± 10 2 x Gasket
1763906-03 1500 ± 10
1818036-02 1
1 Technical Data Flexible Hose, Water
2 1818036-02
Thermometer

1761626-02
1761626-03
1761626-04
1761626-05
1764999-80
1764999-81
Printed Oct 1995

Book No. 1818045-02 V1
· Alfa Laval Marine &/Pow~r .· .

prior notice.
Laval company.
S -14780 Tumba
Sweden
©Copyright Alfa Laval Separation AB 1995.
1 Technical Data
1. 1 Specification
1.1.1 Thermometer Complete

Product No: 1761626-01 to 05
Material:
Thermometer well Brass
Housing Light metal
Weight ::::::0.3 kg
Temperature range:
1761626-01 to 04 0-120 oc (32-250 °F)
1761626-05 0-200 oc (32-390 °F)
Ret. 1761626 Rev. 5
1.1.2 Thermometer Complete With

Pipe Flanges
Product No: 17649999-80 to 81
Material:
Thermometer well Brass
Housing Light metal
Pipe and flanges Carbon steel
Weight:
DN25 ::::::3.3 kg
DN40 ::::::4.3 kg
Temperature range 0-120 oc (32-250 °F)
Ret. 1764999 Rev. o
1818045-02 1
1 Technical Data Thermometer
---·----------------------------------
1.2 Dimensions
1.2.1 Thermometer Complete

Product No: 1761626-01 to 05
~30
I
I
I I
"F
i ·c I
I I
::i
I
I
I
0
I N
2
I
G1/2 I
I N
_J
I
"
I -1-
I
$
§
)(
Ret. 1761626 Rev. 5
Length:
1761626-01 L1 = 110 L2=63
1761626-02 L1 = 150 L2=63
1761626-03 L1 = 200 L2=63
1761626-04 Ll = 110 L2=40
1761626-05 Ll = 150 L2=63
2 1818045-02
Thermometer 1 Technical Data
1.2.2 Thermometer Complete With

Pipe Flanges
Product No: 17649999-80 to 81
I J
-
~ -~
jra-
I .,
II
"" ..
...
I ..
.., I •
!0 a
I •
T
~
I
<3
....:r T
~
rr
I
I
= ;=:>
c--
-
'~
-C[J-
___ J_ ___
'> I
/- '
-- -- V'
~•
\
I
.r=
D
'S
D
s
' J
' r~. 019
I
,...>'-
-
f--
120
Ref. 1765059 Rev. o
Flange connection with socket:

1764999-80 JIS 40A 10K 0125 090
1764999-81 JIS 25A 10K 0140 0105
1818045-02 3
1 Technical Data Thermometer
4 1818045-02
Temperature Sensor
Product No. 1764439~80

1764998-80
1764998-81
Printed Jun 1997

Book No. 1818059-02 V3
· Alta Laval Marine & Power , I

prior notice.
gratefully appreciated. ·
Laval company.
S -147 80Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright AI fa Laval Separation AB 1997.
Contents
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Design 1
1.4 Installation 2
2 Technical Data 3
2.1 Specification 3
2.2 Dimensions 4
2.2.1 Without pipe and flanges 4
2.2.2 With pipe and flanges 5
1818059-02
181805~2
1.1 Application
The temperature sensor measures temperature
and is for use with Alfa Laval control systems.
1.2 Design
The sensor has two temperature dependent
elements with terminals for connection to a
control unit. One of the elements is used for
the control loop.
The sensor spring pocket acts as a non-return

Temperature sensor
valve. When the sensor is mounted in the 1. Spring Pocket
pocket, a spring-loaded seat opens so that oil
has direct contact with the sensor. The sensor
can be taken out of the pocket without oil
leakage.
The temperature sensor is available either on

its own with spring pocket included (product
no. 1764439-80), or as a kit, mounted on a
pipe with flanges (product no.
1764998-80, 81 ).
Temp. sensor mounted on pipe with flanges
1818059-02 1
1 Function Description Temperature Sensor
1.3
._,_- --
~-
Working
--
. -
Principle-
-. - . . - ...... --- ----·-·--
The two temperature dependent elements each

have three connections and are connected to a
L ~ I
a:i
-----------=,==2=-~=3~----------~·
00
bridgecrrcuit
Temperature dependent element
The voltage potential over the resistor is
measured in the measuring circuit of the
control unit. Thy:Y.~Jpe,['~'~I]d.J~aF~d a~ a ·: :_:·:· . ,
temperature rea,qing. or !Us~dJorthe,control- , ..
... <_. t,.. ) ........ ~ .• J - • • • , • - • • •• - ~ - -·
loop. -
..... {', •'
,. i ~ t ·, . • .. . j
• • • ~ ; i • • ·.; ' ~ ••
.- __
The temperamr~__sen~pJLs-llq1;1ld be·tnP\ll_ltecnn~-:~
the pipe so that the tip of the sensor is in the ..
centre of the pipe. · ''' ~' : ,
! I
·. ~ '
Sensor mounting
2 181805~2
2 Technical Data ;
..
'
,' ,. { .... ~
')
; .
\
•: ',.
! . . -'
'!<
~. ·.: ' "·

'
:;· . .'
,·
2.1 Specification 1\ • ~ :.:~' -~:

.
r_
.
~j·}:.~--~: ;~ C 1. .! ~ ~ ~; .~:1L-: ~~~
• .. . - ' '· • . ., ::. ... ·. • ! . . . ' - . •. •.. . :I . . I . - •')
Insert Pt 100 msert w1th ·ceramic ;socket ' ·, · l · , ... ,_. : • · ·

- .- .. . -.;.·, ! - - - •. . 1 ~ • ~ ' - • £. . . ' .. '- -·~-h... +
according't<>DIN-43760 Class' B..::.·.: _.L;';: ;, ,:,.-':
(~>>)i
Connection Two-wire
Temperature range -100 octo +200 oc (-159 °F.to -i:-390 ~F)
Insert material stainless steel and br~s?;} :· :, ~ : ~i< _: ..::.· i"i ~ r ;~
Connection head BUZ ty·peaccordihg'to~ DIN 43729: · .. ·_. · ·: ,. · ;·
' -~ ·_. . i '·; .. ~ 1 . :) t' ~ • ; '. : ' .\. ~ i ·..
Connection head material
Cable entry gl~d PG16
Enclosure- · · '· IP65
Maximum. test current 5mA
Spring pocket mateljc:ll .... Brass
Spring material . . Spring steel
0-ring mate~al Fluorcarbon rubber
Weight:
Without pipe and flanges 0.5 kg
'
With pipe and, flanges. 4.5kg
Ref. 1764439 Rev. o
1818059-02 3
2 Technical Data
~~··.···
Temperature Sensor
, ... -· ••• ,. _, ~ - • ' J
• ,1'-.t ... -.... ,. - ._;. f ·.' •.-...
2.2 Dimensions _I'
2.2.1 Without pipe and flanges

Product No: 1764439-80
'·
~., ....:...
;·-
. ; ~ • r- .
> ·--·~P-·-! ... > J
Ref. 1764439 Rev. 0
4 1818059-02
(~ :;~, c~ !•'3-:.~f ~;ff~);..~ "C ~:
·- - --- ----- 2 -T-echnicai-Data
2.2.2 With pipe and flanges

PToduct~o: 1764998-80,81 \.•...
~ Ol
~ ";.
~ • •:~
-: '
. --... --.
~
·•\
~. .'
I
·-
_.::..~ ··---7·_1
-:~-.~ ·.~...
... . . ·--'
Ret. 1765058 Rev. o; /

/
.
Flange connection~with: s<;>c~et: ..

1764998-80: . ns··~s~ lOK
1818059-02 5
6 1818059-02

Alfa Laval Lopx 705

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alfa Laval Lopx 705

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

I

5 Alarms and Fault FiAding

8 Separato'r Manu·al (incl. fault finding)

9 Component Descripttons (incl. fault finding)

: · Alta Laval Marine & Power

1.1 Warning Signs 1

1.2 Specific Factors 3

1.1 Warning Signs

This type of safety instruction

This type of safety instruction

This type of safety instruction

The warning sign used when there is a risk to

This type of safety instruction

The warning sign is also used when there is a

This sign is used to stress important

1.2 Specific Factors

Materials are carefully chosen and parts are

The separation system is designed and

Incorrect operation or maintenance is likely to

These compulsory safety instructions apply:

If safety instructions and installation

If power cables have been altered,

Excessive vibration may cause

Do not enter the room after an

Do not start the separator after an

After an emergency stop the

If theA 7-10 (FOPX) alarm is not

If the interval between sludge

Operation in stand-by mode for a

Failure to follow the above

If the separator is not assembled and

Never discharge a vibrating separator.

Running a separator build for 50 Hz

Do not begin maintenance work

Do not switch on without all covers

Excess of maximum idling time may

Excessive noise can cause damage to

Never reset an alarm without first

Each new bunker requires

Operating water shortage may result

Experience has shown that if

Failure to clean the separator bowl,

Do not switch on without all cover

Process pipes, lubrication oil and

Oil leakage may make the floor

Be sure to study all relevant

If safety instructions, installation

LOPX Separation System

Printed Aug 1997

· Alfa Laval Marine & Power

2.1 System Layout 4

3 The ALCAP LOPX Process 1

3.2 Low Water Content 8

This system description is valid for the

The LOPX separation systems are designed

In the LOPX process, heated lubricating oil is

An LOPX system comprises:

The LOPX separator operates as a clarifier.

The control unit supervises the entire

At nom1al conditions, characterized by low or

Water is used in the separation process, and

The control unit adapts the process to changed

2.1 System Layout

The inlet and outlet arrows indicate the